{"1": {"fulltext": "4 ff\\ns j ;s\\nt! i\\nif\\nu\\niS,\\ni x r\\nV\\nis-\\n1\\nP", "height": "4153", "width": "2664", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0001.jp2"}, "2": {"fulltext": "LIBRARY OF CONGRESS.\\nChap._______ Copyright No._ j\\ni\\nShelf_*_X:t\\nUNITED STATES OF AMERICA.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0002.jp2"}, "3": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0003.jp2"}, "4": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0004.jp2"}, "5": {"fulltext": "T H E\\nCORNICE WORK\\nMANUAL\\nAN EXPOSITION OF CORNICE WORK IN ALL ITS\\nBRANCHES\\nCompiled from Files of THE AMERICAN ARTISAN\\nBy\\nSIDNEY P. JOHNSTON.\\n\u00c2\u00bbI v v\\nFor\\nAEE IN ANY WAY INTERESTED IN THE PRACTICAL\\nWORKING OF SHEET METAL.\\n1900\\nThe American Artisan Press,\\n69 Dearborn Street,\\nChicago.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0005.jp2"}, "6": {"fulltext": "TWO COPIES received.\\nLibrary cr C 6 Rgret%\\nOffice o i tI b\u00c2\u00ab\\nFEB 1 1900\\nRegister of Copyrlgfef*\\nEntered according to Act of Congress in\\nthe year 1900, by\\nDANIEL STERN,\\nIn the Office of the Librarian of Congress,\\nat Washington, D. C.\\nS GONB 03PY,\\nh b- r X-. DC7\\nl", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0006.jp2"}, "7": {"fulltext": "PREFACE.\\nModern architecture has witnessed no change mo re important than\\nthe general substitution of metal for wood in building construction.\\nThe worker in wood is less in evidence than formerly in the erection of\\nresidences and stores, while his brother worker in sheet metals is find\u00c2\u00ac\\ning his field constantly widening. As evidence of this I need only cite\\nthe steady growth of the sheet metal cornice trade which less than two\\nscore years ago was of very insignificant proportions, but is to-day one\\nof the most important of the building trades.\\nThis branch of work presents exceptional chances to the clever\\nmechanic, as there is a general demand for workmen in this line in all\\nsections of the country, and the industry is one capable of wide\\ndevelopment, there being many places where the practical sheet metal\\ncornice worker can establish a business of considerable dimensions with\\nless capital and labor of introduction than is necessary in most other lines.\\nAt the same time the work is of a character demanding a thorough\\ntechnical acquaintance with its various details, an ability to draw the\\nvarious complicated patterns that are necessary, and a familiarity with\\nthe cost of doing a given work that will enable the cornice worker to\\nmake an estimate fully covering all constructional details.\\nIt is passing strange that a field in which there is so keen a demand\\nfor practical information should have been so systematically neglected\\nby technical writers. The only work treating of the subject that has\\never appeared, to the best of my knowledge, was issued nearly a score\\nof years ago before the rise of the present demand for bizarre and", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0007.jp2"}, "8": {"fulltext": "PREFACE.\\ngrotesque designs which although familiar to the trade to-day are\\nentirely alien to the run of patterns prevalent in the early eighties.\\nThat there is a field for a book of the character of this one is amply\\nproven by the many calls that have been made by practical sheet metal\\nworkers for a book giving a systematic and progressive course of\\ninstruction in the subject. I have striven to the best of my ability to\\nproduce a work of practical value on this subject, that would furnish\\nanswers to the multifarious questions arising in the daily work of\\ncornice workers.\\nIt is my modest hope that this book may cover its chosen field in\\na creditable manner, and prove an acceptable workshop companion for\\nmechanics whose needs in this line have been up to the present strangely\\nneglected by technical writers.\\nThe Compiler.\\nChicago, III., Jan. 1900.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0008.jp2"}, "9": {"fulltext": "CONTENTS.\\nPAGE.\\nCHAPTER I.\\nThe Cutter\u00e2\u0080\u0099s Bench i\\nCHAPTER II.\\nCutters\u00e2\u0080\u0099 Tooes. 3\\nCHAPTER III.\\nDrawing Tools and Angles. 7\\nCHAPTER IV.\\nThe Entablature. 10\\nCHAPTER V.\\nThe Reading op Drawings. 13\\nCHAPTER VI.\\nThe Measuring of Cornices. 17\\nCHAPTER VII.\\nEstimating 20\\nCHAPTER VIII.\\nRight Angle Miter Pattern. 23\\nCHAPTER IX.\\nBracket Patterns. 28\\nCHAPTER X.\\nPatterns for Panel Sections. 33\\nCHAPTER XI.\\nRight-Angle Return Miter Patterns. 35\\nCHAPTER XII.\\nPatterns of a Pediment and Their Development. 39", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0009.jp2"}, "10": {"fulltext": "contents.\\npa6 E-\\n4\\nCHAPTER XIII.\\nThe Patterns for a Segmental Section of a Pediment 44\\nCHAPTER XIV.\\nDetails and Patterns for a Finial. 5 l\\nCHAPTER XV.\\nBracings and Fastenings of Cornices to Buildings. 56\\nCHAPTER XVI.\\nStaging and Scaffolding for Cornice Work. 64\\nCHAPTER XVII.\\nOrnament Stamping Machine. 69\\nCHAPTER XVIII.\\nThe Management of Ropes and Hoisting Tackle. 73\\nCHAPTER XIX.\\nPlan and Details of a Gable and Horizontal Cornice. 83\\nCHAPTER XX.\\nDetails of Slating and Slaters\u00e2\u0080\u0099 Tools. 105\\nCHAPTER XXI.\\nDetails for Horizontal and Raking Miter Patterns. 113\\nCHAPTER XXII.\\nDevelopment of Details and Patterns of the Turrets. 135", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0010.jp2"}, "11": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n1\\nI.\\nTHE CUTTERS BEHCH-\\nThe present development of the cornice trade and particular^ its tre\u00c2\u00ac\\nmendous increase, in volume of business and work done, the variety of de\u00c2\u00ac\\nsigns which the present rage for bizarre and grotesque designs has brought\\nout, most of them being out of the usual run as found in some of the so-\\ncalled pattern books now on the market; the entire absence of a system\u00c2\u00ac\\natic and progressive course of instruction on this subject, embracing at once\\nall the different parts and branches of the cornice business, each one in de-\\nFig.l\\nail, such as estimating, laying out or, as commonly designated in the shop,\\nas cutting, complete table of weights, cost of material and time required\\nin getting out work, descriptions of the various kinds of machinery used in\\ncornice shops, their manipulation to the best advantage; the description\\nand manner of working circular work, the best method and different ways\\nof getting out work and its putting up on buildings, staging, scaffolding,\\nand the economical handling of men on outside work\u00e2\u0080\u0094in fact on most of\\nthese subjects there being none, or at least very little reliable information,\\nthe following series of articles having been prepared to meet this want.\\nOne of the first requisite appliances or tools needed in every comice\\nshop is a drawing table or cutter\u00e2\u0080\u0099s bench. The size and general arrange\u00c2\u00ac\\nment of the same I leave to the judgment and taste of the person using\\nit. As the location and amount of space in different shops to be devoted\\nto the location of the cutter\u00e2\u0080\u0099s bench varies and sometimes other considera\u00c2\u00ac\\ntions have to be taken into account, this would render it out of the ques\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion to make the size of the table by a fixed rule to meet all cases, but a\\ngood point to follow is to have it as large as possible. The most con\u00c2\u00ac\\nvenient size for work is 50 inches wide by 12 to 15 feet long.\\nThe wood to make same is of white pine, 1 inch stuff being the thickness\\nof material usually employed, but a table of 1\u00c2\u00a3 or 1J inch would be far\\npreferable by reason of greater strength and greater amount of material for\\ndressing the surface when it becomes rough from the use of prick punch.\\nFig. 1 shows the general manner of construction of a board as de.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0011.jp2"}, "12": {"fulltext": "2\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nscribed in the foregoing. The boards of which the table is made ought not\\nto exceed 8 inches in width, glued together and cleated, as Fig. 1 shows on", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0012.jp2"}, "13": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n3\\nthe bottom, or the same may be mortised and shaped as in Fig. 5 In some\\ncases the boards are grooved underneath, lengthwise, as Fig. 6 shows. It is\\nunderstood, of course, that the size and ends are to be parallel to each op\u00c2\u00ac\\nposite edge. A stiff band of iron is sometimes fastened to the outer edge\\nto keep the same true and free from wear.\\nThe standard as Fig. 2 gives is the most convenient shape in use. This\\nis also made of pine wood. The Figures 3 and 4 gives the details of its\\nconstruction. Make the head piece 2 inches thick by 5 inches deep, the\\nlegs out of 1^ inch thick and 5 inch wide stuff; when complete about 16\\ninches apart at the bottom. The cleats, as shown on the side of legs of\\nstandards, are to be fastened with screws, while the shorter ones are more\\ntised, as the drawing shows. The height of the standards, of which there\\nare two, may be regulated to suit the convenience of the person using the\\ntable, the usual height being from 36 to 42 inches.\\nII.\\nGUTTER\u00e2\u0080\u0099S TOOLiS.\\nThe most important mechanic in cornice shops generally is the cutter,\\non whom not only the work of drawing, cutting and getting out all patterns\\nused for correct fitting and putting work together in the shop depends, but\\nalso, particularly in smaller shops, the duties of foreman both inside the\\nshop, where the work is erected and made ready, and on the outside the\\nsuperintending, the putting up of work and general management of the work\u00c2\u00ac\\ningmen. The figuring and estimating in most shops is also done by him.\\nIn larger establishments his duties, of course, more strictly conform to\\nwhat the name cutter in a cornice shop implies, namely, the getting out and\\ncutting of patterns from scale drawings, sketches and details, etc., as furn\u00c2\u00ac\\nished by architects, to full-size patterns or templates as the work on hand", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0013.jp2"}, "14": {"fulltext": "4\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ndemands. If the cutter, besides the ability to do the work implied in the\\nforegoing, has also a good knowledge of the principles of designing which\\nenter into the general construction of cornice work, he will find it of great\\nassistance and value as an aid in the getting up of substitute drawings or in\\naltering architects\u00e2\u0080\u0099 drawings, as it often happens that changes are demanded\\nsometimes necessitating a partial or even a wholly new design of the work\\nin hand. Bear this in mind, that in no branch is it so often the case that\\nit is more expedient to sacrifice utility to beauty or vice versa than in the\\ncutter\u00e2\u0080\u0099s branch.\\nIn the following I will give a list of tools which are generally found\\nmost useful for a cutter\u00e2\u0080\u0099s outfit. This does not imply that each and every\\none of the different tools is indispensable. The amount and quality of tools\\none has or uses is largely a matter of individual choice, some cutters in the\\nlarger establishments having even a larger number of tools than here enu\u00c2\u00ac\\nmerated. I would add that they are all of the best quality, finish and make.\\nThe best course to follow is: When procuring tools, no matter how few, get\\nthem of a good grade, as a good tool is the cheapest in the long run and is\\nalways a more satisfactory implement to work with than an inferior and\\npoorly made one. It is understood that this list is merely to indicate what\\nis most desirable to have at the beginning; when one becomes more pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nficient and expert, fewer tools than here given will nerhaps amply suffice.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0014.jp2"}, "15": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n5\\nCORNICE CUTTERS\u00e2\u0080\u0099 TOOLS.\\nTee Squares, 2, 4 and 6 feet long one each, one steel or wooden straight\\nedge, one 3 foot Rule.\\nOne 2 foot Rule.\\nScale Rules, i, 3-16, A, J, i, J and 1 in.\\nOne Steel Square, nickel pfatcd.\\nProtractor Scale, horn or brass.\\nOne Perspective Lineal, one bevel angle.\\nOne Set Beam Compasses.\\nOne Set Trammel Points with pencil attachment.\\nRubber Erasers.\\nj Doz. Med. Hard Lead Pencils.\\nJ Red Marking Crayons.\\nBlue\\nOne Doz. Thumb Tacks.\\nOne Set Dividers.\\nBeam Compasses with needle points, inking pen and lengthening bar.\\nInking Pens.\\nOne Set of Angles.\\nSeveral Marking Curves.\\nRoll of Manilla Drawing Paper.\\nTOOLS FOR MARKING ON IRON.\\nTwo Angles, one 30 and 60 degrees, one of 45 degrees.\\nSeveral Good Marking Awls.\\nPrick Punches.\\nWeights for weighing down patterns on table.\\nSmall Mallet or Hammer for tapping prick punch.\\nOne Pair Straight-Handled Shears, large.\\nsmall, commonly called platers\u00e2\u0080\u0099 shears.\\nCircular Shears.\\nHawk\u00e2\u0080\u0099s Bill Shears.\\nShears, called roofers\u00e2\u0080\u0099 shears.\\nOne Standard Wire Gauge.\\nThe above list embraces as complete an assortment of tools as the\\ncutter will probably ever be called on to use in any case in practice. The\\nfollowing gives a more detailed description of the most used and important\\ntools.\\nTee squares should be perfectly true and straight every way; the head\\non the smaller ones it would be well to have fixed stationary, but for the\\nlarger sizes a partial swivel head is desirable. The choice of material is\\nmerely a question of how much a person cares to expend for one, the kinds\\nmade of beech or maple wood being the cheaper grades; higher priced\\nsquares are made of different kinds of wood glued together\u00e2\u0080\u0094mahogany,\\nhard rubber, steel, etc. Fig. 7 gives a tee square with a partial swiveled\\nhead.\\nA steel straight edge is the preferable one for use in marking lines on", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0015.jp2"}, "16": {"fulltext": "6\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\niron, but its use for drawing lines on paper is rather heavy, so that a wooden\\nstraight edge would be the most convenient kind for this purpose. Absolute\\ncorrectness in every way is the quality demanded in this tool.\\nAlmost every mechanic has a 2 and also a 3-foot rule. These need no\\nparticular description.\\nScale rules are divided into the various subdivisions of feet most com\u00c2\u00ac\\nmonly used by architects on drawings. The scales are marked on the vari\u00c2\u00ac\\nous surfaces of the rule as Fig. 8 shows. Fig. 8 gives a very convenient\\ntool of this kind for ready use. It is divided into J, and 1 inch to the\\nfoot. Other styles may be selected, of which there are a great variety, to\\nsuit the fancy or taste of the purchaser.\\nThe common 2 foot square is also a tool found in any mechanic\u00e2\u0080\u0099s kit,\\nthe nickel-plated square being the neatest and also the most durable kind,", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0016.jp2"}, "17": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n1\\nA very handy tool for the cutter\u00e2\u0080\u0099s use is a square made of wood, about the\\nsize of an ordinary steel square; its lightness and ease of handling make it\\na great favorite with many cutters.\\nProtractor scales, sometimes called degree scales, are made of horn,\\nbrass, German silver, etc. This tool is used to find the various degrees of\\ncircles, angles for drawing polygons, etc. Fig. 9 shows a protractor scale\\nmade of metal. The circle divided into 360 degrees, these divided into\\nminutes, and these again divided into seconds are shown on some of these\\nscales, that is on some of the more expensive kinds. The protractor shown\\n*n Fig. 9 being a semicircle shows 180 degrees. The finer or more minute\\nsubdivisions rarely being used by a cutter, a kind as shown by Fig. 9 will\\nanswer all practical purposes.\\nA pair of dividers made of wood, with the end of one leg arranged to\\nhold a pencil or crayon point, wfil be found to be a very convenient tool,\\nparticularly for large work.\\nThe perspective lineal is a very useful tool, especially when new de\u00c2\u00ac\\nsigns are prepared, as sometimes perspective drawings are made to show\\na view of the work when finished.\\nThe ordinary bevel can be bought in any hardware store.\\nThe Figures 10 and 11 give a pair of beam compasses. On large work,\\ncurves, circles, etc., for precise and accurate work they are the best. Inking\\nand pencil point attachments are provided with this tool, it is very light and\\neasily handled, but is almost too delicate to be used on rough work, such as\\nmarking on iron, etc.\\nThe heavier and stronger tool usually used for the last purpose named\\nare the trammels; the kind with a lead pencil attachment is a very handy\\ntool.\\nIII.\\nDHAUJUHO TOOLiS AND AMGLiHS.\\nAmong the most delicate and at the same time most used drawing\\ntools are the set of dividers and compasses, as shown by Figs. 20, 21, 22\\nand 23. These tools should be of the best quality one is able to procure.\\nA good tool of this kind always gives the best satisfaction and will, with\\ncare, last a lifetime. Drawing curves, or sweeps, such as come most handy\\nfor drawing ovals, parabolic and irregular curves, are also very desirable.\\nAngles as shown by Figs. 12, 13, 14 and 15, in Article II, are the most\\ncommonly used. These are made of beech, pear, maple wood, hard rub\u00c2\u00ac\\nber, metal and amber, the latter material being especially clean, strong", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0017.jp2"}, "18": {"fulltext": "8\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nand transparent. Fig. 15, Article II, gives an equilateral triangle, a handy\\naad much-used angle. The respective degrees of the different sides of all\\nthe angles are given in the drawings. Some of the most useful angles in\\na cornice shop drawing room are the angles shown in Fig. 17, Article II.\\nThey form respectively the angles of the most used geometrical figures in\\ncornice work, such as\\nPentagon, or 5 sided polygon.\\nHexagon, 6\\nOctagon, 8\\nDecagon, 10\\nThe various angles and degrees that the sides of these polygons have\\nto each other are fully shown in drawing Fig. 17, Article II. Fig. 18, Arti\u00c2\u00ac\\ncle II, shows a quarter of an octagon inscribed in a circle and gives the\\nmethod to obtain the degrees of the angles as shown by Fig. 17. A more\\ndetailed description will be given further on. Fig. 19, Article II, gives a pretty\\nshape for a weight to hold paper patterns down on the iron while pricking\\nFIG. 20 FIG. 21 FIG. 22\\npoints through the paper pattern on to the iron. A tin or iron body in the\\nshape of a frustum of a cone is made, as drawing shows, double seam on\\nbottom. Fill the body full of sand: then put on cover, to which a. ring has\\nbeen fastened, as Fig. 19 shows. The top may either be burred and sol\u00c2\u00ac\\ndered onto the body, or it may be burred and seamed onto the tody as\\nsuits the maker. Several of these weights are used.\\nGood lead pencils, of a medium grade of hardness, and rubber erasers\\nare indispensable as a matter of course.\\nRed, blue and black marking crayons are used by many cutters; when\\non complicated work, a great many different sets of lines are used. To fa\u00c2\u00ac\\ncilitate the ready finding of some particular set of lines, they sometimes touch\\nUp the desired lines with the crayons, to color as suits their fancy.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0018.jp2"}, "19": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n9\\nThumb tacks which have their pins screwed into the head, are the\\nbest; smooth, rounding heads are better than the sharp-cornered, project\u00c2\u00ac\\ning heads.\\nThe different styles and kinds of shears as given in the list of tools are\\ngenerally used for this work. Prices and full descriptions can be found in\\nalmost all catalogues of tinners\u00e2\u0080\u0099 tool supply houses. A pair of 6 -inch and\\nalso a pair of 12-inch wing dividers are useful. A standard wire gauge, of\\nany style or pattern, is indispensable.\\nThe foregoing is, in brief, a condensed description of the tools that\\nare most used for the purposes indicated. Those who want a more elaborate\\ntreatise on the various kinds of drawing tools I would refer to the numer\u00c2\u00ac\\nous books, pamphlets and essays published on this subject; as I regard it\\nout of the province of these papers to give any more space than what is ab\u00c2\u00ac\\nsolutely necessary for the practical understanding of the various tools and\\ntheir use as far as is required in the cornice shop.\\nThe following table gives some of the properties of the first twelve\\nregular polygons on a plane surface:\\nTake.the Fig. 18, Article II; the circumferential straight lines which\\nmake two sides or one-quarter of a regular octagon or eight-sided polygon.\\nNow from point C, or center, the line that cuts through the point where the\\ntwo circumferential straight lines meet, thus divide the quarter into\\neights or into two isosceles triangles. Assuming the point C as center, or\\napex, the lines diverge from each other at an angle of 45\u00c2\u00b0 in an octagonal\\nfigure; in a hexagonal angle, 60\u00c2\u00b0, etc., as the table fully gives. The\\nforegoing is the central figure. The polygon angle is formed by the junc\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion of any two circumferential lines of any regular polygon. The respective\\ndegrees are given in column three. Taking either end of the\\nFIG. 23\\ncircumferential lines of any regular polygon where it forms\\n8 junction with either one of the lines leading from its extreme ends to the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0019.jp2"}, "20": {"fulltext": "10\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ncenter of the regular polygon of which the circumferential line is a denomi\u00c2\u00ac\\nnative part, the following angles will occur as set forth in the table, column\\nfour, and we will call them the degrees of the base angles. The Figures 17\\nand 18, Article II, fully show how these tables are applied. The areas of\\nall the regular polygons are figured by triangulation.\\nNames of\\nPolygon.\\nx\\\\ UMBEIl\\nOF\\nSides.\\nCentral\\nAngle.\\nPolygon\\nAngle.\\nBase\\nAngles.\\nTriangle.\\n3\\n120\u00c2\u00b0\\n60\u00c2\u00b0\\n30\u00c2\u00b0\\nSquare.\\n4\\n90\u00c2\u00b0\\n90\u00c2\u00b0\\n45\u00c2\u00b0\\nPentagon\\n5\\n72\u00c2\u00b0\\n108\u00c2\u00b0\\n54\u00c2\u00b0\\nHexagon.\\n6\\n60\u00c2\u00b0\\n120\u00c2\u00b0\\n00\u00c2\u00b0\\nHeptagon.\\n7\\n51\u00c2\u00b0 43\\n128\u00c2\u00b0 17\\n04 2-7\u00c2\u00b0\\nOctagon.\\n8\\n45\u00c2\u00b0\\n135\u00c2\u00b0\\n67 1-2\u00c2\u00b0\\nNonagon\\n9\\n40\u00c2\u00b0\\n140\u00c2\u00b0\\n70\u00c2\u00b0\\nDecagon..\\n10\\n36\u00c2\u00b0\\n144\u00c2\u00b0\\n72\u00c2\u00b0\\nUndecagon.\\n11\\n32\u00c2\u00b0 13\\n147\u00c2\u00b0 47\\n73 7-1\u00c2\u00b0\\nDodecagon.\\n12\\n30\u00c2\u00b0\\n150\u00c2\u00b0\\n75\u00c2\u00b01\\nProbably one of the most bandy angles to the cutter is the Tret angle,\\nFig. 15, Article II. With it any angle that is a multiple of 15\u00c2\u00b0 can be\\nplotted or measured in connection with the tee square. It has, as the name\\nimplies, four angles, 90\u00c2\u00b0, 60\u00c2\u00b0, 75\u00c2\u00b0, and 135\u00c2\u00b0. By reversing, the an\u00c2\u00ac\\ngles 30\u00c2\u00b0 x 60\u00c2\u00b0, 45\u00c2\u00b0 x 45\u00c2\u00b0 and 15\u00c2\u00b0 x 75\u00c2\u00b0 may be drawn. With it an\\neasy division of the circle into 24 equal parts can be made. This\\nangle can be used conveniently in the three different systems of insometrical\\ndrawing in which the. axial horizontals are represented respectively at 0\u00c2\u00b0\\nand 00\u00c2\u00b0 and 80\u00c2\u00b0 and 30\u00c2\u00b0 and at 15\u00c2\u00b0 and 45\u00c2\u00b0. This result has hitherto been\\naccomplished only by the use of special axonometrical triangles.\\n1Y.\\nTHE ENTABLATURE.\\nIn this paper I give, Fig. 24, the entablature, or, as generally termed\\namong architectural workers and the building trades, the cornice. Strictly\\nspeaking the upper division of the entablature is the cornice proper, em\u00c2\u00ac\\nbracing all the different parts from the crown molding to the dentil mold\u00c2\u00ac\\ning. The second division, or frieze, embraces from the dentil molding to\\nthe foot molding, or third division, the architrave. In the trade, at the\\npresent time, the entire structure described above is termed the cornice.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0020.jp2"}, "21": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n11\\nThe drawing, Fig. 24, as given, is somewhat of a variation from a pure\\nclassical design to conform to the styles prevailing at the present day, A", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0021.jp2"}, "22": {"fulltext": "12\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nstrictly correct proportioned design as laid down by the well-known laws\\nand rules of the old schools I deem as rather too severe and plain to satisfy\\nthe taste of the present time. A description of the different parts that con\u00c2\u00ac\\nstitute a complete cornice is given as follows:\\nThe crown molding, letter C, is the top front projecting part of the\\ncornice; the facia, F, is also embraced in the crown molding. Directly\\nunderneath the facia, which is a flat band or member of the cornice, a hori\u00c2\u00ac\\nzontal member, the ceiling, or bottom of the cornice, occurs. This is called\\nthe planceer. In well-made cornices the face of the facia band is projected\\nsomewhat lower than the horizontal surface of the planceer, thus forming\\na drip, letters P and d, to prevent the water dropping on other parts of\\nthe cornice. Letters B M, M C, M M, D B and D M are termed the bed\\nmoldings, embracing the different moldings, as the bed, modillion and\\ndentil moldings, and also the modillion and dentil courses, these latter two\\nbeing the flat part, M C and D B, and these form the flat surfaces to which\\nthe modillion brackets, or ornaments, and also the dentil blocks, are fas\u00c2\u00ac\\ntened. The head molds or blocks of the modillion brackets finish up\\nagainst the bed mold proper, B M, and also up against the planceer under\\nthe crown molding.\\nThe modillion bracket has this distinguishing feature from the regular\\nbracket that it has its greatest length horizontally, while the regular brack\u00c2\u00ac\\net has it from top to bottom. In the Fig. 24 no modillion brackets are\\nshown, to avoid confusion and overloading this design, but I will give this\\nmatter ample consideration farther on. Dentil blocks are generally made\\nas the drawings demand which the cornice maker works from. In Fig. 24\\nthe dentil mold is of a larger size than is strictly proportionate in the severe\\nclassical form, but is here simply given as a modification.\\nThe frieze or panel section of the cornice is the one on which generally\\nthe most ornamentation is put, every architect having his own favorite de\u00c2\u00ac\\nsigns, hence the great variety met with in cornice work. Fig. 24 gives\\na paneled frieze back. The panel is sunk from the stile so that it lies\\nflat to the wall line at P A. The lower part or architrave, commonly\\ncalled foot mold, string mold, etc., needs no very detailed description.\\nIt will be seen that in the lower end of same a drip is formed by the way\\nthe design shows, and also a flange which projects into the brickwork.\\nThe projection of a bracket, letters B B, is shown by dotted lines.\\nAlso by letters T T, H B; a truss, or end block, and also a head block and\\nstop block are shown, the head block and truss forming the end finish of a\\ncornice. In future papers these details will be more fully dealt with.\\nThe base of truss extends,as will be observed,some distance below the drip\\nof the foot molding, showing six different kinds of curves. It would be a very", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0022.jp2"}, "23": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n13\\nprofitable exercise for the student to take this drawing and draw to differ\u00c2\u00ac\\nent scales, say in., in., or 1 inch to the foot. After it has been gone\\nover two or ihree times in this way a good understanding of the names\\nand positions of all the different parts of a cornice will have been obtained.\\nThe student may also change the design to suit his fancy. This gives ex\u00c2\u00ac\\ncellent practice, and as a consequent result, greater proficiency. A good\\nrule to follow is to make all drawings precisely, and whatever scale is used\\nmake all the work strictly conform to the same. The term lintel cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nnice is generally apphed to a cornice over the first story, such as store\\nfront openings, etc. Hip, gable and ridge moldings are used on the parts\\nof buildings as their names imply. Pediments are of various forms, an\u00c2\u00ac\\ngular, broken, segmental, etc., and are used to cap windows and doors, and\\nalso in designs of cornices.\\nOf miters, which means a joining of two parts at any angle, there are\\na number, such as square, butt, gable, raking, inside and outside miters;\\nalso angle miters of various degrees and directions. Numerous examples\\nwill be introduced in the problems as we proceed.\\nAs the cutting and laying out of patterns for cornice work is based on\\ngeometry, and particularly on the branch designated descriptive geometry,\\nI will, from time to time, as occasion demands, give the principles of this\\nbranch, as the problem under consideration requires. It would be well\\nfor the beginner to procure a work on plane geometry, as the terms, names,\\nand in fact, the entire vocabulary used to designate the elementary figures\\nand definitions as used in the first steps, tending to a clear understanding\\nof the principles of pattern cutting, are contained therein. The price of\\nsuch a book is merely nominal.\\nV.\\nTfiB HEADING OF DHflWlflGS.\\nIn this article I give the drawings of a complete cornice of a 24\\nfront, as in Fig. 25. Fig. 27 gives the profile or end elevation of\\nsame. Fig. 28 gives a section through A. A. of Fig. 25. Fig. 29 gives a\\ndrawing of the finial on top of the pediment.\\nWe will first discuss the matter of reading these drawings, so that\\nwhen the figuring is to be done, every detail is fully understood. The\\nfront elevation is drawn to the scale of 3-16 to the foot, meaning that\\nevery item and detail is drawn to that scale in every particular, in this fig-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0023.jp2"}, "24": {"fulltext": "14\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nnre, No. 25. This view represents how the cornice looks from the front\\nonly, and gives the position of every member of the entire structure, from\\nthat point of view. From this view we see that there are in the cornice\\nsection proper four outside and two inside miters, embracing the deck\\nmold, deck, crown molding, fascia, and also the planceer. The dentil\\ncourse and also the panel of the frieze section are straight from end to\\nend, that is, there are no miters or outward projections in the main body\\nof this part. In the foot molding there are four projecting members, making\\neight outside, and six inside miters for this section. Four corbel blocks\\nare shown under the four projecting parts of the foot mold. Fourteen\\nbrackets are shown; six of these are projected outward three inches more\\nthan the others, four on each side or end. By referring to Fig. 27, their\\nRelative positions to each other are shown at A. A", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0024.jp2"}, "25": {"fulltext": "Cornice work manual\\ni5\\nThe panel section has sunk frieze pieces or panels. The center pieces\\nof same are of crimped iron, or as some term them, washboard panels.\\nThe pediment or crowning structure of the cornice gives every de\u00c2\u00ac\\ntail plainly from the base of same to the paneled face and the curved\\nmolding, also the position of the finial and the ornaments on top.\\nThe Fig. 27 gives the projection of Fig. 25, showing the relative posi\u00c2\u00ac\\ntions of all the parts of the cornice, looking afc same from one end, or the\\nend elevation, also called profile of the cornice; B and A. A are brackets;\\nC are dental blocks; from D to E, is the cornice proper, embracing crown\\nmolding, fascia and bed molding; F is dentil course. Below the above, H\\nis the sunk frieze panel; K. and K. show the positions of both the straight\\nand projecting parts of the foot mold; X. X the dotted line, gives the pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nfile of the ends of the cornice.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0025.jp2"}, "26": {"fulltext": "16\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nFig. 28 gives a sectional view of pediment cut at A. A in Fig. 25.\\nThe dotted lines give end elevations of same.\\nFig. 29 gives a detail drawing of finial, drawn to the scale of to\\nthe foot.\\nFig. 28\\nIt may be well here to remark that the six brackets in the center of\\nthe cornice are in profile, as the line A gives the lower section of same\\nconforming to the line A, as is fully shown. Fig. 28 gives the plan of\\ncornice: A gives the extreme outer edge of the crown molding, B is the\\nedge of the extreme outer edge of foot molding, D is outside line of build\u00c2\u00ac\\ning wall and C is the inner one, that is the line farthest away from the\\ncornice; letters C show the correct positions of all the brackets, S S shows\\nthe ends of cornice extending back to the inside face of wall, X X shows\\nposition of base of pediment.\\nThe front and plan are 8-16 to the foot scale, Figs. 25 and 26. The\\nside elevation is J to the foot, Fig. 27.\\nThe foregoing gives all that is necessary for a clear understanding of\\nthe plans, or as commonly termed, the reading of the plans and drawings.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0026.jp2"}, "27": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n17\\nr\u00c2\u00bb\\nVI.\\nTfiE JVLEASllpIpG Op COppICES.\\nAfter one is able to read a set of drawings so that every part and detail\\nis fully understood in regard to its proper position and its relation to all\\nthe other parts of the entire structure, various sizes and measures of all the\\nparts can then be ascertained for the purpose of the preliminary estimating\\nin any of the following ways.\\nI will first give a snap method as used by some, for rough calculations;\\n(see Figs. 25 and 27, Article V, giving the front and profile of the cornice\\nunder consideration): First get the entire length of front including the end\\nturns and all of the miters of the cornice. Commence at the extreme end of\\nthe crowr. molding as at 1 to 2 of Fig. 26, Article V; this distance measures\\n3 6 from 2 to 3 =7 9 from 3 to 4 including the 4 miters 11 from 4\\nto 5 7 7 9 from 5 to 6 O 6 Total of the entire extreme edge of\\nthe crown molding is 33 6 The length of the foot molding is 30\\nincluding all the miters and turns occurring in the same.\\nThe length of the panel section, dentil course, etc., is 26 long, including\\nthe two turns for the ends, as line L, 7 and 8 of Fig. 26, Article V, shows.\\nThe Fig. 27, Article V, gives for stretch out of crown molding of the center\\nprojection from 1 to 5 6 3^ and for the end sections of same each 5\\n9J For the center course from 5 to 6 stretch-out is 2 3 for stretch-out\\nof foot molding 20 on an average. It will require 6 square ft. of iron\\nfor each bracket; as there are 14 brackets, it will take 84 square ft. of iron\\nfor them. We will take the average for the crown molding as 6 for\\nstretch-out, which makes 33 6 X 6 201 square ft, of iron for same.\\nThe stretch-out for the panel, dentil or center course being 2 3 x 26\\n58 square ft. and 6 square ft. for this portion. The foot molding has a\\nstretch-out of 20 x 30 50 square ft. for same. The strip from 7 to\\n8 and C to D is to be covered also; the same is 24 by 1 The entire total\\nfor cornice so far is as follows:\\nFor brackets.84 sq. ft.\\nFor crown molding.201 sq. ft.\\nFor panel course.58^ sq. ft.\\nFor foot molding.50 sq. ft.\\nFor strip over walls. 24 sq. ft.\\nt\\nTotal\\n417J sq. ft.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0027.jp2"}, "28": {"fulltext": "18\\ncornice Wore Manual\\nThe surface of the pediment is 2 in width and 9 in length; 5 is the\\nheight; this gives 2 x 9 18 x 5 90 sq. ft.; the top of the pediment is\\n11 x 2 22 sq. ft. 22 90 112 sq. ft. of iron for entire pediment.\\nThis makes the entire total of the surface by the method used 112 -f 417\\n529 sq. ft. of iron for the cornice. This in brief is about as near as the aver\u00c2\u00ac\\nage cornice maker comes to the actual amount of material really used.\\nAlthough I may say that in the amount as given above if say about 10 sq. ft.\\nare added to the same for waste in the cutting, or the entire total is taken\\nat 539 sq. ft. a rather high margin for safety is taken; that is, in my estima\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion, the figures as given call for somewhat more material than will\\nactually be used for the entire structure. And as a consequence no fear\\nneed be entertained that the estimate is too low in this respect.\\nIn establishments where a great amount of this work is done and\\nhas been done, if any data is kept for this purpose of work that has\\nbeen gotten out, it becomes an easy matter to get very nearly correct\\nestimates of almost any kind of designs that come near to work that has\\nalready been done in the shop. This in particular applies to larger\\nshops. In smaller shops where perhaps each and every cornice differs\\nradically in its most important parts from any other cornice previously done\\nin the shop the greatest care and accuracy are required to get the correct\\namount of material used on the work one is figuring on in order to be able to\\ncompete with other shops and so as not to be too high nor too low in one\u00e2\u0080\u0099s\\nestimate. Of course, the more a person does of this work the more profi\u00c2\u00ac\\ncient he becomes. A good plan for the student would be to get a set of\\ndifferent designs, and study this branch and practice until he becomes\\nthoroughly familiar with every detail of it.\\nThe best way for absolute correctness is of course to take a design of\\nany cornice; as for instance the design submitted in Fig. 25, Article Y\\nFirst get the general dimension as to its length, height, projection and\\nother details in connection therewith. The height of cornice or its depth\\nis 5 its projection out from the face of the wall is 31 in. and the turns at\\nends extend back from face of wall 12, in. as plan Fig. 26, Article V shows.\\nThe pediment is 4 ft. 8in. high from its base to top of its deck, its extrem e\\nlength horizontally at base is 8 9 and at the extreme points of its curved\\ndeck it is 9 ft. 9 in; its deck is 2 ft. wide. Now go over carefully each detail\\nnote them down, as the number of brackets, dentil blocks, details of the sunj^\\npanels, how many projections or miters there are in the foot-molding and\\nalso in the crown molding; note down the number and style of the orna\u00c2\u00ac\\nments on brackets. Follow the same general course in regard to the\\ndetails of the pediment; note each peculiarity of the different members and\\nmeasure them correctly as to their girth and length, as the drawings fully", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0028.jp2"}, "29": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nid\\nshow. In fact, get the correct measure of every detail of the entire work,\\nand if done so and the total is footed correctly, the result as a consequence\\nis that no possible mistake can be made in the estimate of material used.\\nThe above is the safe way, although somewhat more tedious than by a snap\\nmethod.\\nThe following tables are useful in figuring, estimating, etc. In the\\ntable of weights given for copper, allowance must be made for the varia\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion in the weights of different brands of copper. The table as given\\nis correct enough to approximate the weight of any certain\u00e2\u0080\u0099gauge that is\\nlikely to be used in calculation. A good plan is to get a certain brand,\\nascertain the correct weight, and use the figure as found, if differing from\\ntyiose as given in the table.\\nCOPPER.\\nSizes of sheets generally used:\\n14 x 48 30 x 60 48 X 72\\nB. W. G.\\nPer Sq Ft.\\nB. W. G.\\nPer Sq. Ft.\\nB. W. G.\\ns\\nPer Sq. Ft.\\nNo. 10\\n100 oz.\\nNo. 16\\n46 oz.\\nNo. 22\\n23 oz.\\n11\\n90\\n17\\n42\\n23\\n20\\n\u00e2\u0080\u009c12\\n80\\n18\\n36\\n24\\n18\\n13\\n70\\n19\\n32\\n25\\n16\\n14\\n60\\n20\\n29\\n26\\n15\\n\u00e2\u0080\u009c15\\n54\\n21\\n26\\n27\\n14\\nThe following gives a list of the sizes of bar iron mostly used for\\nbraces, stays, lookouts, etc., on cornices:\\nBAR IRON.\\nWidth.\\nTm _\\nWeight Per Lineal\\nFoot.\\nV\\ni\\nKs\\n3.158 lb.\\nw\\n3 684\\nVs\u00e2\u0080\u009d\\n.421\\nih\\nVs\\n.5 26\\nIV\\n3-16\\n.789\\n1 x 4\\n*4\\n1 052\\n1 3 s\\n1 V\\n3 16\\n.868\\n3-16\\n.947\\niy 2\\n1 4\\n1.2 63\\nl 3 A\\nJ 4\\n1.474\\n1U\\n2\\n5-16\\n1.842\\n1 4\\n1.684\\n2\\n2 538\\n2 V\\n5-16\\n3 e\\n2.631\\n3\\n3.789", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0029.jp2"}, "30": {"fulltext": "20\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nSHEET ZINC.\\nSize of sheets 36 x84\\nNumber.\\nThickness.\\nWeight Per Square\\nFoot.\\n5\\n0.0039\\n0.4117 lb.\\n6\\n0.0132\\n04792\\n7\\n0.0150\\n0.5468\\n8\\n0.0169\\n0 6144\\n9\\n00187\\n0.6820\\n10\\n0.0224\\n0.8172\\n11\\n0.0261\\n0.9534\\n12\\n0.0298\\n1.0875\\n13\\n0.0336\\n1.2227\\n14\\n0.0373\\n1.3579\\n15\\n0.0410\\n1.49 30\\n16\\n0.0447\\n1.6282\\n17\\n0.0521\\n1.8986\\n18\\n0.0596\\n2.1689\\n19\\n0.0670\\n2.4393\\n20\\n0 0744\\n2.7096\\nVII.\\nHSTI^VIflTIflG.\\nThe correct estimating in the first stages of the work, such as the read\u00c2\u00ac\\ning of plans, measuring of the surfaces of work and the estimating of the\\ntime it may take to do the job on hand, and other incidental items met\\nwith in the getting out of the same, can only be acquired by cornice men\\nafter long, careful and close study and observation. The following hints\\nwill, in a measure, supply what some may lack in these important qualifica\u00c2\u00ac\\ntions\\nWhen the amount of iron is determined that it will take to do a cer\u00c2\u00ac\\ntain job of cornice work, the next question that presents itself is how much\\ntime and labor will it take to do the work. There are almost as many ways\\nemployed to arrive at the result sought for as there are ways of doing the\\nwork itself. Some guess at the time, comparing the work under considera\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion to that of similar character and design done before. Knowing of\\ncourse the amount of time that it has taken to do the preceding work, a\\nnearly correct estimate can be made as to the time it may be required to do\\nthe work now on hand. The method as described is used in a good many\\nshops with sometimes widely differing results as to the actual time re\u00c2\u00ac\\nquired, sometimes being too low an estimate and quite as often too high\\nto be in any way near correct. s", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0030.jp2"}, "31": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n21\\nThe way that is most prevalent for cornice men to bid on work is by\\nlump figures, that is, the plans and specifications of a job are submitted by\\nthe architect to the cornice maker, and he gives a figure for whatever\\namount he is willing to do the work complete or in a lump. It also some\u00c2\u00ac\\ntimes occurs that a bid is asked for a cornice by the foot, or how much per\\nrunning foot for the completed cornice put upon the building. If the result\\nhas been obtained in a manner as shown by the snap rule, it is only neces\u00c2\u00ac\\nsary to divide the feet or length of the cornice into the sum as arrived at,\\nthe result being the cost per single foot. This method, although somewhat\\ncrude, answers well enough in some cases.\\nA different way and more reliable one is to estimate the entire items of\\na cornice separately, such as: 1st, work in the shop on cornice, 2d, transpor\u00c2\u00ac\\ntation from shop to building where the work is to be put up, and 3d, the\\ncost of putting up the work on the building itself. In some large establish\u00c2\u00ac\\nments the following plan is used to determine the cost of almost any member\\nof a complete cornice. I will take say a bracket, or any member of a cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nnice for that matter. The first step is to make a drawing of the desired\\nshape and cut out a pattern; this part is done by the cutter. When this\\nis done the time is carefully noted down which it required to do his part of\\nthe work; also the general character of the design, size and shape; next,\\none man does the forming, another the joining or soldering together of the\\nvarious parts of the work. When the member is completed, the weight,\\nsize, general description of the work, and the precise time it has taken each\\nman to do his share of the work is put down and on the figures thus\\nobtained future calculations are based. The same method is used to obtain\\nthe price of all the different parts of cornices, thus securing at once for\\nall time a safe and reliable guide for future estimates and calculations.\\nWhile the foregoing would hardly be applicable to small shops, still it is to\\nbe recommended to the careful and prudent workingman to keep a close\\nrecord of all the work he does for future reference. For those that have\\nnot a great deal of experience in this most important branch of the cornice\\nbusiness, the great number of catalogues sent out by wholesale houses who\\nsell to the trade, the illustrated price lists, etc., will prove of great value to\\nthe beginner, insomuch as he will find therein the prices charged to the\\ntrade for almost every conceivable shape or pattern of cornice work made.\\nThese lists are subject to the usual trade discount. By taking the\\nweight of the material it takes to do a certain piece of work, thus obtaining\\nits cost for that item, then deducting the cost of the material used from the\\nnet list price as sold to the trade he will easily obtain the desired cost of", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0031.jp2"}, "32": {"fulltext": "\u00e2\u0080\u00982\u00e2\u0080\u00982\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nthe item called labor in the shop. Of course, the wholesale manufacturer\\nalso has a profit to make on the goods he sells, but which in some cases is\\nof such a small margin that only the great amount of the output from his\\nlarge establishment makes it pay. Then the great variety of the very best\\nmachinery in the business alone tends to add greatly to his profits, which\\nin many cases enable him to sell to the trade nearly as cheaply as the small\\nshop can produce the goods themselves. In any case it is always safe to\\nuse the prevailing trade price as cost price, then add a certain per cent for\\nprofit above the figures thus obtained.\\nThe items of cartage and of putting up the work are of great impor\u00c2\u00ac\\ntance, there being no fixed rule by which these matters may be decided at\\nall times, every job having its own peculiarities and special condi\u00c2\u00ac\\ntions. This part in the estimating must, in a measure, be based on previous\\nexperience and familiarity with this kind of work.\\nSome men will put up a common cornice in from 3 to 4 hours while it\\nmay in other cases take them an entire day to do the job on another build\u00c2\u00ac\\ning; it all depending in what shape the work is to be put up, if in sections,\\nor put up in one piece, and on other conditions probably unforeseen and\\nunavoidable; it is always well to know just what kind of men are used to do\\nthe work in hand. This branch of the work is as well worthy the careful\\nconsideration as to its most minute details as almost any part of coxnicc\\nwork.\\nThe items of solder, rivets, in the shop and also on the outside, the\\nscaffolding, hoisting tackle, etc., must all be figured each in its proper\\nplace.\\nTo conclude, the person doing the estimating for work of this kind\\nshould make himself thoroughly familiar with every detail of the work, care\u00c2\u00ac\\nfully study the tables of weights of materials and their prices, keep time\\non all work for future reference and obtain all data appertaining to this\\nbranch that it is possible for him to collect. Whenever a job is done let him\\nmake a detailed, itemized memoranda of all the different phases of the\\nwork as to time it required, stock and material, how many men employed\\non each item, etc. Such a record will prove of great value and assistance\\nin the ready estimating of work.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0032.jp2"}, "33": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n23\\nVIII.\\nHlGHT-flfiG^H JKITEn PATTER.\\nIn the preceding articles are given the necessary first steps, such as\\nthe reading of plans, correct ways of measuring surfaces, preliminary\\nfiguring and estimating occurring in cornice work. These details being\\ndisposed of, the next step in the regular course of the construction of a cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nnice is cutting the patterns and laying out the entire work as demanded\\nby the drawings of any particular job under consideration. This part of\\nthe work is, as a matter of course, done by the cutter, who in most shops is\\nalso foreman, who has the general management and control of all the details\\nof the practical work. The particular and special qualifications demanded\\nin a first-class cutter have been fully covered in Article II, and need no\\nfurther description at this time.\\nWhen a person first takes up the study of the science of pattern cut\u00c2\u00ac\\nting, it is of the greatest importance that the correct methods and at the\\nsame time the right way is taken to acquire the knowlelge sought for. The\\nproper course to take is to know the why and wherefore for every step and\\nmove taken. Study carefully and master every detail that is demanded by\\nthe drawings submitted, so that when you proceed to lay out the problems\\ninvolved in any particular case you fully understand what is required.\\nGuess work will not do in this branch of the work. Accuracy, careful\\nstudy, good judgment and the exercise of a certain amount of good com\u00c2\u00ac\\nmon sense is demanded for success. Do not attempt to use short cuts\\nquick methods and snap-rules before you even understand the first rudiments\\nof the correct and proper mode of solving problems.\\nIt is assumed that the person intending to work out the problems\\nwhich will be given from time to time in this series of articles, has provid\u00c2\u00ac\\ned himself with the necessary tools and also with a work on plane geom\u00c2\u00ac\\netry, as suggested in Article V. The manner of treatment I intend to\\nfollow is precisely the same as is used in common every-day shop prac\u00c2\u00ac\\ntice; that is, just as if I were actually getting out the job under considera\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion. As the drawings of the cornice given in Article V will answer the\\npurpose as well as any other design, I will proceed to tre-it the same in de\u00c2\u00ac\\ntail. It will be seen that the front elevation and plan are drawn to the\\nscale of j| to *he foot, Figs. 25 and 26. The profile or side elevation, Fig.\\n27, is J to the foot. The first operation is to draw all the different details", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0033.jp2"}, "34": {"fulltext": "24\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nto full size from the scale. As these are the final data from which all the\\nrest of the work is to be done, it follows that they must be correct. The\\nfirst member or part of this cornice that I will discuss at length will be the\\nfoot molding, letter K, of Fig. 27, Article Y (as it would be impossible to\\ngive drawings full size here, they are drawn to the scale of 2 to the foot.\\nThe Fig. 80 gives the profile of the foot molding throughout its entire\\nlength, as from A to B and so on, including C D E to F. Draw this\\nmuch first, then draw the wall line G to G to its proper relative position\\nas is shown and demanded by the drawings, Figs. 26 and 27 of Article V.\\nNext the plan of the 3 projection may be drawn the same as given in\\nFig. 30 and also the complete plan of this part of the foot-molding. The\\nFig. 30 gives the plan of the right hand end of the foot-molding of Figs. 25\\nand 26, of Article V. Draw all these parts as described to full size. Also\\nnote down the full size measurements as are fully given in this part of the\\nplan of the foot-molding; as these are the actual sizes of the various parts\\nof the molding when done, they give the data from which the lengths of\\nthe different parts are taken which constitute the foot-molding. This\\nleads to observe the particular construction of this molding. Note the ex\u00c2\u00ac\\ntreme ends of the foot-molding; they turn back from the front line of the front\\nwall 20 and correspondingly on the extreme outer edge of the foot-mold\u00c2\u00ac\\ning 25 This shows that the projection of the foot-molding is 5 hori-\\nontaliy outward from the wall line. Then the foot molding, according\\nto the plan Fig. 26 of Article Y, has eight outside and six inside miters;\\nthe various miters corresponding to the different projections of the wall, as\\nthe Figs. 25 and 26 of Article V give. This molding being a horizontal\\nmolding, as a consequence the various miters are horizontal miters.\\nThis much leads to the two lines showing the junction of the outside mi-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0034.jp2"}, "35": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n25\\nter as line X X and line S S of the inside miter of Fig. 30. In pattern\\ncutting the cutter seldom has more than two views of a problem to deal\\nwith at the same time, the principal points of view being a horizontal and\\na vertical one in most of the ordinary cases in the course of the work. In\\nthis case we have a vertical view of the profile and a horizontal or plan\\nview of the miter lines, all in the flat as the Figure 30 gives. From\\nthis it follows that the intersecting lines from the curve of the profile,\\nstarting from the numbers 1 to 8 and cutting the miter lines X X and S S,\\nare supposed to drop vertically, just as if the profile were standing up in a\\nvertical position from the plan. Or, in other words, if a piece of molding\\nas the profile demands, was cut at line X X and also cut through at\\nthe miter line X X and it had all the points marked on the face of the\\nmolding at the line X X then from these points horizontal lines drawn\\nto the cut established by the line X X they would be precisely the some as\\nare drawn in Fig. 30, looking down at them from the top of the molding.\\nFrom this then it follows that when the miter line is to be determined for\\na horizontal molding, the lines must be drawn either from the top or bot\u00c2\u00ac\\ntom of the profile of that particular molding, if drawn in the flat, and\\nnever from the sides. In this case they are drawn from the bottom, as Fig.\\n30 shows.\\nFor the curved part of the foot molding divide the same into any con\u00c2\u00ac\\nvenient number of equal parts; in this instance I have divided the same\\ninto seven, as the points 1 to 8 show. From these points drop lines to the\\nmiter line X X and as the 3 projection has the same profile as the rest of\\nthe molding they may be continued as is fully shown in the drawing.\\nDraw the line X X as this line gives the full extent of the miter in\\nthe plan, as from the points X and X to X\\nThis completes the drawings that are necessary by this method to\\nget the data for the required distances, so that the actual patterns of the\\nrequired members of the foot molding can be taken from the same.\\nThe next step is to get the stretch-out or envelope of the molding.\\nTake the distance of the entire profile of Fig. 30, from A, B, C, D, E, to\\nF. Make the distance shown between the lines A A and F F of Fig. 31.\\nBetween these lines the different spaces are drawn, each one corresponding\\nto the relative positions shown in the profile of Fig. 30. These lines are\\nall lettered and numbered in the stretch out, Fig. 30. Draw the line A to\\nF perpendicularly to the line A to A as shown in Fig. 81. The lengths of\\nthe various lines between line X to X and from X to X of the plan of\\nFig. 30, when drawn or transferred on the stretch-out, give the lengths of", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0035.jp2"}, "36": {"fulltext": "26 CORNICE WORK MANUAL", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0036.jp2"}, "37": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n27\\nall the lines as shown between the lines A to F and the miter line Xto\\nX of Fig. 31 and the true outline for any of the right hand parts of the\\noutside miters in this foot molding. To get the left hand part, the pattern\\nhas only to be reversed. In fact the entire miter lines for the foot-mold-\\ning :an be taken from this one alone if the lengths and positions are cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nrectly placed and the patterns be properly reversed, to suit each particular\\nposition of the various parts. This applies to both the inside and outside\\nmiters. The stretch-out of the 3 projection is fully shown in Fig. 81. Add\\nthe 3 on the corresponding line as distance from point X to X shows;\\nthe same is done with all the other lines. The distance between the miter\\nlines D and X gives the shape that the miter lines make the part appear\\nthat join on to the inside miter-line of the 3 projecting parts. It is un\u00c2\u00ac\\nderstood that the actual length of these parts is governed by the length\\ndemanded for each part, by Fig. 25, Article Y. Fig. 31 merely gives the\\noutline of these parts, and not the actual lengths. These can only be\\nobtained Jirom the plan and the front elevation, Figs. 25 and 26, of\\nArticle V.\\nFig. 82 is here introduced to show how the profile may be either\\nplaced above or below the miter-line of the plan. The two views of the\\nprofile also show how some beginners make the mistake in putting the lines\\nin the wrong plane from the profile; that is, drawing the lines outward\\nfrom the face of the molding, or horizontally, which is the wrong way in a\\nsquare miter of a horizontal molding, instead of drawing them in a verti\u00c2\u00ac\\ncal plan, which is the correct way, as set forth in the description of Fig.\\n30. The two letters R, R of Fig. 32, show the positions of the sets of\\nlines that are wrong for a horizontal molding. The various hints, rules\\nand reasons given for the different steps in the foregoing method, it will be\\nwell for the beginner to study and master in all their details. These once\\nfully understood a long step is taken toward the rapid acquirement of the\\nart of pattern-cutting as employed in cornice-cutting. As most rules\\nfollowing those given above are wholly or in part based on them, it is\\neasily seen how important it is to first master them in the beginning of this\\nstudy.\\nAs I have given the problems Fisrs. 30 and 31 at full length (or in\\nother words), by the long method, in this article, I will give some problems\\nof the same character, occurring in the cornice under consideration, by a\\nshorter method.\\nThe dotted projecting parts of the stretch-out of the 3 projections of\\nFig. 31 are not turned up as on the other members of this molding. The\\nreason for this will be seen by examining the front elevation and plan,", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0037.jp2"}, "38": {"fulltext": "28\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nFigs. 25 and 26 of Article V.\\nWhere these members join against the side of the brackets, no project\u00c2\u00ac\\ning parts are met with, as is the case in all the front parts of this cornice\\nwhere the foot molding joins the panel section. The small dots on one of\\nthe stretch-outs show where to mark the iron with the prick-punch, where\\nthe same is to be bent in the brake.\\nThe next point that the cutter must consider is how the various parts of\\nthe cornice are to be joined and fastened together. Figs. 33 and 34 give two\\nways sometimes used. These joints are between the top of the foot mold\u00c2\u00ac\\ning as at A, of Fig. 30, and at the bottom of the panel section. The ways\\nthat these joints are made in different shops vary greatly, nearly every cut\u00c2\u00ac\\nter or foreman having his own notions as how they should be made. Some\\nuse the style as in Fig. 34, others merely lap them and tack with solder,\\nwhile some rivet and solder them, etc. In brief, whatever mode is used,\\nallowance must be made in the laying out of the pattern for the material\\nit takes to do the same,\\nIX.\\nBRACKET PATTERS.\\nThe eight end brackets and also the six center brackets are next to be\\ngotten out. Fig. 27, of Article V, gives the profile of all the brackets\\ndemanded by the plan, Fig. 26 and Fig. 25 of the front elevation, Article V.\\nFig. 27 is drawn to a scale of three-fourths of an inch to the foot. The first\\nstep to get the patterns is to draw a correct profile of either side of one of\\nthe brackets. This operation, in order to be correct in every particular, is\\nsubject to the following considerations, which must be taken into account\\nby the person who is developing the full sized working patterns for the\\nbrackets. The first of these is that the way the sides are going to fit and", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0038.jp2"}, "39": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n29\\njoin to the stretch-out on front part of the bracket, is fully determined on.\\nSome cutters allow for laps on the front face or stretch-out, while others\\nmerely allow for butting the edges. These two ways I regard as not as\\ngood as allowing for the laps on the side pieces. The laps when thus prop\u00c2\u00ac\\nerly placed make a neater, easier done and a far stronger job than the\\nother ways. The pattern of the side of bracket B, Fig. 35, explains all the\\nabove as to where the laps are put to join the sides and the fronts of the\\nbrackets together. Another point to be considered is, how are the brack\u00c2\u00ac\\nets to be joined to the planceer, the dentil band, the panel course and to\\nthe foot molding? As it will take 28 inches for the stretch-out of the\\nplanceer and dentil band together, it is best to make these two members\\nout of one piece of iron as to their girth. The lengths of the different\\npieces are governed by the plan, Fig. 26, Article V, and have to be com\u00c2\u00ac\\nplied with as demanded. At the point nearest to the wall line of the top\\nof the foot molding, as given by Fig. 30 of Article VII, it will be noticed\\nthat the same stands from the wall line one inch and so does also the\\nbevel panel of the frieze section nearest to the brackets. This shows that\\nthe back line of the brackets is to be calculated as standing off from the\\nwall line one inch. At this edge allow one inch for flange to lay off at\\nright angles to meet the panel moldings. At the top of the pattern allow\\none-half inch to lay off against the planceer and the same where the sides\\ncome against the dentil course. At the bottom of the sides allow one-half\\ninch to lay off against the top part of the foot molding. After all the\\nforegoing is fully considered and understood in every detail, the pattern\\nmay be laid out as follows: Draw a full size profile of the bracket, as\\nfrom A of Fig. 27, Article V, to the foot molding. (The figure here given\\nis three-fourths inch to the foot.) This has been done in Fig. 35. Then\\ndraw the top line of bracket which comes up under and against the plan\u00c2\u00ac\\nceer. Draw the line that comes against the dentil band at the front and\\nbottom of the same. Drop the line as shown for the back of the bracket.\\nAll this must be according to the profile, Fig. 27 of Article V. Now draw\\nthe lines showing the different laps, as in Fig. 35. The curved parts are\\nto be notched as shown. The entire front lap of B, Fig. 85, must be\\nturned inward to meet the face or front of the bracket, while the back\\nlaps are turned outward from tho bracket. The letters 1 I I of B,\\nRig. 35, give the laps which are to be turned inward and the letters 0 0\\nindicate those which are to be turned outward. The line A, Fig. 35,\\nshows how a side of the bracket appears in a plan of the same, after the\\nlaps are all bent as described in the foregoing. The stretch-out is given in\\nC, Fig. 35. This covers the front from X to 1 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, to 7 of B.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0039.jp2"}, "40": {"fulltext": "30\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nCorresponding numerals on C show where the same is to be bent and\\nformed to the shape required by the profile. It will be noticed that the\\nspace x to x ot 13 has no corresponding space allowed on the stretch-out.\\nThis part is intended to be covered bv the ornamental rosettes shown in the\\nfront elevation Fig. 25, of Article Y. The foregoing describes the \u00c2\u00abight end\\nbrackets fully; for the six center brackets which have a 3 projection far\u00c2\u00ac\\nther out at the top than the end brackets, the only alteration necessary is\\nshown by the dotted lines of Fig. 27, of Article V. No further description\\nis needed for this point.\\nThe next step is to get out the planceer and the dentil band. Fi\\n86 gives the shape the same is to be formed to at 1; a J bend\\ndownward is shown; at this point the planceer and the fascia band\\nare joined in such a manner so as to form a drip. From 1 to 2 gives the\\nI i\\n2 Scale to the foot I\\n-\u00e2\u0080\u0094-Tir\u00e2\u0080\u0094 tJ\\nFig. 36\\n.jy\\nwidth of the planceer for that portion of the cornice where the end\\nbrackets occur; the dotted line from 1 outward gives what is to be\\nadded to the center or 3 projecting part. From 2 to 3 forms the\\ndentil band with a 1 bend back to meet and lap under the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0040.jp2"}, "41": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n31\\npanel sections. The lengths of the parts of Fig. 36 are governed by\\nthe plan of the crown molding of Fig. 25, Article Y. The bed molding\\nunder the planceer and at the upper end of the face of the dentil band, of\\nFig. 27, of Article Y, will be considered next. The Fig. 37 gives the pro\\nfile of the above described bed molding from A, X, X H to B. As this\\ngives the profile of all the different members of this molding, it follows\\nthat the one view and also the one development of the miter pattern will\\nanswer for all the inside and outside miters. The only operation neces\u00c2\u00ac\\nsary to make this pattern do for all the different ends, is to reverse the\\nsame to make it fit to the end it belongs to. This point has been described\\nand explained at length in the description of the Figure 30, Article VIII,\\nand also in Fig. 31 of this article. The method I have used to develop\\nthe required pattern in this case is a somewhat shorter one than the one\\nused to solve the problem involved in Fig. 30, Article VIII, the main point\\ns x a\\nof difference being that in this case, Fig. 31, no miter line nor a pbm\\ndrawing of this miter is used. This method is used by many cutters for the\\ndevelopment of square horizontal miters. To develop the pattern for this\\nmiter, draw the line A B, Fig. 37, parallel at any distance from the line\\nH, X of the profile. Drop lines at right angles from points B and P of\\nline B and A as shown. Drop a line from A of line A, X and S to point\\nA of line A to B. Next divide the curve as shown into as many equal", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0041.jp2"}, "42": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nparts as desirable. In this case I have divided the curve into eight equal\\nparts, This done, transfer the distances thus obtained on to the stretch\u00c2\u00ac\\nout. The distance between A to X is equal to the distance between line\\nB, A and noint H. Make all the other distances correspond to tnose given\\nbetween the numerals as shown on the curve X to X this distance is\\nshown in tbe stretch-out from line H to point X From X to B is also\\nequal in the stretch-out to the distance between X to H and B of the pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nfile. The remaining lines may now be drawn from points X, 1, 2, 3, etc.,\\nto point X of the curve of the profile, to where they intersect the lines of\\nthe spaces as drawn for the length of the stretch-out. Where these in\u00c2\u00ac\\ntersections occur, as the numerals 1 2 8etc., to 7 and H and X show,\\npoints are established through which a freehand line is drawn. This line\\nis the miter line of the curved part of the molding as demanded for a right\\nangled or square horizontal miter for this curve. As the miter under con\u00c2\u00ac\\nsideration has a square joint, it follows that the miter line is cut at an\\nangle of 45\u00c2\u00b0 on all flat or horizontal surfaces occurring in the same. As\\nthe surface of X to A and X to H of the profile are of this kind, the cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nresponding parts of the stretch-out must be cut at an angle of 45\u00c2\u00b0 from the\\npoint that occurs at the extreme outside junction of tbe horizontal surface\\nof this right angle. This is done by the line X to line B of the stretch-out\\nand also at from A to H. Any vertical surface from a horizontal one, as\\nshown by line H to B of the profile, is also drawn perpendicularly or verti\u00c2\u00ac\\ncally from the general horizontal position of the stretch-out in the case. This\\nis shown by the line from point B of stretch-out. This line is equal in\\n\u00c2\u00bb*1\\nDQ\\nqq\\nCO\\nCD\\nlbs\\nSIDE VIEW\\nlength in the stretch-out to line H B of the profile and ends at the point\\nwhere it joins the 45\u00c2\u00b0 miter-line of the horizontal part. The above des\u00c2\u00ac\\ncription, although giving only the details of one of the simplest of the com\u00c2\u00ac\\nmon kinds of square horizontal miters, embraces all the principles ever\\nmade use of in developing even the most complicated miters of this class.\\nTo master the two methods as given for square miters, means a long step\\nforward in the art of cornice pattern cutting. In this pattern I have omitted\\nto draw out the laps for joining the miter joints together, leaving this part\\nto the judgment of the student. The mode to follow on the miter line from\\nA H 1 to 7, X to N and B is similar to the mode shown for laps in\\nFig. 35.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0042.jp2"}, "43": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n83\\nX.\\nPATTERNS POR PAJStEE SECTIONS.\\nThe panel section is the next part of the cornice which I will discuss\\nIt will be seen by referring to Fig. 25 of Article V, that this section has\\nall its members in a straight line, that is, none of the members project\\nout from the wall line any farther than any other member in this section of\\nthe cornice. In the elevation they are all of one height, the only difference\\nbeing in the width of the different members as compared with each other.\\nAs it is not necessary to lay out all the members, they being alike in every\\nparticular, with the exception of the width of some of the members from\\neach other, I leave it to the student to take care of this point himself.\\nIn this case a different kind of molding than described in former arti\u00c2\u00ac\\ncles, is presented, namely: A horizontal molding mitering onto, or with, a\\nperpendicular one. The moldings involved in this case are of the plainest and\\nsimplest of this class. The distinguishing difference between a horizontal\\nmolding mitering with another one of the same kind, such as the foot\\nmolding and a horizontal molding mitering to a perpendicular molding, is\\nthat they cut the face of the molding, or in other words cut the same\\nwith horizontal planes for the horizontal and perpendicular moldings,\\nwhile for horizontal moldings only, they cut the same from the top to the\\nbottom, or vertically. All this is plainly shown by the drawings of the two\\nstyles of moldings in Figs. 80 and 32 of Article VIII, for the horizontal\\nmolding, and Fig. 40 in this article for the horizontal and perpendicular\\nmoldings. I will take one of the 2 square members of the panel sections\\nof Fig. 25, Article V, and show how to lay out this member, Fig. 38, from\\nA to B gives a sectional view. The dotted line from B to C, and from\\nE to F is merely given to show the manner in which the laps are made\\nwith other parts of the structure. In this figure I have also shown the po\u00c2\u00ac\\nsition of the dentil blocks between A to E. X to X shows a side view of the\\nposition of the crimped, or corrugated piece in the center of the panel. Fig. 39\\ngives a plan view of the panel only. The two views are drawn to the scale of 1\\nFig. 39\\nto the foot. These I will call the working drawings. If drawn correctly they\\ngive all the data from which the entire patterns for all these members may\\nbe obtained. Fig. 40, A, shows how one corner of the molding appears", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0043.jp2"}, "44": {"fulltext": "34\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nwhen done. To obtain the stretch-out for the bottom horizontal part of this\\nmolding, proceed as follows: Take the Fig. 38, this gives at B, 1 then\\nfrom this the slanting part, which is 4 to B from B to X a back, and\\nanother J up, altogether making 6 This gives the entire width of this part\\nof the panel molding. To lay out the stretch-out, draw line 1, of B, Fig. 40;\\nmake line 2 parallel from line 1, but 1 apart from the same; from line\\n2 to line 3 is to be 4 from line 3 to 4 one J ,and from line 4 to 5 one\\nalso. This is shown in B, of Fig. 40. To obtain the distance that the\\nslanting 4 part is to be cut so as to have the right bevel for the miter re\u00c2\u00ac\\nquired, extend the line 1, 1-* of A downward, as shown, from point 1*, to\\nthe extreme outer line, or from 1* to l-*, which gives the true or direct dis\u00c2\u00ac\\ntance sought. Transfer this distance to B of Fig. 40 from line X, X out\\nto the extreme edge, as shown at X Connect point X and X by a line as\\nshown; this line is the miter line for the slanting part of the molding.\\nThe distance from point X to line 1, 1* is shown and connected by a line\\nperpendicular from either one of the lines, 2 or 1, 1*. The distance between\\nlines 3 to 4 is connected likewise. Then the distance between lines 4 and 5\\nis cut by a line at 45 degrees from one to the other. This is shown in B,\\nof Fig. 40. The reason that the last described line is cut at an angle of 46\\ndegrees is, first, because the surface of this part lies at right angles to the\\nmember that is to join to it, and both surfaces lay in the same plane, that\\nis flat, and also because both pieces being of the same width, it follows as\\na consequence that if they are to be mitered to each other at right angles,\\nthat a distance equal in width must be taken off the inner edge of both the\\npieces, as the pieces are wide. In the case of the miter line for the slant\u00c2\u00ac\\ning of 4 part, the conditions are different from the above in so far as only a\\nforeshortened view of the molding is shown in A, of Fig. 40. If there were no\\ndeviations from a flat plane, a 45 degree miter line would do for this part.\\nBut the shape being as the drawings demand, no other course is left but to\\nstrictly follow them. Bear this in mind, that the more a straight surface\\nof a right angled mitered molding deviates from a flat plane, the less de\u00c2\u00ac\\ngrees the angle has from a 90 degree angle, 45 degrees being the limit for", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0044.jp2"}, "45": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n35\\nright angled miters. Fig. 40 also gives C a profile of the bottom horizon\u00c2\u00ac\\ntal member of the panel loops when formed to its final shape. This gives\\nall that is necessary for the miters of all of the panels, the pattern having\\nonly to be reversed for the adjoining members. For the sides, the plan\\ngives the width, and the end view gives all the particulars for the top\\nmember of the molding. Figs. 38 and 89 also give all data as to the length\\nfor the side pieces, while Fig. 25 of Article Y gives the length for bottom\\nand top pieces. In Fig. 40 B C shows how the laps are best placed. This\\nis a matter which I leave to the student. The small panels between the\\nbrackets where they are close together, are, in every way, like the larger\\nones as to the laying out part. The measurements, of course, are smaller\\nas to their width; in height they are the same as the others. The shape of\\nthe dentil blocks is shown by Fig. 25, Article Y, and a side view is given\\nin Fig. 38. Fig. 41 gives the pattern. The drawing shown is so clear that\\nit is unnecessary to give a detailed description at this time. The different\\nviews presented show how the bends are to be made. The side view in Fig.\\n30, and the position on the face of the pattern show where the outward\\nand the 2 in diameter projections go.\\nEach of the 2 in diameter projections may be made out of a strip one\\nhalf inch wide and six and three-eighths inches in length; this allows nearly\\none-eighth of an inch for lap, foim and solder the strip into a circular band;\\nmake as many of these as the entire job demands, then cut out the two-inch\\ncovers or disks, solder these to one end of the half-inch wide bands, get all\\nthese out, and when the dentil blocks are cut out, formed and soldered into\\ntheir proper shape, as demanded, these bands may be soldered on to the\\ndentil blocks. The dentil blocks are then ready to be attached to their po\u00c2\u00ac\\nsitions as demanded by the drawings. A substitute projection for the two-\\ninch blocks may be used in the shape of half balls or zinc hemispheres, that\\nis if the workman so desires, these will come somewhat cheaper than the\\nflat ended cylindrical shaped half-inch outward projections.\\nXI.\\n!*IGHT~Af4GIiE 1*BTUH1SL miTEI* PATTERS.\\nThe last members of the cornice proper, as given in Article Y, Fig. 25,\\nare the fascia band, crown molding, deck and deck molding. To lay out\\nthese parts, so as to cause the least possible waste of material, is the prob\u00c2\u00ac\\nlem. It is necessary to consider what sizes of sheets are best suited to cut\\nthe different parts wanted, from, so as to avoid waste. To determine this\\npoint, so that the best results may be obtained, the cutter must use good\\njudgment. At times other considerations must be borne in mind, besides", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0045.jp2"}, "46": {"fulltext": "36\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nhow to best suit the work so that there will be less cutting of material\\nwhich may, sometimes, cause some little saving of stock, but in the endne-\\nL", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0046.jp2"}, "47": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n37\\noessitate a greater amount of extra labor to make the work come out right,\\nthus making the cost of the work far greater than if in the first place a\\nsmall amount of material had been sacrificed. The ability to decide cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nrectly just what course to take on all occasions, where points are involved,\\nas described in the foregoing, is what makes some cutters so much more\\nvaluable and efficient in a cornice shop, than those who are lacking in this\\nmost essential faculty. It is a very easy matter for a cutter, by making a\\nfew mistakes of the general character as indicated to very materially re\u00c2\u00ac\\nduce the gross profits on the job. It is a good rule to carefully study all the\\nvarious phases of each piece of work as it comes up. Do not jump at con\u00c2\u00ac\\nclusions at the first moment, but weigh well all the different peculiarities of\\neach member of the work, and when fully considered, go ahead. A few\\nminutes more devoted to the proper consideration of a job in the beginning,\\nwill often save hours of work afterward and, as a consequence, will save\\nconsiderable expense. The foregoing not only applies to the parts of the\\nwork under discussion, but equally embraces each and every item that goes\\ntoward making and getting out any part of cornice work.\\nTo illustrate the practical application of some of the foregoing hints:\\nTake Fig. 42; A is the elevation of the deck and deck moldings, and also of\\nthe crown molding and fascia band of the cornice, described inArticle Y,\\nFig. 25. I have drawn these detail drawings to the scale of one inch to\\nthe foot. After the student has drawn the details of this part, I will say to\\nfull size, for his convenience, and also to be absolutely correct in all details,\\nthe first question that arises is: How is this work to be done to the best ad\u00c2\u00ac\\nvantage? By measuring the part from D to E it will be found to measure\\n15 and from o, E to F of the profile, it will be found to measure 24\\nAs the most profitable sizes of iron commonly used in cornice work are the\\nsizes of thirty inches in width and less, and as there are no sizes made that\\nwould be necessary if it were desired to make the entire profile out of one\\npiece, namely 39 it follows that some other size will have to be used, and\\nalso that this member must be made out of more than one piece, in regard\\nto its girt or stretch-out of the profile. The best plan to meet the conditions\\nlaid down in the above is, to take sheets 30 wide, and split these into 15\\nstrips, lengthways, and, as the distance from D to E is 15 these strips\\nwill answer for that part of the work. Then from o, E to F, use 24 wide\\nsheets. This settles the question as to what sizes of iron are best adapted\\nto make this portion of the cornice, and that without any waste of material.\\nThe development of the various miters occurring in this part of the cor*\\nnice, is done in the same manner as I have used in developing the miters for\\nthe moldings described in Article IX, Fig. 37; namely, by the short meth\u00c2\u00ac\\nod. As the different members are all horizontal moldings and panels, and", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0047.jp2"}, "48": {"fulltext": "38\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nalso all the miters are right-angled or 90\u00c2\u00b0 miters-, the method used is at\\nonce the easiest and quickest that could be made use of for the purpose. I\\nhave also given a further illustration\u00e2\u0080\u0094how the lines used to obtain the pro\u00c2\u00ac\\njections may be used either above or below the profile or elevation. This\\nI have done by showing the development of the part from D to E, below\\npart A, as C shows from H to I, and for the part from o, E to E, of A, by\\nthe part B, from KtoL. The distance between the line K, to line L, of\\nB, is equal to the distance from point o, to F, of A; all the other parallel\\nlines in B are correspondingly placed as the profile A demands. The dis\u00c2\u00ac\\ntances that the various parts of the projections extend outward are also\\nshown in the drawing. A full and detailed description in every particular\\nof the steps to be taken to get out a miter of this kind has been given in\\nArticle IX and need not be repeated in this instance. The full stretch-out\\nand development of the miters for the section from B to E, of A, are given\\nin C, from H to I. The lines H to I are apart from each other equal to the\\ndistance of the stretch-out D to E, of A. The numerals 0, to 5, of A, are\\nplaced on the stretch-out of C, as demanded by the profile A, a d correspond\u00c2\u00ac\\ning lines are dropped to the intersecting points of the parallel lines of the\\nstretch-out; through these points of intersection the miter line is drawn, as\\nC gives. The miter line thus developed answers for all parts of all the va\u00c2\u00ac\\nrious miters in this section. The student has but to reverse the pattern to\\nmake it fit to the member it belongs to, as the occasion demands. I have\\nshown in C, how the 8 projecting parts are cut; the same have also been\\nshown in B. The small circles on the stretch-out of one of the 3 projecting\\nparts show where the bends are to be made, as required by the profile. Fig.\\n48 gives a plan of one of the 3 projecting double miters of this member.\\nThis part of the cornice has four outside and two inside miters, as Fig. 25,\\nof Article V, shows. In the foregoing descriptions and developments of the\\ncornice, as given in Article Y, Fig. 25, I have described the ordinary, right-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0048.jp2"}, "49": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n39\\nangled horizontal miters, both inside and outside, as well as the mitering\\nof a horizontal molding to a vertical one. In the development of the right-\\nangle horizontal miters I have made use of both the strictly geometrical\\nrule or long way, and also of a short method, to attain the desired result.\\nI would advise the student to thoroughly master the rules, as laid down in\\nthe problems given, as they are but the first steps to the more complicated\\nproblems that will follow, as more difficult work is considered further on.\\nXII.\\nPATTERS OF A PEDIJVIBNT AfiD TflEIf^ DEVELOP-\\nfAHfi T.\\nIn Article V, the Fig. 25 shows a full front view of the pediment of the\\ncornice under consideration; it is drawn to the scale of 3-16 of an inch to\\nthe foot. I will now discuss this member in detail. Fig. 44 is drawn to\\nthe scale of 1 to the foot, and is the lower front half of the pediment.\\nThe profile of this section is shown by A for the columns, and by B for the\\nplain, and the ornamented paneled part as shown by Fig. 25, of Article V.\\nThe outside face measurements of every necessary detail are fully given in this\\nfigure. The distance from A to B gives one-half of the front, commencing\\nfrom the extreme outer edge of the top of this section at A, to B, the cen\u00c2\u00ac\\nter line of the entire pediment C. The flat part between the 1 square\\nprojection at the top at A and the 1 molding at C is 3\u00c2\u00a3 vertically. The", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0049.jp2"}, "50": {"fulltext": "40\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nbottom of the molding extends back far enough to form a lap with the\\ncolumns and also the vertical panel section where the junction of these two\\nparts occurs. The peculiar features that are connected with the proper\\nfitting and correct joining together of these parts are fully shown by the\\ntwo views in profile. The square miter for the straight parts, and also for\\nthe square miter for the molding underneath the same, have been explained\\nin the preceding articles. The same has also been done in regard to how\\nthe miters are to be developed for the panel moldings in the panel section\\nof the main cornice. In this case these moldings are all square cornered\\nand flat surfaces, the same as Fig. 40 of Article X shows.\\nThe stretch-out of these moldings is shown at D of B, of Fig. 44, the\\nheight is 13 by 8J for the extreme outside measurement for the two end\\npanels, and 81 square for the center panel. The center ornament may\\neither be made by hand, hammered to shape, or a stamped zinc ornament\\nmay be soldered into position, as demanded by the design of this section.\\nThe columns, pillars, or pilasters are 17 high or long, by 4 Y wide\\nand project out 1 The sunk panels as shown are 1\u00c2\u00a3 wide by 18\\nPlan of Column\\nll_r*\\nFig. 45\\nt\\nPlan of Base X pr\\nL\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nn\\nFig. 46\\nlong, and 1 deep. Figure 45 gives the plan view of the same. These\\ncolumns can be made entire, out of one piece of iron, with the exception of\\nthe sunk panels. The stretch-out is from A to C for the front. Then from\\nC to B, which is 22 back, the side of that part of this section of the pedi\u00c2\u00ac\\nment is to be made as the measures given. The side and front may both\\nbe made in one piece and cut as demanded, for the height 17 and at\\neach end at the top and also at the bottom, making this piece for its height", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0050.jp2"}, "51": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n41\\n18 The length is to be as the drawings demand from A, C to B of Fig.\\n45. All the measurements are marked on the front view C of Fig. 44, for\\nthis portion of the work. The next part to get out is the base of the\\ncolumn. This is 14 long and 4J high for the vertical front part, and\\nalso for the front side. The molding measures 1 upward to where it\\nmeets the columns. Figure 46 gives a plan view of the base. It will be\\nobserved that the front of the columns stands back from the outside face of\\nthe base more than from the ends of the same. This is shown.by the front\\nview C for the ends, and by the side profile A at X for the front molding,\\nand also by the profile B at the corresponding point of that figure. As it\\nwill be seen, the moldings at the two ends are alike botli in height and\\nwidth, and that both differ from the front molding in widtE. but not in\\nheight.\\nThese conditions are caused by the fixed positions that the columns\\nare placed in, on the base, as demanded by the front and side views. In\\nother words, the junction of these two moldings may be termed, the miter\u00c2\u00ac\\ning of two horizontal moldings whose profiles are different from each other..\\nOwing to this particular combination of circumstances the following method\\nmust be used to solve the problem in this case, which is: how to obtain the\\nmiter line for the two parts for this miter?\\nThe first step to be taken is to get all the particulars and correct plan\\nof the moldings as demanded by the plan, Fig. 46, and also from the de\u00c2\u00ac\\nductions arrived at from the front and side views of Fig. 44. These give\\nthe line D as the line of the moldings, and the line from 14 to X to 14 as\\nthe outside line of the two sections of the desired moldings. The line 15\\nto point C to 15 is the outside of the base. Within the above described\\nlimits or lines, the profiles of the two parts of the mitering moldings must\\nbe drawn, in order to comply with the required conditions as imposed by\\nthe plan, front and side view of Figs. 44 and 46.\\nI will first draw the smaller molding of part 1, Fig. 47. This is\\ngiven by the line 1 to 15. From 1 to 2 is for the lap under and inside\\nof the columns. The curve from 4 to 14 I have divided into ten equal\\nparts, as given by part 1, of Fig. 47. From these points as found drop\\nlines to the miter line D to X, as shown. The position of the miter\\nline as given, instead of cutting direct from point I) to C in a straight\\nline as would be the case in a regular miter or angle of 90\u00c2\u00b0, is drawn\\ninstead from D to X, and from there to point C. By examining the\\ncourse of the plan lines of the moldings it will be seen, that if the out\u00c2\u00ac\\nside lines are to conform to the demands of the plans, and to be pa\u00c2\u00ac\\nrallel with each other, and also from the outside face line of the base\\nof the columns, no other point of juncture is possible for them to meet", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0051.jp2"}, "52": {"fulltext": "42\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nat than the point at which they are shown at, to do so, namely, the\\npoint X, and they are accordingly so placed. From the points where\\nthe lines 4 to 14 of the curve of part 1 intersect the miter line D to X,\\ndraw lines at right angles, and continue the same indefinitely.\\nThe solid line A, A and from A to B, gives the extent of the mi\u00c2\u00ac\\nter of the curves only, while the line from D to D and from D to E\\ngives the measurements for the development of the entire moldings as\\nwill be shown further on. At any convenient distance from line D to\\nE, draw the line F. 15. as shown in part 2, of Fig. 47. Then transfer\\nthe distances for each line as contained in the space between the curve\\nof part 1 and line E to 15, to the same lines above line F to 15, of\\npart 2. The distance so transferred gives the length of each line and\\nalso determines the points through which the curve of the profile of the\\nmolding of part 2, of Fig. 47, is cut. The curve thus found is the true", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0052.jp2"}, "53": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n43\\nshape that the molding as found must assume in order to enable the same\\nto miter to the molding of part 1, of Fig. 47, so that each point of its hori\u00c2\u00ac\\nzontal surface is in an equal plane with the other molding, or, expressed in\\nanother term, level.\\nTo develop the patterns get the stretch-out of each part as shown\\nin Fig. 48. For part 2 take the distance from 1 to 15 of part 2, of\\nFig. 47, and mark the same in line D to B, of part 2, of Fig. 48.\\nFrom the points thus established and numbered as shown in part 2 of Fig.\\n48 draw lines at right angles to line D to B, Then take the distance or\\nlength of the lines contained between the line D to E and the* line D to X\\nand C, of Fig. 47, and mark them on to the lines 1 to 15 of the stretch-out\\nof number 2, of Fig. 48. Through the points thus formed, the miter line D\\nto C is obtained for this part. For the stretch-out of the part number 1,\\nof Fig. 48, a precisely similar operation must be gone through with to ob\u00c2\u00ac\\ntain the result sought for, with the difference, of course, that the measure\u00c2\u00ac\\nments as found vary somewhat from those of the part number 2. All the\\nloregoing is fully shown in the two figures 47 and 48. It is possible, if so\\ndesired, to make the entire base out of one piece of iron.\\nCare must be taken to get the measures for the length of the center\\nsection just right, which is from point 2 to the corresponding point at the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0053.jp2"}, "54": {"fulltext": "44\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nother end (not shown in the stretch-out) 12^ or from point C to the other\\nend of base 14 The measures for the parts of the sides are governed by\\nthe plan, Figs. 46 and 45. The development of Fig. 48 gives the measures\\nfor the moldings. That part of the base that is below the line B K may\\nbe added. The height of the same is 4J for the face and 1 for the lap\\non the deck of the cornice proper. The drawings show plainly where all\\nthe laps go and how they are to be arranged to the best advantage. The\\nflat part in the panel section, which is 5 wide, is soldered into position as\\nshown by the profile B of Fig. 44. The student will do well to study the\\nvarious ways that the different parts are intended to fit and lap together,\\nand also the general arrangement of the various sections as given in Fig.\\n44, in relation to each other, so that when he has work of a similar charac\u00c2\u00ac\\nter at other times to do, the hints and suggestions given in this case may\\nbe of benefit to him in future work.\\nXIII.\\nTHE PATTERS FOH R SEG^E^TAL SECTION OF R\\nPEDI^EflT.\\nThe working drawings of the top section of the pediment, or the mem\u00c2\u00ac\\nber to be drawn after the entire lower section of the pediment has been\\nmade up, is shown in Fig. 49. This figure is drawn J to the foot as is\\nalso Fig. 50, which shows the side elevation, profile or section of Fig. 49.\\nThe main dimensions of both drawings are given in figures. One-half of\\nthe front is only shown, as all the details can be taken from the same, as\\nwell as if the entire front had been drawn out. From 1 to 2 and from 3 to\\n4 of Fig. 49, embrace all of the circular moldings occurring in this mem\u00c2\u00ac\\nber; the profile of this molding is given from 1 to 2 of Fig. 50. From 2\\nto 4 and from 2 to 5, the center, or segmental flat piece of the pediment,\\nis shown in Fig. 49, and is correspondingly shown from point 3 to 4 in\\nthe elevation, Fig. 50. The fluted pieces of the front are shown in the ele\u00c2\u00ac\\nvation from point 3 to 6 in Fig. 50. From 6, 4 to 7 of Fig. 50, gives the\\nsection of 6, 7 to 5 of Fig. 49. The fluted pieces and the segment of the\\nfront view are supposed to represent the rising sun and the rays from the\\nsame. The position that the back (upon which the fluted pieces are fas\u00c2\u00ac\\ntened) occupies is shown by the distance between the points 3 to 4 of Fig.\\n50; that is, back from the moldings, or in other words, back from the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0054.jp2"}, "55": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n45\\nlowest outside vertical face of the same. In the development of these two\\nviews, into working drawings to be used in the shop, from the drawings of\\nFig. 25, of Article Y, and Fig. 28, of Article VI, the cutter need not be\\nover-particular, and in fact cutters never are, in drawing hidden lines, or\\nlines that do not show on account of their positions being behind other sur\u00c2\u00ac\\nfaces, by dotted lines in designating their true positions in a view. On\\nthis point the cutter generally uses his own judgment, as it is often more\\nconvenient for him to make a line solid instead of dotted, as it should be if\\ndone according to the strict laws of delineating drawings of this class. The\\nreasons for this are that if the position of a certain hidden line in a draw\u00c2\u00ac\\ning is to be referred to often, and if it should happen that the line particu\u00c2\u00ac\\nlarly wanted is located among a number of lines of the same class\u00e2\u0080\u0094namely,\\nhidden or dotted lines\u00e2\u0080\u0094it can be very readily understood why some cutters\\nmake them solid instead of dotted. The foregoing has in some cases been\\ndone in the problems presented in these articles, to assist in the ready find\u00c2\u00ac\\ning of lines of this class whenever wanted. Bearing in mind the foregoing\\nhints, the workman may now proceed to draw the two elevations of the\\nfront and side view, or section of the side, as given by the Figures 49 and 50.\\nGet the radius of the curve 1 to I of Fig. 49, from the dimensions deduced\\nfrom Fig. 25, of Article V. Then the other curves are found in the same\\nmanner and each placed in its position. The Fig. 50 is found in the same\\ngeneral manner from Fig. 28, of Article VI. Be careful that every detail\\nis in its proper and correct position and place. The width of the pediment\\non its top is 27 This may be cut out of 28 iron. Make this piece\\ntwice the length from 1 to 3. The face view of the part A of the molding\\nis made just as Fig. 49 gives it; also the parts of the views B and C of the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0055.jp2"}, "56": {"fulltext": "46\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nsame figure. The pieces which occur under the curves A, B and B are flat\\nand are made in width as the profile Fig. 50 gives, and in length as the\\npositions they occupy in Fig. 49 demand. All these pieces are to be drawn\\nand cut out with the proper allowance for a quarter inch edge turned as the\\noccasion may be best suited. This way of cutting each member of this\\nmolding is followed in most shops that are not provided with special ma\u00c2\u00ac\\nchines for turning out the shapes for finished moldings. The really difficult\\nshape to get out is the curve molding D; that is for most cornice workers\\nand beginners, but it is in reality no more difficult than the development of\\nany conical shape, if certain fixed rules governing this class of work are\\nfollowed. For a shape as called for by the profile Fig. 50, from points A\\nto B, for its outward curve, and for its longest curve from right to left, as\\nFig. 49 gives one-half of, from X to X ,the first step to develop the required\\npattern is to proceed as follows: Make the radius the same as that used for\\nthe development of Fig. 49, as the line from A to 0 gives for this particular\\ncurve in this figure, No. 51. In fact, from 0 to A and B is an exact repro\u00c2\u00ac\\nduction of the same corresponding part of Fig. 49. Draw the profile for\\nthis member as demanded by Fig. 50, as is shown by A, 1 to 2, of Fig. 51.\\nDraw line B solid across the face of the molding; also the line D to D at\\nany distance from line B. The line, if extended from point D through\\npoint D must cut point 0. Draw the curve D to D same as the profile 1\\nto 2. Divide curve D to D int\u00c2\u00a9 any number of equal parts. In this case I\\nhave done so into four equal parts. Then from point 0, as center, draw the\\ncurves as shown through the line D to D cutting the points 1 to 3 as pre\u00c2\u00ac\\nviously found, and extend the same to curve 0 to S. This curve 0 to S is\\nthe same as shown at the end of the same number in Fig. 49, and the dis\u00c2\u00ac\\ntances are as a consequence the same from this line X to 0 at all points of\\nits length to the curve X of Fig. 49, as they are from the lines B to S and\\ncurve 0 to S of Fig. 51. This done the next operation is to draw the line\\n1, 2 to the point C of Fig. 51. Extend the same some distance above the\\npoint 1, as is shown in the Fig. 51, above point 1. The reason for this\\nwill become apparent further on. It will be seen that the line 1, 2 to point\\nC just cuts the most inward points of the curve 1 to 2 and and also that\\nthe line from point 0 to point 0 is at right argles to line A, 2 to C. To\\ngive a more comprehensive exposition of the reasons why these lines are\\nthus placed, in the first place imagine the profile that the points A, 1 to 2\\ngives, to be hinged solid at the line A to 2 so that the same could not be\\nmoved either up or down, but could be swung around from its present p\u00e2\u0080\u0099ace,\\nso as to assume a position at right angles from the one that the curve\\n1 to 2 now has. That is, so that the curve 1 to 2 would face, or would bq", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0056.jp2"}, "57": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n47\\nin the direction of the person looking at the drawing, if the same is at right\\nangles to his line of vision, straight ahead. The curve would appear to him\\nas a straight line, and instead of appearing as it now does, would simply\\nmerge itself into line A to 2. Now if the curve 1 to 2 had been turned or\\nswung around as described, and also at the same time the line 1, 2 to C\\n2 to C, but the distance of the length of line C to C away from point C on\\nthe same plane. This is the position of jthe poit C established on the\\nsame plane, behind point C; by this the line 1, 2 to C as projected through\\nthese points, the true length of line 1, 2 to C is shown and gives the data\\nor its actual length, and with the especial advantages that descriptive\\ngeometry gives to us, we are enabled to do all the foregoing in one plane", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0057.jp2"}, "58": {"fulltext": "48\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nas has been done in Fig. 51, by one view only, by simply swinging the\\nprofile and also the line 1, 2 to O into the same plane that the front view\\nis in.\\nThe line 1, 2 to C from C as center, is the radius; draw the curve\\nfrom point 2 to point 3, this curve to be equal in length to the curve S D\\nto 2 of K. Draw the curve 1 to point 4 in the same manner and equal in\\nlength to the curve I to B. Divide the space between the curves thus\\ndrawn into four equal parts; from C as center draw curves as shown, cut\u00c2\u00ac\\nting the points thus found as in the pattern X. Transfer the distances\\nfrom the lines 1, 2 and 3 of part K, contained between the space B S and\\n0, to the lines numbered the same in the pattern part X. The distances so\\ntransferred are set off in the space contained between the lines 4 to 5 and\\nthe points Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 3 of the pattern X. The points 1, 2, 3\\nand 3 being thus established, a free hand line may be drawn through them.\\nThis gives the curve demanded by Fig. 49 at the end X of the outward\\ncurve. If the pattern for the pieces just described is to be raised to shape\\nby hand it is advisable not to add any more to the same in width;\\nthat is, do not try to make any more of the curves than the curve\\nX out of one piece. If a forming machine is to be used the curves A and\\nB may be added. The whole development is fully given. The lines\\nA 3 and R are for the top bends and lines B 8 andK for the bottom bends. It is\\nunderstood that if the forming machine is used the proper shaped dies for\\nthe same are used as demanded by the profile. If the curved molding X\\nand also the other square mitering curves are made by hand, all laps mus-\\nbe allowed for in the development of each part. The foregoing operations\\nmay be briefly termed the development of the patterns for a curved molding\\nthe profile of the same having its curve outwardly or convex. The mold\u00c2\u00ac\\nings when put together and completed will form the crown moldings of a\\nsegmented pediment. In raising or bumping the form to shape, care must\\nbe taken not to raise the curve too deep at the start nor to stretch the same\\ntoo much. Be careful in all the operations in this kind of work. Begin\u00c2\u00ac\\nners are very liable to be in too much of a hurry; they want to see the\\nresults of their hammering too soon and, as a consequence, commence to\\npound too hard in the start, thereby often raising the metal too deep and if\\nnot actually spoiling the work outright, they turn out a very poor job at the\\nbest. This last result being brought about by their attempting to undo\\nwith a lot of hammering on the material what their undue haste spoiled in\\nthe start. This would never have occurred if they had carefully felt their\\nway along and made haste slowly until such time when by experience\\nthey had acquiied the necessary command over their tools and the\\nskill and ability to judge all the nice points involved in getting out", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0058.jp2"}, "59": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n49\\nwork of this kind quickly and well. These moldings can be made or\\ncut out of as many pieces as is consistent with good judgment for\\nsaving material. Another factor entering into the work has to be consid\u00c2\u00ac\\nered if a well proportioned job is to be done, that is how long each piece is\\nto be cut so as to have the joints evenly divided in the length of each curve.\\nThese joints I leave to the workman to decide for himself. The joints\\ncan be made to butt against each other and a strip soldered over the junc\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion on the inside, or they may be made with lap joints, as the workman\\nmay decide to suit himself.\\n-N\\n3\\nFig. 52\\nFig. 52 gives the straight part of the miter that occurs at the point X\\nof Fig. 49. This is a straight molding as to length; the profile is the same\\nas that of the curve K of Fig. 51 and as a consequence is developed the\\nsame as a right-angled horizontal miter, which has been done as shown by\\nFig. 52. The modus operandi to develop a miter of this kind has been fully\\ngiven in former articles and need not be repeated in this case. I will now\\ndescribe how to develop the patterns for the flutes or rays for the Fig. 49.\\nIt will be seen that the entire number of flutes for this section is twenty-\\nfive. The figure gives half that number. In drawing out the working\\ndrawings, make these members full size and very exact. There are two or\\nthree ways to get these pieces out. One is to cut the entire field out of one\\npiece, curving the flutes as demanded, and also the other bends. This way\\nI do not regard as very practicable. The usual way to get out the pieces\\nis to take each flute separately. In this instance I will take the one marked\\n2. Get the profile of both ends as in Fig. 58; A for small end and C for\\nthe large end. The stretch out is developed by obtaining the length of the\\nflute 2 of Fig. 49, from B to A. Make the distance from 1 to 2 of Fig. 53\\nequal to the corresponding one in flute No. 2 of Fig. 49, as is done in Fig.\\n53, for the length of the same. For the width of the small end, the curve\\nA gives the stretch-out; for the large end the curve 0 answers the desired\\npurpose. Draw the straight lines at the ends of the angle as the ends of\\nflute 2 of Fig. 49 demand. This stretch-out is formed as the two forms of\\nthe ends require. For the rounding end piece D, make the line N to N\\nequal to the curve of C, and the distance from S to S equal to whatever the\\ncurve of part C demands which is in a line at right angles to the line N,\\nN of D. Connect the points N, S, N by the curve as shown; then con-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0059.jp2"}, "60": {"fulltext": "50\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nnect the points N, N by a sliglitly curved line; this extra allowance of\\nmaterial is to allow for the draw in raising, and also if the edge becomes\\nfrayed during the hammering and stretching process so that the same may\\nbe trimmed off straight and be fitted to the flute. To develop the center\\npiece H, of Fig. 49, draw the front and side of Fig. 54 as the part A gives;\\nfrom this the pattern B is obtained by a mode similar to that by which the\\npattern for the parts on the large ends of the flutes is obtained. The bal\u00c2\u00ac\\nance of the flutes are to be developed in the same manner as described for\\nthe development of the patterns of the flute 2 of Fig. 49. The measure\u00c2\u00ac\\nments to be suited by all the different flutes as the Fig. 49 demands for\\nthem. The method some use to get out this kind of work is to make the\\nentire flute in one piece; that is, the straight curve and the end or round\\ncurve of each flute all out of one piece. This may be adopted if the work\u00c2\u00ac\\nman is so inclined, but I regard the way as described in detail as the cheaper\\nand somewhat easier way to obtain the same result. The mode of fasten\u00c2\u00ac\\ning the fluted section to the pediment is done in some shops by merely\\nsoldering the edges of the flutes together and then tacking the same into\\nthe place they are to occupy. Others would put a flat piece in at the back\\nof the flute, as the line 3 to 4 of Fig. 50 gives; this last way is the best by\\nall means. It makes a solider and better job all round. The part H is first\\nsoldered on to the back and then the flutes are put into position. This\\ncompletes this part. The lower edge, which is fastened on to the straight\\npart, is to be turned outward one inch, then riveted and soldered on to the\\nlower section of the pediment. This one inch turn must be showed for in\\npreliminary calculations when the patterns are drawn and cut out. The\\nback of the entire pediment is to be flat, covered with tin. A suitable\\nflange may by turned to lap the top or deck of the same over the edge of\\nthe lin, and nailed firmly over the same when finishing the work on the\\nbuilding.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0060.jp2"}, "61": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n51\\nXIY.\\nDETAILS AJMD PATTERNS FOR A FILIAL.\\nThe Figures 55 and 56 give the detailed drawings of the finial as the\\nelevation, Fig. 29 of Article VI, show. These two figures are drawn to\\nthe scale of 1 to the foot. The full-size measurements are marked on the\\ndrawings. I will first describe a short method, to develop the pat\u00c2\u00ac\\nterns for part A of Fig. 55. The shape of this part is a frustum of a\\nfour-sided pyramid. The manner in which this shape may be developed\\nfor this case is as follows: Draw four lines bounding the numerals 1, 2, 3\\nand 4. Make the lines 1, 2 and 3, 4 a distance apart equal to the slant\\nheight of the part A of Fig. 55. Connect points 1 to 8 and 2 to 4 of Fig.\\n57. Continue these lines so that they will meet at the apex C. From C\\nas center use line C to 3 as radius; draw the curve 5 to 6 and also curve 7\\nto 8. Step off the distance from point 3 to 4 on each side for these two\\nparts one and one-half times the length from 3 to 4 for each as shown. Do\\nthe same for the larger curve, as is shown in Fig. 57. Connect the points\\nthus found by straight lines. Allow for lap on one end. The dotted line", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0061.jp2"}, "62": {"fulltext": "52\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nshown indicates where the curve of the top of the pediment cuts through\\nthis part. This gives all the necessary details how to lay out this shape in\\none piece. The edges to turn out so that the finial can be fastened to the\\ndeck of the pediment are to be allowed. This method is the shortest,\\nquickest and cheapest method that can be used for the desired result. The\\nfour sides may also be made out of one piece for each side, one separate\\npiece for all the three parts, A, B and C. This method I would advise to\\nbe used only if the sides of the parts A, B and C must be made in four\\npieces only; that is, one piece of the material making one side of all thre\\nsections at one and the same time. This piece answers for a pattern for\\nthe three other sides; then all four pieces are bent to the shape as the out\u00c2\u00ac\\nline of parts A, B and C, of Fig. 55, gives. These should be soldered to\\ngether strongly. Two of the sides are to have suitable laps allowed when\\nthe pieces are made and cut out. The development of part B of Fig. 55 is\\ngiven in Fig. 58. Part A of this figure is the side view and profile of a\\nhorizontal molding with a square miter. The part B is a plan view, and\\nshows a different way from that of A to get the data to develop the patterns\\nfor the miter pieces. Patt C is the pattern. Divide the profile part A into\\nequal parts as 1 to 4 shows. This gives the first step for method number\\none. For method number two, the first part is given by B, Fig. 58. Line\\n1 to 2 gives the miter line. The outlines of a vertical view or the plan are\\ngiven by the lines 3, 2 to 4, and for the inside from 5, 1 to 6. The curve\\nor quarter circle 7, 9, 10 and 4 gives one-lialf of the outline; this curve\\ndivided into equal parts as shown, and lines dropped to the miter line 1 to\\n2 of B give the data for the first part of the second method. For the\\nstretch-out, draw the line N to N/ any length; draw a perpendicular line", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0062.jp2"}, "63": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n53\\nat the center of line X to X as the line 1 to 1 shows. Draw on both\\nsides parallel lines as shown by the lines 2 to 4 and point 5. The same\\nis done on the other side of line 1 to 1 The various distances of part A\\ncontained from line 6 to 5 and the point 1 to 4 and 5 may be transferred to\\nthe stretch-out C as has been done and is fully shown in the drawing, or\\nthe measures may be taken from part B from the distances contained be\u00c2\u00ac\\ntween the line 1, 8, 4 and the miter line 1 to 2. Both the methods as\\ngiven accomplish the same result, but in themselves are somewhat different\\nfrom each other. The part of the pattern between the points X, V to 1\\nis but a duplicate of the other half of part C and may be drawn in the\\nsame manner as that one has been done. Fig. 59 gives the development\\nof part C of Fig. 55. A of Fig. 59 is one-half of one side of the desired\\nshape. Divide this part into as many equal parts as desired. I have\\ndivided the same into six equal parts as is shown by the profile line by the\\nnumerals 1 to 7. Draw the stretch-out line of B from A to B equal in length\\nto the profile line of A. Divide the line A to B of B into as many equal parts\\nis part A has been divided into. Draw the perpendicular parallel lines\\n1 to 7 as given. Make the distance from the center line to the out\u00c2\u00ac\\nline for each numbered line of B equal to the corresponding line in part\\nA. Draw the curves free hand through the points where the distances end\\non the lines as found. Allow for laps on two of the pieces for the sides;", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0063.jp2"}, "64": {"fulltext": "54\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nalso for laps on all the four pieces at their respective top and bottom ends.\\nThe sides are to be formed to shape and soldered together. The foregoing\\ndescriptions of the three parts of Fig. 55 give all the patterns required for\\nthese sections and they may be made in three separate pieces. But if it is\\ndesired to make them in one piece, the patterns as developed may by placed\\non such a manner that they make but one pattern for each side of the four\\nsides that are required for the finial. When this part of the finial is put\\ntogether it will be well to put a bottom or a piece inside of the part at S S\\nof part A of Fig. 55; also one at B, and one at or near the top end of part\\nC. These bottoms tend to strengthen the structure and also to steady the\\nrod made of pipe which passes through them, as is fully shown in Fig. 55.\\nFor the ball or part D a spun zinc ball may be used, such as can be bought\\nfrom a dealer in ornaments used in this line. If it is preferred to make a\\nball for this purpose, and it should be decided to make one out of two parts\\nthe general directions given in Article XIII for raised work of this class will\\nbe found to cover this case sufficiently to enable the workman to obtain\\nall the data required. Fig. 60, part A, gives the side and end elevations of\\nthe spear head. Line A to B gives a plan for the same at that point, and\\nC to I) for the end. A gives a view of a short tube soldered on to the\\nbottom end of the spear; the other end is to be slipped over the rod, fas\u00c2\u00ac\\ntened to it by a pin or bolt and also soldered to the same. The bottom\\nend of the spear is to be rounded so as to join onto the round tube A. The\\nparts 1 and 2 of B of Fig. 60 are the patterns for the spear. For the top\\npart 1 make the center line A to B equal to A to B of part A. The length\\nof line B to C of part 1 is equal to A to B of part A.\\nFrom A to C of part 1 is equal to A to B of part A. Both sides of part\\n1 are to be alike. This gives the pattern for one side of part 1. The bend\\nis to be made on line A to B; lap3 may be made as suit? the fancy of the one\\ngetting out the work. For part 2, draw the center line, also line F to G- as\\nshown. Make the distance from center line each way to F and G equal in", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0064.jp2"}, "65": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n55\\nlength to the line A B of part A; the center line equal in length from\\nline F G to line 1 to 2 of part A. The length of line H to L of part 2 is\\nequal to line C to D of part A. Make the bend as demanded by the end\\nelevations of part A on the center line of part 2. This gives all that is\\nneeded to get out the spear head. As to the arrow head and the feather\\nend of the vane, the arrow head is made in a similar way to that employed\\nin getting out the spear head, the measurements of this part to be followed\\nas given by Fig. 56, as far as demanded by the drawings. The two parts of\\nthe feather end are to be soldered on to a tube as shown in Fig. 56. Each\\npart is to be made double, that is, each part is to be one-half inch thick or\\nis to have two sides, and a half-inch strip is soldered between the same.\\nFasten the arrow-bead and the other end securely to the rod or pipe.\\nFull measurements for this part of the finial are given in Fig. 56. The\\nornaments as shown at E, Fig. 55, are made foi their side views, as\\nthe drawing shows, and they are to be three-quarters of an inch wide\\nviewed from the end or the side at right angles to the one shown in the\\nfigure. There arc four of these pieces, one at each quarter of the rod all ip", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0065.jp2"}, "66": {"fulltext": "56\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\none plane. The swivel joint as shown in Fig. 56, is made by a sleeve\\nbeing fastened as shown. The four-way swivel, as shown, has the ends\\nof the vane pipe screwed into its ends. The cross is fitted to the vertical\\nrod or pipe, as shown, so that it turns easily. The entire measures for the\\nvertical rod are given in the drawings. It would be well to let the rod\\ndown into the deck of the pediment when placing the finial into position,\\nand then solder the edges of the part A firmly to the deck. Allowance must\\nbe made for the above when constructing the finial at the shop. The Fig\u00c2\u00ac\\nures 61 and 62 show the front and side view of the ornaments for the ends\\nof the ^op of the pediment. Fig. 63 gives a plan view of the same. Fig.\\n64 gives a front view of the center ornament of one side of the finial. All\\nthese ornaments are to be of zinc, stamped to shape, or of a pattern some\u00c2\u00ac\\nwhat similar, as the figures show.\\nXV.\\nBT{KC1 HOS AND FASTENINGS op CORNICES to\\nBUILiDINGS.\\nThe putting up of the cornice on the building is the last part of the en\u00c2\u00ac\\ntire work to be done in connection with the cornice, as described in Article\\nV, Fig. 25. I may say that in no department of the work is it more neces\u00c2\u00ac\\nsary that good and careful work should be done than in this. It must not\\nbe imagined that simply because a good part of cornice work, by reason of\\nts almost inaccessible position, is beyond critical examination, that it can\\nbe done in any niancer that inferior and indifferent workmen choose to do\\nit. It is not to be wondered at that work which ought to last a life-time,\\ncommences to show defects in a short time after it has been put up on", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0066.jp2"}, "67": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n57\\nbuildings, when it shows badly jointed connections, wide open gaping\\nseams, very irregular lining up, poor soldering and worse riveting. All the\\nforegoing is generally the fault of firms sending out too much talent of the\\nrough and ready sort, too many cheap roustabouts and helpers, when\\nreally the work ought to be done by good, careful, first-class mechanics of\\nthe highest grade of intelligence to be found among cornice men. It is an\\neasy matter for a botchy workman to spoil the beauty and general sym\u00c2\u00ac\\nmetry of almost any cornice, no matter how well made in the shop in the\\nfirst place, by his bungling, unmechanical way of doing the work on the\\nbuilding in its final finishing stage. The idea is to only entrust work of\\nthis kind to men who can do first-class work neatly, quickly and in tiie end\\nfar cheaper than poor or \u00e2\u0080\u009cjerry\u00e2\u0080\u009d workmen could possibly do the same. One\\nof the reasons why a good many first-class workmen do not care to do out\u00c2\u00ac\\nside work of this kind is that in many cases they do not like high climbing;\\nalso, the work to some extent is rather rough and hard on clothes, etc.\\nThen, too, we all know how much more agreeable it is to work in the shop\\non inside work. But for all this, the work on a building, to be fully up to\\na first-class standard, must be done well, and it takes capable men to do it.\\nThe foregoing is rather a severe view of this matter, but I believe a just\\none. This should rather stimulate the student to become a first-class man,\\nwhich is imperative in order to be able to do the highest class of work in\\nthe cornice trade.\\nHaving pointed out what to do and how it should be done properly, I\\nwill give a few different methods how this kind of work is performed. One\\nof the first considerations when arrangements for putting up a cornice are\\nmade is to know if it is to be put up in pieces and sections, or if the cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nnice is to be put up in the whole, that is, the entire structure all at once in\\none piece. This point determined on, it is in order to make all prepara\u00c2\u00ac\\ntions for the special way that the work is to be done. The first method\\nthat I will discuss is this: Let it be supposed that the wall has already\\nbeen built up and finished so far as the brick work connected with it is\\nconcerned. The problem in this case is how to provide suitable and ade\u00c2\u00ac\\nquate means to fasten, brace and hold or anchor the structure permanently\\ninto the final position which it is to occupy on the wall cf the building.\\nThe means to attain all this is shown in Fig. 65. In this fig.\\nure the general outline of the cornice under consideration is given. The\\nline A, A gives the outside face of the wall as built; B is the foot molding.\\nI will first describe how to make this part of the work ready for the recep\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion of the cornice. It will be noticed that the board, No. 1, is placed\\nagainst the face of the wall. To make this board fast, it is customary to\\ndrive wooden plugs into the mortar spaces between the bricks; then nail the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0067.jp2"}, "68": {"fulltext": "58\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nboard No. 1 securely to the wall, using the places where the wooden plugs\\nare wherein to drive the nails securely. Have the board No. 1 perfectly\\nstraight and even, or in line.\\nSmall brackets may be nailed at the top end of board, as the piece\\nNo. 3 gives, to support the board on top as No. 2 shows. This gives the\\nsupport for the foot molding and extends along the front of the entire\\nfoot molding of the cornice. The section view, as given by B of this\\npart, is to be made in all its particulars as the profile demands. For the\\nupper part of the cornice the board, as D shows, may be fastened to\\nthe wall in the same general manner as the board No. 1 of B has been.\\nThe board D is also to be put up perfectly straight and in line every way,\\nas demanded for perfect correctness, and as the measurements of the cor-\\nnice call for. This is all clearly shown m the drawing, Fig. 65. As the\\ndeck of this cornice projects out from the face of the wall, the top sheath-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0068.jp2"}, "69": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n59\\nmg boards of the same a e made to project out the required distance as de\u00c2\u00ac\\nmanded by the elevation of the cornice. The brackets, as 0 gives, may be\\nplaced as shown. The distances apart to place them are mainly governed\\nby the circumstan \u00e2\u0080\u0098,es in th) case wherein they are used. About three or four\\nfeet apart will d for this case. If a very heavy cornice is placed by this\\nmethod correspondingly more brackets are needed. The idea is to make the\\nwoodwork strong and firm enough to be secure and bear the load wi h a\\ngood margin for safety and durability under all conditions. This part of\\nthe work done and ready to receive the cornice the same may be put up in\\nsections or the entire structure may be put up in one piece.\\nIf the cornice is to be put up in sections, a convenient method\\nwould be to make that part embracing the foot molding, beginning at E,\\nalso the panel section, dentil course and planceer, ending at F, so that all\\nwill be in one section, finished and ready to go on to the building. It i s\\nunderstood, of course, that Fig. 65 gives only an outline drawing of the\\ncornice. This is done in order to avoid confusion of lines.\\nThe parts enumerated may be hoisted up into place, then fastened\\npermanently to the boards on to the face of the wall as shown in Fig. 65.\\nThis may be done by nailing the parts to the woodwork at suitable places\\nand intervals wherever the design offers opportunity to do so. The next\\nsections embrace from point F of the fascia band, the crown molding, deck\\nmolding and deck\u00e2\u0080\u0094in short the balance of the entire cornice. It will be\\nnoticed that from point H to K this part of the cornice is braced. These\\nbraces may be used, one every three or four feet apart. The connection at\\npoint F is made by the fascia band being cleated to the planceer as shown.\\nThe part for the deck is nailed to the sheathing boards as may be required.\\nThe foregoing is a cheap way to put up a cornice, but if well done makes\\na fairly good job. A somewhat better and stronger way is to use wooden\\nlookouts for tin s purpose. These are set into the brickwork, as in Fig. 66.\\nFor the cornice under consideration the lookouts may be shaped as the\\ndrawing for the foot molding from 1, 2 to 3 gives; the board A (an end\\nview of which is shown), is to be nailed on these lookouts or brackets. All\\nthis work must be done smoothly and in line throughout so as to insure\\na good and even foundation for this section. The lookouts or brackets for\\nthe upper sections are to be bricked in as the drawing shows. The shapes\\nof these brackets are to conform to the general outline of the design of the\\ncornice. The boards B and the deck sheathing C are to be made and put in\\nposition as the drawings require. At E is shown where, at intervals a\\npiece or block of wood has been bricked into the wall instead of a brick;\\nthese are used to nail fast to the wall those parts of the cornice that come in", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0069.jp2"}, "70": {"fulltext": "60\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ncontact with them. These pieces are called by some wooden bricks. It\\nwill readily be seen that this method offers a solid bed and foundation for\\nthe cornice to be fastened to, and is to be recommended where a job of this\\nclass is desired to have at once great solidity and a strong bed. With this\\nstyle of brackets and arrangements the cornice may either be put up in one\\npiece or in sections as desired. In some cases it is necessary to use an out\u00c2\u00ac\\nside scaffold as it would be impossible to get at some of the parts without\\none. In the next article I will give some styles that would be very handy\\nfor this cornice. Fig. 67 gives a mode to put up the cornice with iron an\u00c2\u00ac\\nchors, braces and wires; in fact making the same fire-proof throughout.\\nThere is not a particle of woodwork about the whole construction of the\\ncornice. There are three courses of anchors used as the three letters A, B\\nand C give. The general arrangement of bracing is shown in the figure.\\nThe cornice may be got out in the same general manner as described be\u00c2\u00ac\\nfore with wooden lookouts.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0070.jp2"}, "71": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n61\\nThe section from H to F may first be put up; the anchors in line with\\nA may be bricked into position as also those at B. The lower section may\\nthen be placed in position and bolted to the braces of the cornice, as at H\\nand at K. After this is done the brickwork may be carried up to the top,\\nthen the upper sections may be hoisted into place and made fast to the an\u00c2\u00ac\\nchors as is shown in Fig. 67. The joint at F forms a drip and is bent so\\nas to form a cleat joint on to and over the downward bend of the outer edge\\nof the planceer. This makes a neat finish at this connection. The brace\\nor part of the wrought iron lookout, as shown by the letter 0, to which the\\nplanceer is fastened, may be made so as to have a joint, as is given by the\\ndrawing at point K, that is, if the cornice is put up in sections. The brace\\nS is placed in the position as shown, to impart rigidity and firmness to the\\nupper deck of the cornice. If the cornice is to be put up in one piece, the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0071.jp2"}, "72": {"fulltext": "62\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nm m /V7.S3\\nmain braces, as from C, D, 0, L, R to A, may each be made in one piece\\nand fastened as shown at their two ends at point K. A lug may be fas\u00c2\u00ac\\ntened to the braces so that they may be bolted to the anchors, as the de\u00c2\u00ac\\ntails are given in Fig. 68; B is the anchor, K is the connection and 0 is\\na section of one of the main braces. Fig. 69 gives the details of the con\u00c2\u00ac\\nnection as described for Fig. 67 at K. The methods so far described that\\nwould be suitable for this cornice to obtain the ends aimed at, namely, to\\nbrace the cornice sufficiently for strength and durability so that it will re\u00c2\u00ac\\ntain its shape when it is placed in its final position on the building, and also\\nthe style of lookouts, both for wood and iron as given, need not be consid\u00c2\u00ac\\nered as arbitrary or the only ones that could be used for the purpose.\\nThese styles and methods have been given merely to show some good\\nways by which it may be done. In almost every shop the powers that be\\nhave their own peculiar systems in practice, some differing from the system\\nas given in this article. But I may be permitted to suggest that the me\u00c2\u00ac\\nthods as presented I consider as equal to any in point of strength, simplicity,\\nease in putting up the cornice as well as for cheapness. The main aim for\\nwork of this class should be to make it as simple in form and shape as is\\nconsistent with the use it is to be put to. Make as few bends and turns as\\npossible but so as to conform to the general shape and profile of the de\u00c2\u00ac\\nsign of the cornice that they are intended for. These few hints it will be\\nwell to bear in mind when laying out work of this class. As to the number\\nof braces to use, as Fig. 65 shows, six will do, two for each end section and\\ntwo for the 3 projecting center part. In the Figs. 65, 66 and 67 the\\n3 projecting parts are not shown in order to avoid a multiplicity of lines\\nand to present the drawings in as simple a shape as possible. The braces,\\nlookouts and other particular features for the 3 projecting parts can readi\u00c2\u00ac\\nly be made for these from the profile as given by Fig. 27 of Article V. This\\nmakes it unnecessary to give a special drawing for these parts. The pro\u00c2\u00ac\\njecting parts from the foot molding to the planceer, or the brackets, den\u00c2\u00ac\\ntils, etc., are shown by dotted lines in the Figs. 65 to 67.\\nIn fastening the stays and braces to the galvanized iron surfaces where-\\never this may occur, use flat headed bolts or use washers large enough to\\ngive the heads a good flat bearing against the iron so as to avoid the tear\u00c2\u00ac\\ning out or drawing through of small bolt heads through the parts that have\\nto bear the strain of holding the cornice in position on the building. The\\nfastenings for the pediment, if it is to have no woodwork, would be to\\nmake the braces and stays to conform to its profile and fasten these with\\nbolts to the braces of the cornice, and also to lugs in the rear of the pedi\u00c2\u00ac\\nment on to the wall. It would hardly be necessary to add any wooden", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0072.jp2"}, "73": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n63\\nbraces into the inside of the pediment even if the wooden lookouts are used\\nfor the cornice. In any case the pediment should be braced firmly and\\nstrong enough so as to meet any demand that might be imposed on it by\\nwindy and severe weather. The rod of the finial could be made long\\nenough so as to pass through the entire structure of the pediment and be\\nfastened to the solid deck of the cornice. If wooden braces are decided on,\\nto be used on the inside of the pediment of this cornice, it would be well\\nto nail a board on to the top of the cornice deck, the same conforming to\\nthe general outline of the shape as the bottom section of the pediment has.\\nA flange may or could also be fastened to this board in such a shape and in\\nthe exact position which would be demanded for it so that the rod of the\\nfinial could be screwed in the same. This would greatly aid in securing\\nadditional rigidity to the lower end of the rod. The placing in position of\\nthe pediment would be the last operation necessary to finish the entire\\nwork connected with this cornice as given by Fig. 25 of Article V.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0073.jp2"}, "74": {"fulltext": "64\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nSTAGING AND SCAFFOLDING FOR cornige WORK.\\nxvr.\\nIn this article I will give a few of the most handy and serviceable\\nstyles of quickly made stagings and scaffolding in use. Some of the spe\u00c2\u00ac\\ncial features that should be possessed by appliances of this kind are that\\nthey must be strong and trustworthy in every respect. Then thdr cost\\nmust be within reasonable bounds, and they should be light and easily\\nhandled so that they can be readily erected as wanted, and also that they\\ni*an be removed without too much labor and trouble. In order to meet the\\ndemands for safety I favor the us9 of f bolts for all the main joints and\\nfastenings occurring in the make-up of a first-class scaffolding as used in\\ncornice work. Take, for instance, the style of stagings that are generally\\nused by painters and to some extent by some reckless cornice men. These\\nstagings are usually fastened at the top of the buildings by long iron\\nhooks, often made of such a poor quality of iron as to be practically useless\\nif they are required to support more than the weight of one or, at most, of\\ntwo men. Then the other way to fasten the ropes and pulleys by means of\\nlong planks projecting over the cornice far enough to tie the sustaining\\nropes to, while the other ends of the planks are held down by pieces of\\nlumber or stones, etc., does not tend very much to make the workmen us\u00c2\u00ac\\ning a make-sliift rig of this kind feel any too safe, or to any extent to ease\\ntheir minds while putting up cornice work on buildings. Another great\\nfault is the instability of this kind of staging; every movement made by the\\nworkmen causes the whole concern to sway back and forth. TLa reasons\\ngiven above are enough to make almjst any workman willing to forego\\nthis doubtful pleasure cf working on a rigging of this kind, and I may add,\\nit is small wonder that many will not do out side work when such contri\u00c2\u00ac\\nvances as the foregoing are tendered to them to use. Contrasting the scaffold\u00c2\u00ac\\ning or staging as shown by Fig. 70 with the ordinary swinging scaffold, (he\\nstyle as given by the Fig. 70 is to be preferred in every way as far as safety,\\nstrength and stability are concerned.\\nThe supports, as shown by this figure, are of a kind upon which no\\nworkman need hesitate to trust himself. The drawing shows the general\\nscheme of this scaffolding so plainly that no very lengthy description of\\nthe reasons are necessary to be given why it is built in the style show n.\\nThe timber A is a 2 x6 piece of plank. The pieces B, C, D and E are all 2\\nx5 The three boards, X to X, are laid on to E and are used to walk and\\nwork upon. The strips of one inch stuff, a9 shown, are nailed to the staging\\nand serve as a ladder to enable the workmen to reach the top parts of the\\nwork and also to ascend to the roof should they so desire. F and G are\\nthe braces that hold the entire scaffolding to the walls and roofs. As an\\nextra safeguard the fastening as shown by the rope H is here introduced to", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0074.jp2"}, "75": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n65\\nshow how to arrange the same in case such extra help is deemed necessary.\\nThe eye-bolt shown in the figure should be made good and strong so as to\\nbe reliable in all cases. It will be noticed that all the main fastenings are\\nbolted together. For this purpose I would always advise the use of heavy\\nbolts, net lighter than in any case. My reason for advising the use of\\nbolts in preference to nails, etc., is that when the scaffolding is out of use\\nthe bolts can be taken out and the scaffolding packed away in a compact\\nform,which would not be possible if the joints had all been nailed together.\\nIn the latter case, in the attempt to take them apart, the probabilities are\\nthat the timbers of which the scaffolding is composed would all be more or\\nless damaged. One point to be borne in mind when designing a set of\\nscaffolding of the general kind as Fig..70 gives, is to have all the main sup\u00c2\u00ac\\nports of the right length. Take, for instance, the brace E of the figure.\\nIt will be noticed that the end of this brace rests against the front of the\\nwall, holding the entire structure in an upright position and the horizontal\\nparts level. If this timber is either a little too long or too short it is at\\nonce apparent that the whole structure will be out of plumb, thereby the\\nstrain on all the parts are out of proportion to that which they are intended\\nto bear. The idea is to have all the parts just right; a careful study of the\\npeculiarities of the staging as shown in Fig. 70 is recommended. I may\\nadd that I have used scaffolding of this kind on some of the loftiest build-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0075.jp2"}, "76": {"fulltext": "66\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nings in the country and have always found them superior to any other style\\nthat has ever come to my notice. The staging as shown by Fig. 71 is one\\nof a variety of styles used on very high buildings and generally when one or\\nmore stories are added to a building already erected, and in some cases even\\nbefore it has ever been contemplated that any more stories would be added\\nto the structure. It will be seen upon close, inspection that this style of\\nstaging does not in the least interfere with the occupancy of the story im\u00c2\u00ac\\nmediately underneath the same, and for this reason it is a special favor\u00c2\u00ac\\nite with many builders and cornice men.\\nEach one of these brackets is composed of three pieces. The timber\\nA and also the piece B may be made out of a 2 x6 piece. C may be made\\nof lighter stuff; a piece lj x5 will do for this brace. This style bracket\\nmay be bolted together, but as it is more the custom to nail the parts of\\nthis kind of bracket together this may be done. As the dimensions", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0076.jp2"}, "77": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL 6?\\nand measurements for each particular job are almost invariably different\\nfrom any other it is obvious that it is not necessary to be too particular in\\ntrying to save the material for another job. The flooring and the front\\nguard of this kind of scaffolding is all plainly shown in the drawing. This\\nparticular style of staging is generally used by cornice workers where the\\nadded story of a building has a galvanized iron or copper front, and on\\nbuildings that are occupied by tenants during the time that the work is go\u00c2\u00ac\\ning on. Fig. 72 shows a style of bracket that is generally used where the\\nstory from which the scaffold is built may be utilized for this purpose.\\nThe main upright timber of this bracket is made of 2 x6 material, and is\\nplaced on the inside of the building resting on the floor on its lower end,\\nand braced or cleated to the same to prevent its slipping inwardly. A small\\nblock, nailed to the floor as shown, is generally all that is necessary to ac\u00c2\u00ac\\ncomplish this purpose. The horizontal piece A is bolted to the upright, as\\nis also the piece B; this is shown in the drawing.\\nThe brace C is placed in its relative position to prevent the upper part\\nfrom giving way toward the inside of the house; this brace also makes\\nthe bracket stiff and unyielding. In no style of scaffolding are the good\\npoints of bolting the main parts together so apparent as in this kind. It\\nwill be noticed that in the main parts of this bracket there are a number of\\nholes for bolts in each piece so that this bracket can very readily be adjusted\\nto almost any case or condition that may come up in ordinary work. The\\nflooring for this scaffold is plainly shown in the drawing, as are also a\\nnumber of pieces that are nailed to the upright, and to the piece B, to be\\nused as a ladder for the men to ascend or descend as may be required dur\u00c2\u00ac\\ning the progress of the work. Fig. 73 shows a double scaffold often made\\nuse of in putting up galvanized iron fronts, etc. As the drawing shows,\\nall the main timbers are. bolted together and are made so that they can be\\nadjusted so as to fit almost any case. The flooring for both the upper and\\nlower staging is all plainly shown. The braces are so plainly given that\\nno amount of description could add to a clearer understanding of the draw\u00c2\u00ac\\ning as given by Fig. 73. The strips that serve for a ladder in the upper\\nsection of the scaffolding may be nailed to the pieces as shown. The four\\nvarieties of stagings and scaffolding as given by Figs. 70 to 73 are exam\u00c2\u00ac\\nples of what may be considered the best practice for cornice work generally\\nThese styles, with a little variation from the shapes as given, may be\\nadapted to nearly any case that is liable to come up in practical work as\\nfar as the putting up of cornices is concerned. The workman, in case he\\nhad to put up a cornice of the class as the Fig. 25 of Article V gives an\\nexample of, will find an ample variety of staging among the drawings to\\nselect? from.\\nA word on the proper care and preservation of tools and appliances as", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0077.jp2"}, "78": {"fulltext": "68\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nused on outside work. The pieces and parts of scaffolding should be made of\\ngood sound timber and if of interchangeable and adjustable kinds of scaffold\u00c2\u00ac\\ning, they should be planed and painted. This adds greatly to the length of\\ntime that the wood will remain in good condition and fit for hard service.\\nWhen the scaffolding is not in use, have it carefully stored away under\\nshelter in a dry place. Have system enough in storing the same away that\\nany piece whenever wanted can readily he found. Have all ropes, tackle,\\netc., in their proper place. In order to he able to do this a place must be\\nprovided for everything. Have pegs or hooks fixed so that each coil of rope\\ncan be hung up. See that this is done at once when they are brought back\\nfrom any job. A few minutes devoted to neatly coiling a lot of ropes and\\nproperly hanging them up in their proper places when they are first brought\\nin from a job will often save hours of vexatious unraveling of a lot of tangled\\nand carelessly piled up ropes and tackle, which is often the case where no\\norder or system is followed in taking care of these tools and appliances\\nwhile they are not in use.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0078.jp2"}, "79": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n69\\nXVH.\\n01^AmE]SlT STRCClPlfiO mACpifiE.\\nIn the preceding Articles, a complete exposition of the details entering\\ninto the entire work embraced in all branches required to complete a cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nnice as given by the Figs. 25, 26 and 27, of Article V, has been given.\\nTo be more precise and minute, the work as described commenced with\\ndetailed instructions, giving full explanations how to read and measure up\\nthe drawings as submitted to the student, thus enabling him to ascertain", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0079.jp2"}, "80": {"fulltext": "70\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nthe entire amount of iron, etc., contained in and required for this cornice.\\nFollowing the foregoing it has been shown how to figure the weight and\\nalso how long it would require to construct this cornice according to the\\nbest practice, this supplemented by all necessary tables and rules. This\\ngave the preliminary office work or estimating part of this cornice. The\\nnext step described was to arrange the drawings so that when the parts\\nwere laid and cut out of the iron, this could be done with the least possible\\nwaste of material. Then followed the entire modus operandi necessary to\\nobtain all the patterns, tem-plates, etc., of all the miters and connections;\\nin fact it gave and showed how to lay out every inch of iron m the entire struc\u00c2\u00ac\\nture,from the foot molding to the top spear head of the finial. Following this\\nvarious modes and ways were given to join these pieces together either in\\nsections or in the whole; and finally it was shown how to brace, and vari\u00c2\u00ac\\nous ways were given to fasten the cornice to the building. It may have\\nbeen noticed that for the ornamental part of the work reference has fre\u00c2\u00ac\\nquently been made to stamped zinc or iron ornaments used on this cornice.\\nThese are generally bought from dealers throughout the country. It fre\u00c2\u00ac\\nquently happens that special designs not to be found in the catalogues or\\nkept in stock by dealers are wanted and insisted upon to be used by stub\u00c2\u00ac\\nborn or perverse architects. This makes it imperative that the desired pat\u00c2\u00ac\\ntern or design be used by the cornice*maker. If he has to write to the\\nmanufacturer and the latter in turn has to get out the required dies and de\u00c2\u00ac\\nsigns, it is easily seen that this entails a considerable cost to the party who\\nis getting out the cornice in question, not considering the loss of time and\\npossible delay in getting the goods when wanted. To avoid some of the\\nforegoing vexatious delays and heavy expenses, and to show an easy and\\ncheap way for every cornice maker to provide himself for his shop a cheap,\\nsimple and easily made machine for the purpose of getting out this work\\nthe designs, as Figs. 74 to 76 show, have been prepared to meet this want.\\nThis machine has proven itself to do the work most satisfactorily in a good\\nmaDy shops and has this to recommend it\u00e2\u0080\u0094that it does not require much\\nroom to place it in position and can be constructed by almost any mechanic\\nof ordinary ability. Fig. 74 gives the front elevation or view; Fig. 75\\ngives the side and Fig. 76 the plan. The first thing to get is a block of\\nwood about 18 square, or round for that matter, if so desired. This may be\\nof a height as suits the party getting up the machine. If it is desired to put it\\non the floor of the shop, for the foundation I would suggest to make the\\nblock from 18 to 24 high; this gives the most convenient height for work.\\nNext take a piece of hardwood plank about 8 thick by 8 long and 18\\nwide, as the drawing gives. This is to be fastened securely to the block as\\nshown. Have these parts perfectly square and true every way. This gives", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0080.jp2"}, "81": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n71\\nthe wood-work for the foundations and bed of the machine. The upper\\nparts are usually made of steam or gas pipe. Select two well-joined and\\nsmooth pieces of 1^ pipe; these are to be of the length as required from\\nthe bottom of the 3 plank, allowing for space for a lock nut fRnge, as\\nshown at 1, 1 of Rig. 74, up to the ceiling at 2, 2 of the same figure-\\nIn this case it is supposed that the upright guides are secured at their\\nupper ends at the ceiling. Where it is not practicable to do so, a suitable\\nbracket may be rigged up to answer this purpose. Make the center pipe or\\nmain lift and drop guide of the length as given from 3a to 4a of Fig. 74.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0081.jp2"}, "82": {"fulltext": "72\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nThread it up or down far enough so that the cross tees can be secured into\\ntheir respective positions, as shown at 5 and 6.\\nThe four three way tees as X, X and 0, 0 show, are to be screwed\\nto cross-pieces of pipes as shown, but those parts of the tees that are to\\nslide up and down on the guide-posts are to be filed and fitted so that\\nthey are a nice fit, not too loose nor too tight, so that they keep the center\\nplunger in its exact required position at all times. This done, provide a\\ncap at the upper end of the center pipe with a ring attached to it, as shown\\nat 8a of Fig. 74. At the lower end secure a flange, as shown at C; note a\\nflange of this sort is required for each male die made for stamping; this\\nwill be more fully explained further on. The various pieces as described\\nin the foregoing are to be got out and joined together as the drawing\\nshows. The flanges at the ends of the uprights are then screwed on\\nas shown in the drawing. Each piece must be cut and threaded so as to\\nbe just right and when put together as directed a machine as the front\\nelevation, Fig. 74, shows is the result.\\nReferring to the Fig. 75, the manner in which the lever with which\\nthe drop is operated is secured, is shown by the hook at the end of the\\nsame. This hook fits into the ring shown at the upper end of the center at\\n8a of Fig. 74. At S of Fig. 75 is shown how the lever is secured to obtain\\nthe lift to raise the plunger; this rod is fastened at its other end at any\\nconvenient point, so as to obtain the proper leverage as may be desired f\\naccording to how much drop it is desired the machine should have. This\\nlever can also be so arranged that it can be pressed down when the first\\noperation on the impression is commenced between the dies on the ma\u00c2\u00ac\\nterial, and then, by simply shifting the lever to another hook, the machine\\ncan be changed to a drop press.\\nFig. 76 gives the plan, showing the proper relative positions of the parts\\nfrom that point of view. The foregoing gives all the particulars entering\\ninto the construction of the machine; the next item to be considered is how\\nto make the dies, both male and female, or the top and bottom dies, and\\nalso how to secure them in their proper positions. A good way to secure\\nthis last object is to make a pattern and have a bed-plate cast, as Figs. 74\\nand 75 show at K and at K Having determined on the size wanted, have\\nit made and fasten it to the 3 plank, as shown in Fig. 74. It will be\\nnoticed that there are four lugs, one at each side on the bed-plate; through\\neach one of these a set-screw passes, which, when all four set-screws\\nare screwed up tightly, secures the bottom die firmly in its proper place, as\\nrequired. These set-screws, being of the proper length, can be adjusted so\\nthat any size die may be used as the occasion or the work may demand.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0082.jp2"}, "83": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n73\\nThe dies, as a matter of course, can not be any larger than the bed-plate\\ncan accommodate. The last and at the same time one of the most im\u00c2\u00ac\\nportant oparat ons is that of making the dies. One of the cheapest ways\\nof accomplishing this result is to take an ornament which it is desired to\\nduplicate and make a box of the size it is desired the outside of the die to\\nbe. Take a clear cut, or in other words, a well stamped figure, And place\\nthis in such a position as is required for the female die; tack or solder this\\nto the top edges of the box made for the same. Turn this box upside down\\nand fill it full of plaster of Paris. (The form or shape of this box must be\\nmade so that the set plaster cast will readily come out of the mold.) When", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0083.jp2"}, "84": {"fulltext": "74\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nthis has hardened, have a cast-iron die cast from it. The cost of this bot\u00c2\u00ac\\ntom die will be about 2L cents per pound. One point to be followed in\\nhaving work of this kind done is to have it done by a firm that has the\\nproper talent, or in other words, one that employs mechanics capable of\\ndoing good, smooth work, and also one that uses good iron from which to\\nmake the easting. Having obtained the bottom die, file and finish the same\\nperfectly smooth and clean. Then place the bottom die in its proper posi\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion on the bed plate and screw it up tightly in the machine. Make a rim\\nas high as it is desired to have the male die when done. This rim is to fit\\ntightly on or over the bottom die. Next screw a flange, as shown in the\\ndrawing, to the lower end of the plunger, as C gives. This is let down\\ninto position as demanded by the drawings. Now, in order to get the cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nrect shape and form of the male die, lay the ornament or figure from which\\nthe bottom die has been cast into the same. Be careful to have the side of\\nthe ornament which will be exposed to the hot metal smoked, that is, pre\u00c2\u00ac\\npared so that it will not solder or stick fast to the die when the same cools\\nand is completed. When the male die is finished and hardened, raise the\\nplunger and unscrew the die from the lower end of the same. This can\\neasily be done by reason of the way the flange is fastened in the die. This\\nmethod of fastening also enables the workman to very readily change from\\none set of dies to another without much bother. The upper or male di e\\nmay be cast from a composition of lead and zinc, as lead alone would be\\ntoo soft. Where permanent dies are desired, I would advise to have them\\nmade of cast iron, but the composition dies do fairly well for several hun\u00c2\u00ac\\ndred impressions, when iron is used for the material from which the orna\u00c2\u00ac\\nments are made. In ca3e sheet zinc is used, th) material must be heated\\nso as to render it pliable and not to expose it to the danger of cracking and\\nbreaking during the process of forming it to shape between the dies of the\\nmachine. The necessity for heating the zinc sheets is readily seen by any\\none who has even a casual knowledge of the brittle nature of this material,\\nand its great liability to break and crack when b .nt from its flat state in the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0084.jp2"}, "85": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n75\\nsheets, in which it is commonly used. J may also add that a composition\\ndie as described may answer for as high as a thousand impressions, when\\nthe material from which the ornaments are made is sheet zinc, properly\\nheated and prepared. In case a special design is wanted, hammer out the\\nshape as desired, and in case a great many ornaments of the same kind\\nand design are required, follow the way which has been given to make the\\ndies as wanted. Although the above described machine may not be the\\nideal or most perfect one that could be designed for the end sought, I\\nnevertheless consider it a Very good one, and about as cheap a machine as\\ncould be made, being at the same time a strong tool and capable of doing\\ngood work. The operation of stamping the ornaments is as follows: Place\\nthe plate on the bottom die, raise the male or plunger die by means of the\\nlever to the proper extent, as allowed by the machine; then let the plunger\\ndiop. Repeat this several times, until the perfee* impression is obtained.\\nTrim all frayed edges from the ornament. The latter is then ready to be\\nused for the purpose for which it is intended.\\nXVIII.\\nTHE MAHAGEmEHT OF 1ROPES #H\u00c2\u00a3 HOISTIHG TACKLE.\\nIn this article I will give some of the most used methods of tying\\nknots, the making of fastenings, some general hints for the preservation of\\nropes, etc., how splices are made, in short, will give some much-needed\\ninformation to cornice men on these subjects. This will be of benefit in\\nparticular to those who have much outside work to do, as in connection\\nwith this branch there is always more or less use for ropes, tackling, and\\nthe general management of hoisting work into place and position on a job.\\nIt has been my experience with most workmen whom I have come in contact\\nwith who were connected with the outside branch of cornice-work, that the\\ngreater number of them have but a very limited knowledge on this subject,\\nmany not even having the ability to tie some of the most simple knots, or\\nto make fast the end of a rope by a simple hitch. A careful study of this\\narticle and the figures shown is reoommmended to the student. I believe\\nthat even those who have some knowledge of the matter here presented, as\\nwell as those who have but a casual acquaintance with this important and\\nuseful branch, will be benefited by thoroughly understanding and making\\nthemselves masters of the instructions here given, which will materially add\\nto their efficiency as workmen. Evidences of the lack of knowledge on this\\nsubject are met with in. our trade on every hand, but chiefly in the expense", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0085.jp2"}, "86": {"fulltext": "76\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\naccount of firms who have men working for them who sometimes waste\\nvaluable time by the bungling way that they go about doing some of the\\nsimplest jobs of getting material and stock to the places on buildings where\\nit is desired to do the work. Men often climb ladders, carrying up with\\nthem heavy loads, with great discomfort to themselves and much hard\\nwork, when the same end could be attained (with time saved and the v, ork-\\nmen not all tired-out, whieh follows the disagreeable and heavy lugging\\nthat they have undergone) with ease and comfort to themselves, had they\\nknown in the first place how to arrange some simple hoisting rig to hoist\\nthe material to the roof. Numerous other instances could be cited, but this\\nwill suffice to show that the main idea should be to get the work in place,\\nand that as quickly and easily as possible, in the least expensive manner\\nthat the ingenuity of the workmen will permit. A reasonably good under\\nstanding of the subject presented here will greatly aid in the accomplish\u00c2\u00ac\\nment of this object.\\nFig. 78\\nIt is often the case that ropes become worn or damaged from some", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0086.jp2"}, "87": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n77\\ncau- e or other; ends of ropes are cut off square, but for some reason, or\\nfrom neglect, they are not properly tied so that they will not fray or un\u00c2\u00ac\\nravel at the ends. Fig. 77 shows several methods to prevent this unneces\u00c2\u00ac\\nsary waste. The figure 1 of Fig. 77 shows a common tie for a rope; the\\nend at A is in some cases cut off square at this point. A cheap way, but\\nnot as durable a way as the mode 2, which is the same as 1, but that the\\nends instead of being cut off are tied together forming loops, laying one\\nover the other. Another method to accomplish the same purpose is to\\ninterlace the ends together; 3 shows the rope ready to make the end by\\ninterlacing the strands. The figure 4 shows the manner in which this is\\ndone, but the strands are not drawn up tightly, in order to better illustrated\\nthe manner in which this operation is accomplished; 5 shows the ends\\ndrawn up tightly and the interlacing complete. Cut off the ends left and as\\ngood an end is the result as could possibly be made; 6 shows how the\\ninterlacing is commenced in one direction; 7 shows the interlacing in two\\ndirections; 8 shows howto finish the interlacing by the ends being worked\\nunder the strands, as in splicing.\\nIf it is desired to unite two ends of a rope together, or, as commonly\\ntermed, to make a splice, prepare the ends of the rope as shown by 1 of\\nFig. 78; put the ends of the ropes together as closely as possible; place the\\nends of one between the strands of the other, above and beljw alternately;\\nso as to interlace them. This is a quick method to make a short splice. The\\nprocess of making a long splice is as follows: Unlay the s rands of each\\nof the ends of the ropes it is intended to join for about half of tbe length\\nthat the splice will be, putting each strand of the one between two strands\\nof the other. 2 shows the strands arranged as described; reduce the\\nstrands toward their ends so that they lose themselves in the body of the\\nsplice at their ends.\\nTo make a splice for a rope that has been worn so that a part of ithau\\nto be cut out and the ends spliced together again, the following mode is", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0087.jp2"}, "88": {"fulltext": "78\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nfollowed, which makes the rope as strong at this splice as it has ever been.\\nThis is shown by 8 of Fig. 78-: This shows two strands, a and b of the\\nropes A B, knotted together, being drawn as tight as possible; unlay the\\nstrand a of the rope, A, for half the length of the splice, and twist the\\nstrand, b of the rope, B, strongly in its place, tying a and b together\\ntightly. The same process is again gone through on the rope, B, the strand,\\nFig. 80\\na of the rope, A, being knotted to the strand, b of the rope, B. When\\nall the strands are thus knotted together, interlace them with the strands\\nof the rope. Thus the strands, a a a are interlocked, by being passed\\nalternately above and below the turns of the cord, B, the ends being also\\nsometimes \u00e2\u0080\u009cwhipped.\u00e2\u0080\u009d In the same manner the strands b b b pass\\nalternately over and under the strands of the rope, A, and are in like man\u00c2\u00ac\\nner \u00e2\u0080\u009cwhipped.\u00e2\u0080\u009d It is important that the several interlacings and knots\\nshould not meet at one point; reduce the size of the strands toward the end,\\nso tli t they lose themselves in the body of the splice, cutting off such\\nparts as may project. The foregoing will give a very fair idea how splices\\nare made. To obtain the required proficiency to make a neat and well-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0088.jp2"}, "89": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n79\\nmade splice requires some practice. The above will give the student a\\nfair start on this subject. It is also a good idea when one is making a\\nsplice to provide one s self with a tool in the shape of a marlin-spike, with\\nwhich to open out the strands of a rope in order to pass the strands of\\nanother through or under them.\\nOf the many knots and fastenings I will give some examples in the\\nFigs. 79 and 80. Fig. 79, 1 shows a common over-handed knot; 2 shows\\nwhat is called the figure-eight knot; 4 is a common bend, joining together\\ntwo ropes and leaving four ends to the same; 3 shows how the common\\nsquare or reef-knot is arranged. In Fig. 80 is shown by 1 an ordinary\\nknot upon a double rope, and 2 presents the same knot somewhat differently\\narranged; 3 is a chain-knot or fastening on a rope, and 4 gives simple fas\u00c2\u00ac\\ntenings or knots on the same; 5 is a simple slip-clinch, and 6 shows a\\nbowline knot. 7 presents what is termed a slip-clinch to a sailor\u00e2\u0080\u0099s knot,\\nwhile 8 shows a slip-clinch secured, and 9 an eye-splice. The strands of\\nthis rope are brought back over themselves, and interlaced with the origi\u00c2\u00ac\\nnal turns, as in a splice. 10 is a knot for binding timbers; A shows how", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0089.jp2"}, "90": {"fulltext": "80\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nto start this knot. Severturns should be taken around the timbers, then\\nfasten the ends by passing them under the turns; 6, knot completed. The\\nend of a round stick, m n termed a packing stick, should be passed under\\nthe knot, the cord being slack enough to allow of this. By turning the\\nstick, the turns can be tightened to any extent; when tight, fasten the\\nlonger arm of the lever to some fixed point, by a rope, p q so that it cannot\\nfly back. Care must be taken not to turn the stick too far, or the rope may\\nbe broken.\\n2\\nPig. 84\\nIn Fig. 81 are shown several loops used to slip lines through; these\\nare often made use of in emergencies. In many instances it is of much\\nimportance that the workman be able to tie together and fasten timbers\\nfast to each other. Some examples are shown in Fig. 82; 1 of this figure\\nshows a fastening to shears; 2 shows a double chain fastening; 3 shows a\\nsquare mooring. The rope is around the post, A, and the piece, B, without\\nbeing crossed; the ends are fastened by tying. 4 shows a crossed fasten\u00c2\u00ac\\ning, the ends being drawn up and knotted tight. Figures 83 and 84 show\\nsome handy ways to make fast the ends of ropes. In Fig. 83 is shown by\\n1 a loop with the end whipped or tied to the rope; 2 of this figure shows a\\nfastening by a loop. This can be tied or untied without loosening the\\nloop itself. It is made by following toward the longer loop the direction\\nas numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and is terminated by the loop, 6, 7, 6, finally\\npassing it over the head of the post, A. This knot holds itself, the turns\\nbeing in opposite directions. To untie it, slack the turns of the rope suffi\u00c2\u00ac\\nciently to again pass the loop, 6, 7, 6, over the post, A, and turn the ends", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0090.jp2"}, "91": {"fulltext": "81\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nin the contrary direction to that in which they were made (as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1).\\n3 shows a very neat fastening. It is simple to make,and therefore a favorite\\ntie for the purpose with many workmen. In Fig. 84 the waterman\u00e2\u0080\u0099s knot\\nis shown by 1; by 2 is given a very effective fastening, while 3 is a fas\u00c2\u00ac\\ntening tied to a pin; the rope being fixed by a cross tie. The following\\nfastenings are also much used: Fig. 85 at 1 shows the half-hitch, 2 i-s\\ncalled a timber hitch, while 3 is the common clove hitch. In Fig. 86 are", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0091.jp2"}, "92": {"fulltext": "82\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nshown by 1, a combination of the half-hitch and timber hitch; 2 shows the\\ncommon and much-used bale sling. Fig. 87 at 1 shows the hammock hitch;\\nat 2 the ordinary cask sling, and 8 shows the butt sling, on end. This is\\na good mode to secure a keg in order to hoist it.\\nFig. 88 presents some of the most-used pulley and tackle blocks. 1 is\\na snatch block. These blocks are so arranged that the rope can be placed\\non the pulley-wlieel without passing the end through the eye, but is so\\narranged that a side lock can be opened and the rope laid on the wheel at\\nany time, th lock being closed again the pulley is ready to work with; 2\\nshows the common rope strapped block, often used fora single whip; 8 and\\n4 are a set of single and double pulley blocks; 5 is a much-used single pul\u00c2\u00ac\\nley wheel, it being a universal favorite with roofers, especially for light\\nhoisting. In the opinion of the writer the foregoing gives nearly everything\\nthat it is necessary for a thorough understanding of the subject, as far as\\nany information on this branch is of practical benefit to the cornice man.\\nIt will be noticed that in some of the explanations of the figures, no veiy\\nlengthy preamble nor detailed description has been given. This I deemed\\nunnecessary, as in most of the figures the positions and what it is intended\\nto convey, the drawings show so plainly that no amount of description\\nThe following tables will be found useful to the cornice trade as they\\ngive the weights and the safe load to be intrusted to the various sizes of\\nropes:\\nTABLE OF SAFE LOAD FOR COMMON ROPES TO BEAR. (HASWELL.)\\nDiameter.\\nCircumference. Safe Load.\\nDiameter.\\nCircumference.\\nSafe Load.\\n.25\\n.78\\n425 tbs.\\n.75\\n2.375\\n4,400 lbs.\\n.3125\\n1.00\\n690\\n.875\\n2.625\\n6.150\\n.375\\n1.25\\n825\\n1.00\\n3.00\\n8 400\\n.500\\n1.375\\n1,600\\n1.25\\n3.75\\n13,400\\n.5625\\n1.75\\n2 800\\n1.5\\n4.625\\n20,160\\n.6875\\n2.125\\n3,800\\n1.625\\n5.\\n24,600", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0092.jp2"}, "93": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n83\\nThe foregoing gives a fair average for the safe load to trust to ordinarily\\ngood manilla ropes. This may be taken as 10% higher and stronger than\\nsisal rope can bear. In weight, the difference between the two kinds of\\nrope is from 5 to 10%, if both kinds are reasonably dry. Some dealers\\nhave the knack of making the weight of the two ropes so nearly alike that\\nthere is practically no difference between the two; that is, taking a given\\nlength of both kinds, both being the same in length and also in diameter\\nstill both are alike in weight. This ingenious trick is done by storing the\\nmoisture-absorbing sisal rope in a damp or wet cellar. The lighter sisal\\nrope possesses the, to the dealer very profitable, peculiarity of absorbing\\nenough aqua to render it equal and in some cases even heavier than an\\nequal amount of manilla rope would weigh, even if the same were stored in\\nthe same place with the sisal. It therefore behooves the careful buyer to\\ninsist on getting his goods dry. The cost of common sisal rope is from 9\\nto 12 cents a pound while manilla sells from 12 to 16 cents a pound, accord\u00c2\u00ac\\ning to who buys and also, in many cases, from whom it is bought. My\\nadvice is to buy the better grade, namely, manilla rope, as the lasting qualities\\nas compared between the two kinds is fully one-third in favor of the better\\ngrade.\\nPLAN AND DETAILS OF A GABLE AflD HORIZONTAL\\nCORNICE.\\nXIX.\\nIn this article is shown by Fig. 89 a front elevation of a 28 front.\\nThe drawing shows part of the sections to be horizontal cornices, whils\\nnear the center is shown a gable cornice surmounted by a ridge coping and\\na finial with an arrow weather-vane. This view also shows the front of a\\nfancy dormer window with a finial, extended out from the slate-covered\\nmansard roof of the attic. At each end is shown a raised paneled coping\\ncapped by head blocks. At the upper edge of the roof is shown the crown-\\ndeck or cresting cornice, capped by a cresting. This entire design is drawn\\nto the scale of a to the foot. Fig. 90 gives a left-hand sectional view\\nof Fig. 89, showing the relative position of the ridge cresting or coping of\\nthe gable, also the positions which the finials have on the building viewed\\nfrom this point. The section of the horizontal cornice and also the posi-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0093.jp2"}, "94": {"fulltext": "84\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ntion of the ornamental turrets which are located at the junction of the\\nhorizontal cornice and at the base of the gable cornice, are also shown.\\nFig. 91 gives a section of the front viewed from the right-hand side of the\\nbuilding. This section gives the side elevation of the dormer window,\\nthe gable and a full outline of both ridge crestings as well as the positions\\nof the finials, head blocks, horizontal cornice and ornamental turrets, etc.\\nThe foregoing is supplemented by the plan view of the entire cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nnice in Fig. 92. The plan view, as will*be noticed, gives the correct loca\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion of each particular item that is shown in the drawings of the front and\\nside elevations of this cornice. It will also be observed that the drawings\\nare, in the main, different from those shown in the design as given in Arti\u00c2\u00ac\\ncle V, by Figs. 25, 26 and 27. Although being the plans of a building of", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0094.jp2"}, "95": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n85\\nthe same general class, the designs as Figs. 89 to 92 give, show som)\\nmoldings and miters that are not made use of at all in the former. Just\\nwhat points of difference there are and where they occur, will be seen far\u00c2\u00ac\\nther on. It is customary with most architects to furnish drawings, drawn\\nto the scale of one-quarter of an inch to the foot, as all the figures from\\n89 to 92 show.\\nBut it is seldom that as complete a set as I have submitted in this in\u00c2\u00ac\\nstance is furnished. Most architects only give a front elevation and one\\nsection or side view, for the cornice man to figure upon and for him (if he\\nsecures the contract to build the cornice), to deduct his working drawings\\nfrom. But in order to give the student every reasonable aid so as to enable\\nhim more readily to understand every detail of the design submitted, the\\ntwo extra views\u00e2\u0080\u0094the plan and one section or side view\u00e2\u0080\u0094have also been given.\\nTo give the student a more comprehensive idea how the actual busi\u00c2\u00ac\\nness of the preliminary stages of the figuring and the methods by which\\nthe first data are generally obtained for this branch of the work^ i have", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0095.jp2"}, "96": {"fulltext": "86\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ngiven in connection with the general description of this cornice, a form of\\nspecification, usually made use of by architects when submitting a set of\\ndrawings to be figured from. The specifications serve to inform the cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nnice man of all the details, in connection with and pertaining to the work\\nunder consideration. The drawings and the printed or written form of\\nspecifications are what he is to go by and also to which he is held after the\\ncontract is made and signed by him. This being the case, it stands to\\nreason that the best plan to follow before entering into any definite agree\u00c2\u00ac\\nment is to carefully read and stu ly the exact wording, the meaning, direct\\nor implied, of every point noted in the specifications that he is figuring on,\\nso that in case of a dispute he thoroughly understands the wording of the\\nsame. In the form of specification that I present in connection with this\\ncornice and the other work which is done by most cornice-making firms I\\nhave omitted to give any very precise or elaborate conditions in connec\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion with the design submitted in this article, my aim being to give the\\nstudent a good insight into the general business methods and also to pre\u00c2\u00ac\\nsent a form of a complete specification usually made use of by architects\\nin connection with the cornice-maker\u00e2\u0080\u0099s branch of work on a. building.\\nSpecifications are generally in the style as given and are in printed form,\\nthe spaces left blank being for any additional on more specific designation\\nof any particular part of the work it is desired by the architect to describe\\nmore fully. There is also to unst specifications an iron-clad condition\\naffixed (not shown iu the form given), that covers all classes of work des\u00c2\u00ac\\ncribed in it, which it will be well for the cornice man to note and make\\nprovisions for in his calculations. Whatever this general condition may\\nbe, note the same. The following is the priated form usually used for this\\npart of the work about a building:", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0096.jp2"}, "97": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n87\\nSPECIFICATIONS OF TIN, GALVANIZED IRON, SLATE AND\\nCOPPER WORK.\\nGALVANIZED Ikon CORNICE, Etc. The contractor will provide and fix all cornices,\\nmoulds, dormer windows, etc., as per elevations and details, together with brackets,\\nmodillions, ornaments, etc., all of No. 26 and 27 iron, substantially riveted and sol\u00c2\u00ac\\ndered, firmly b.aced every 4 to 6 feet, as directed, with 3-16xli-inch strong wrought-\\niron stays, holding all profiles and forms in proper shape, the whole firmly put up and\\nfixed to the building in a workmanlike manner.\\nCONDUCTORS- The conductors in the rear to be of-caliber, made of No. 24-\\niron, extending from the hanging gutter or head to the sewer, properly secured to but\\nnot against the wall of building or porch posts, by strong galvanized iron clasp-\\nhooks, placed every 8 feet. Pipes to have all necessary curves, bends, etc., to be\\nflanged over sewer-pipe openings, or if discharging on to the ground surface, to be\\nprovided with 16-inch shoes at the bottom, conveying the water from the building.\\nAll pipes to be lapped, properly seamed, soldered, and-put in place as soon as\\nthe roof is on, to protect the wall from damage.\\nOrnamental Conductors and Heads to be made of No. 26 iron and zinc, as per\\nelevations and details.\\nGUTTERS. Put up hanging gutters in the rear of the building-x-in size made\\nof No, 24 iron, flashed back under roof covering, not less than 4 inches, having a fall\\nto the conductor pipe of not less than 2 inches in every 25 feet, and all properly se\u00c2\u00ac\\ncured in place with strong gutter hooks on the under side; the gutter to have strong\\nwater-drip on the outer edge, formed by the strengthening wire, and to be so placed\\nthat the gutter rim will be at least 1 inch below the top of roofing where dripping to\\nthe gutter.\\nMETALLIC SKYLIGHTS. Put up.skylights, where indicated by plans, of sizes\\nmarked thereon, the same to be glazed with heavy ribbed glass, provided with proper\\niron strengthening bars, of dimensions in proper proportions to the size of the light,\\nor as directed; putty joints of glass with iron, to have iron water-shed covers.\\nProperly fix condensation gutters for each light, the same extending out and empty\u00c2\u00ac\\ning on the roof, and furnish movable ventilators in center of lights-x-in\\nsize.\\nall to be made water-tight. Skylight to be put up as soon as the roof is on. The\\ncontractor will be held responsible for all damage occurring to the building from\\nneglect of this part of his work", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0097.jp2"}, "98": {"fulltext": "88\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nCresting.\\nGalvanized Iron Sheeting. On windows,.to be moulded, paneled and\\nornamented as shown by drawings and put up in proper manner with one thickness\\nof heavy tar paper between the same and the wood work, all well lapped at joints....\\nPRESSED AND Oast Zing. The ornamental forms of cornice work, etc., to be of\\npressed zinc, of designs shown by elevations and details.\\nCopper Work.\\nTINNING. The plank coping of fire walls (where the same is used), the exposed\\nwoodwork of cornices, skylights, scuttle-covers and curbs, storm-house roofs, balco\\nnies, porches and bay window roofs, inside of gutters, hips, valleys and other exposed\\nwoodwork not otherwise provided for to be covered under slate, shingles, composi\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion (or other roof covering), to be covered with best quality of.\\nRoofing, tin securely seamed, fastened and soldered, and otherwise made water-tight.\\nRun tin up underneath shingles or slate, to provide well against back-water leaks;\\nfurnish the carpenter or mason, as work progresses, all required tin flashings, same\\nmaterial as roofs, and of suitable sizes, for the proper flashing of all outside work, or\\nshingles, slate, etc., to make properly tight over all openings and projections in wall\\nor roof surfaces; examine work carefully, and stop all leaks after other craftsmen,\\non completion of building. All tin-work and flashings to have two good coats of\\nmetallic paint on the under side before being laid; also on top, on such portions as\\nother work will cover up.\\nSlating .The roof of\\nand other surfaces so indicated by the plans, to be covered with best unfading,\\nsound..\\n..slat\u00c2\u00a9-x-in size-laid-\\nto the weather, all nails to be covered in the lapping. The slates to be properly\\ndrilled and trimmed, each slate to be nailed with 4d. galvanized nails; cut at hips,\\nvalleys, eaves and heading courses to make uniform bond, also ornamental bands as", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0098.jp2"}, "99": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n89\\nhereafter, all hips to be mitred and with top courses, under ridge covering, also head\u00c2\u00ac\\ners, firmly bedded in slaters\u00e2\u0080\u0099 cement.\\nprovide ornamental courses of\\nFELTING of medium tarred paper will be provided, carefully stretched, lapped 2-ply\\nand tacked on, previous to, and on all surfaces to be slated.\\nFLASHING* Do all step and other flashing as required during progress of work,\\naround all pipes, chimneys, dormers, scuttles, skylights, walls and all other places,\\nto make the whole perfectly water-tight, with tin as above specified, painted as other\\ntin work, of sufficient width, etc., secured into joints of brick or to other work,\\ncapped, bedded and pointed with slaters\u00e2\u0080\u0099 cement. At completion of building, exam\\nine work, etc., etc. (see tinning), and warrant all in good and perfect repair for a\\nperiod of one year from time of completion.\\nN. B.\u00e2\u0080\u0094Where copper is specified for flashing, etc., the above specifications will apply\\nto its use and forms the same as it now does to tin and iron work where copper gutter\\nlinings are used in connection with galvanized iron mouldings, the jammings must be\\nseamed and then soldered. All copper used throughout the work to be 14 oz. in\\nweight.\\nIn the foregoing printed form there are some items which have\\nno connection or bearing on a job as shown in the designs from Figs. 89\\nto 92. The main object in giving the form is to make the student familiar\\nwith*what occurs in actual every-day work. We will assume that the pre\u00c2\u00ac\\nliminary office work has been done as far as the reading of the plans and\\nspecifications is concerned. The measuring up of this work would now be\\nin order, or, in other words, the design as submitted to be transposed into\\ndetail and working drawings, and the same to be measured up so as to\\nascertain just how much material it will take to complete the entire work\\nso far as the cornice, dormer window, coping and cresting are concerned.\\nIn most drawings the full-size dimensions are shown in figures, even if the\\narchitect has prepared the drawings to a larger scale as in the design of Fig.\\n89. In this case I have not followed this plan, as I believe the earnest\\nstudent finds a far more instructive study in this design by taking bis rule\\nor scale, and when working out a problem as Fig. 89 gives, measuring and\\nthen transposing the distances as found to another drawing rather than\\nhaving all this done for him. The idea is that the more he practices the\\nmore proficient he becomes, and as a consequence the more pains he takes\\nthe more accurate the results will be in this branch of his work. I have\\nonly deemed it necessary to give a few general dimensions of the entire\\ncornice, and also the profile of each of the various sections of the cornice\\nmoldings; these are all drawn to the scale of 1 to the foot, and are all\\nshown in Fig. 93. I may here remark that in actual practice, or in every-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0099.jp2"}, "100": {"fulltext": "90\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nday work, it is important that when an architect submits plans and draw,\\nings for work they are, as a general rule, marked with full-size dimensions\\nin plain figures. It is easily seen how important this is that they are so\\nmarked. I will say, for instance, if a drawing is drawn to a scale of to\\nthe foot, the student must remember that when he lays his rule or scale on\\nthe drawing that each one-eighth of an inch on his rule represents one foot\\nof the actual size of the object which the drawing presents. It is thus an\\neasy matter to make mistakes, even the width of a line on the drawing being\\nwider than one-twelftli of one-eighth of an inch on a rule or scale is, hence\\nthe importance and necessity that the drawings be marked with full-size\\ndimensions. This is a point that must be looked after, and ought to be in\u00c2\u00ac\\nsisted on by the cornice*man that the architect attends to it that the draw\u00c2\u00ac\\nings are so marked. This will avoid all confusion and greatly facilitate the\\nready measuring, figuring and getting out of the work in every detail; in\\nfact, will leave no excuse for blunders and give satisfaction to every one,\\nconcerned. I will now show how to measure up this design. The first\\nsections will be the hor zontal cornice parks which I will take under con\u00c2\u00ac\\nsideration. No. 5 of Fig. 93 shows the profile for these parts. The stretch\u00c2\u00ac\\nout of this profile measures from the foot molding at the extreme end from\\nA to the crown molding at A 33 This gives the amount of surface for\\nthe sections A and B of Fig. 89 from top to the bottom of each, or the\\nvertical stretch-out of the same. The horizontal stretch-out of section A is\\n11 6 for section B it is 2 3 This gives 11 6 -f2 3 13 9 x33 =37\\nsq. ft. and 117 sq. in., or say 38 sq. ft. The two sections, which are at right\\nangles to A and B, are also horizontal moldings. The profiles of the same\\nare shown by 6 of Fig. 93. The stretch-out of each of these parts is from\\nthe extreme end at the bottom to the top 28 The length of each section\\nhorizontally is 2 This makes the surface for these sections 2 _|_2 n=4 x28\\n=9 sq. ft. and 48 sq. in., or in the rough 9i sq. ft. of iron. The stretch-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0100.jp2"}, "101": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n91\\nout of the gable moldings measures 26 for each side; the extreme length\\nof each side is 11 This makes the amount of iron for both moldings\\n11 x2=22 x26 =47 sq. ft. and 96 sq. in., or 47J sq. ft. for this part.\\nThe profile No. 7 is the one for the gable section; No. 4 is the profile of\\nthe crest or deck molding; both of these profiles are shown in Fig. 93.\\nThe stretch-out of the deck molding measures 13 and the length of\\nthis molding is 26 3 This multiplied by 13 makes 28 sq. ft. and 63\\nsq. in. or in the rough, 28J- sq. ft. of iron. The quantity of iron\\nthat it will take for the copings at each end of the main wall of the man\u00c2\u00ac\\nsard roof is 25 wide and 7 long for each, making 14 x 25 29 sq. ft.\\nand 24 sq. in. for these two pieces, or say 29^ sq. ft. of iron all\\ntogether. The quantity of iron for the head-blocks is 5 sq. ft. for the\\nsquare part of each one and 3 sq. ft. for the pendant moldings of each\\nblock, and also one square foot for the circular support of each ball on each\\nblock or truss. This makes the total for both head-blocks 18 sq. ft. of\\niron. The cresting, as shown, is to be 1 square, making the stretch out\\n4 by 26 and one foot for each post, making 17 ft. more. This makes the\\nquantity of material in this part of the work 26 4- 17 43 -f- 4 14J-\\nsq. ft. To measure the dormer window, take all the flat surfaces first; aver\u00c2\u00ac\\nage the front 4 wide and 5 6 wide, making 4 x 5 6 22 sq. ft. of\\niron. For the sides, measure the flat part immediately under the horizon\u00c2\u00ac\\ntal cornice, which is 2 then down to the lowest point of the side of the\\ndormer, which is 4 Now, as each side has but half of this surface, the\\nfigures as given answer for the full amount of surface contained in both of\\nthe sides, or, in other words, as the sides are each in the shape of a tri-\\nangle, and as they are both of the same area, they may both be figured,\\nafter being added together, as a square, or, to be more precise, as a\\nparallelogram or as a rectangle, hence 2 x 4 8 sq. ft. is the amount\\nof the area of the surface of both sides of the dormer window. The pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nfiles 1 and 2 of Fig. 93, give the stretch-out for the moldings for this\\nwindow, which averaged measures 12 as the mean for both shapes. The\\nlength of the entire moldings for this dormer is 12 long, making the total\\namount of surface of the same 12 sq. ft.\\nThe ridge coping of the dormer window has a surface of 2 X 3 6\\n7 sq. ft. area. The coping or ridge cresting of the gable has a surface\\nof 2 6 X 4 10 sq. ft. area, making for both 7 -f 10 17 sq. ft.\\nsurface or area. The two finiah on both gables will require 14J sq. ft. of\\niron; for the larger one, it will take 10 sq. ft. and for the smaller one, it\\nwill take 4^ sq. ft. To find the area contained in the surface of\\neach one of the turrets or ornamental pillars which are located at the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0101.jp2"}, "102": {"fulltext": "92\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nbase of the gable the following method may be used, if the entire members\\nare to be made out of the flat, excepting the ball ornaments, which are on\\nthe top of each; these can be made of stamped or spun zinc. The column\\nmeasures 2 6 in height and has a diameter of 10 thus 2 7f x 2 6\\n6 sq. ft. and 58^ sq. ins. or say 6J- sq. ft. each; for both, this would be\\n13 sq. ft. The amount of material required to make the curved parts of\\nthis ornamental member from, may be figured in the following manner.\\nTake the largest member or the one which has the greatest diameter, which\\nis 16 the circumference of the same will be 4 2J Next measure up the\\nprofile of the parts, 3J for both the top ornamental part and also for the\\npendant part below the base of the column, hence H x 2 T x 4 21\\n29 gq. ft. and about 25 sq. ins. This will give ample material from\\nwhich to cut all the curves and pieces required for both top and bottom\\nparts for the two ornaments as the design Fig. 89 shows. It will also be\\nnoticed that at each side of the building, immediately under the head-blocks,\\nis shown a piece of iron about 1 foot square, as the Figs. 89 and 90 show\\nat that place. Allow 2 sq. ft. for these. Also allow about 10 sq. ft. of\\niron for waste in cutting, etc.\\nThe following list will show the result of the foregoing at a glance\\ngiving the entire amount of material or iron required for the cornice as\\nshown by the design, Fig. 89:\\nFor\\nSections A and B, 38 sq. ft.\\nFor Ridge Crestings,\\n17 sq. ft.\\nC D,\\n9J\\nFinials,\\n1U\\nGable Cornice,\\n47f\\nTurrets,\\n42\\nDeck\\n281\\nUnder-blocks,\\n2\\na\\nCapings,\\n29i\\nWaste,\\n10\\ntt\\nHead-blocks,\\n18\\nit\\nCrestings,\\n141\\nTotal,\\n313 sq, ft\\ntt\\nDormer window,\\n42", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0102.jp2"}, "103": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n93\\nThe foregoing estimate will be found nearly correct enough to give a\\nsafe margin to figure the weight of the iron required for this job. One\\npoint to be borne in mind when figuring and measuring up woik is to be\\nsure and figure enough iron to allow sufficient latitude for waste in the cut\u00c2\u00ac\\nting. Those who care to figure more closely are referred to the methods as\\ngiven for this branch in the article YI. The following are the general\\ndimensions for this cornice: The extreme length horizontally for the center\\nis 28 2 the height of the main cornice is 17J the projection is 9\\nand the right-angle horizontal parts from the main cornice are 7J The\\nheight of the deck cornice is 9 and its projection is 9 also. The width\\nof the two end copings is 12 on the front exposure.\\nThe dormer window measures from its base line to the extreme top\u00c2\u00ac\\nmost part of its finial 8 8 its average width is 4^ and the gable of the\\nsame projects out from the roof 4 The main gable projects out from the\\nroof 6 The distance across the base from the two turrets is 14 and\\nthe perpendicular height from a horizontal line level with the lowest line of\\nthe horizontal cornice to the highest point of the gable cornice is 9 6\\nThe height of the main finial is 5 from the gable to its top ornament.\\nThe length of the ornamental turrets and pillars is 7 and their average\\ndiameter is 13 The height of the cresting on the deck cornice is 12\\nand the entire cresting is to be made of 1 square pieces. The height of\\nthe finial on the dormer window is 2 5 from the top of the gable and is\\non an average 3\u00c2\u00b1 thick through the main body of the lowest part. The\\nornaments on the front of the dormer window may be either hammered to\\nshape or they may be of stamped zinc or iron. The truss or head-blocks,\\nit will be noticed, are to have a raised panel on the front while the sides\\nneed merely have the outlines of the figure show as the designs of the end\\nelevations give of all these details. Drawings will be given showing the\\ndetails drawn to the scale of 1 to the foot.\\nThe followiug is the list of all the circular ornaments for the entire\\ncornice. Some of these are complete spheres, while some are but half-balls\\nor hemispheres. These may be of spun zinc.\\nFor the main and the gable cornice there will be required fifty 2\\nhemispheres.\\nFor the dormer window twenty-four 1J and four 2 hemispheres will\\nalso be required, one 2 and one 1J sphere for the finial on the same.\\nFor the finial on the main gab\u00e2\u0080\u0099e there will be required two 1J\\nthree 2 and one 3 hemispheres.\\nIn addition for this finial there will be required one 4 one 2J and\\none 1J spheres.\\nFor the turrets twenty-five 1\u00c2\u00a3 hemispheres, and also two 6 and two", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0103.jp2"}, "104": {"fulltext": "94\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n4 spheres are necessary; sixteen 2 spheres will be required for the up\u00c2\u00ac\\nright posts of the cresting.\\nThe head-blocks require two 7 spheres and also four li hemi\u00c2\u00ac\\nspheres, and the deck cornice will want thirty-two of the same size to com\u00c2\u00ac\\nplete it.\\nThe ridge-cresting of the dormer window requires three 3 spheres,\\nand the ridge-cresting of the gable requires the same number of 4 spheres.\\nThe following gives the complete list of all the different sizes of both\\nthe half-balls or hemispheres, and also of the whole balls or spheres. These\\nare as follows:\\n87 14 Hemispheres. 1 2J Spheres.\\n57 2\\n1 3\\n2 1\u00c2\u00a3 Spheres.\\n17 2\\n2r\\n3 3\\n6 4\\n2 6\\n2 7\\na\\nu\\nff\\nIn order to get all the other material that enters into the make-up of\\nthis cornice the items rivets, braces, solder, etc., must be figured under this\\nhead. Methods to accomplish this in the most expeditious manner are\\nfully given in the articles VI and VII; the e chapters also give the most\\napproved manner and the time it ought to take to get out and completely\\nfinish a cornice according to the best practice in the trade at the present\\nday. It is also to be noted that a strip of tin or iron 20 wide is to be put\\non the edge of the deck, covering the same 18 back and lapping over and\\ndown 2 This strip will be the entire length across the front, that is, 28\\nlong. If this strip is to be of tin, it must be entered under that head in\\nthe cost, but if of iron, the same must be added to the total surface of the\\nquantity as found for the cornice. Upon this strip the head-blocks and also\\nthe cresting which is shown above, the deck cornice is fastened. Another\\nitem that is to be figured at this stage are the valleys; these are to be of tin\\nfor the gable and also for the dormer window. The gable valleys are to be\\n20 wide and for the dormer 14 The method most used to ascertain the\\nlengths or valleys as these are situated is as follows: Take the distance\\nfrom. A to B of Fig. 92, which is the plan; transpo.-e this to the line A to B\\nof Fig. 94. The length of this line as found is the base line, which in this\\ncase is S long. Then from one of the side elevations ascertain the vertical\\nheight of the gable as from S to S of Fig. 91. Erect a perpendicular line\\nof the length as found from S to S of Fig. 91, and from B of Fig. 94 to\\nD of the same figure, which gives the altitude. Connect the points D and\\nA by a line, and the length that this last line ha i is the actual length of the\\nrequired valley for one side of the gable. The last line so drawn is the\\nhypothenuse. The height of the altitude in this case being 8 makes the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0104.jp2"}, "105": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n95\\nlength of the liypothenuse or the actual length of the valley in this case 11\\nV The foregoing is merely an actual demonstration of a very simple geo\u00c2\u00ac\\nmetrical rule covering problems of this class. The rule is as follows: Add\\nthe square of the base to the square of the altitude and the square root of\\nthe sum is the liypothenuse, as 8 2 x8 2 v /128=ll 7 the result as found\\nfor one side. To this must be added the quantity of material it will take\\nto lap the ends over each other at the top ridge where the tin lays on tha\\nmansard roof. I will say that 12 allowed for each side will be the re\u00c2\u00ac\\nquired length for the two sides. This will be 24 feet of valley for the gable.\\nThe quantity required for the dormer is found in a precisely similar way\\nas has been given for the gable valleys, with the. difference, of course, that\\nthe lengths are different, and that the valleys do not run down as far on\\nthese as they do on the sides of the main gable. I have given the distances\\nfor the dormer valleys in Fig. 94 from B to F for the base and from B to E\\nfor the perpendicular or the altitude; from E to F gives the length of the\\nvalleys as demanded by the plan, Fig. 92. In the foregoing I have given\\nthe complete and necessary steps to measure up the cornice under consider\u00c2\u00ac\\nation. The methods used to accomplish the same result in regard to what\\nhas to be done for the roofing or for the slating, I will give further on.\\nTo ascertain how much the iron as found weighs, refer to the table of\\nweights as given in article VII. If the cornice is to be made of 26 gauge\\niron refer to the gauge number 26 of the table; directly underneath this will\\nbe found the weight of this gauge of iron in ounces per square foot, which\\nis 15 ounces.\\nThe total quantity as found for the square feet of iron in the cornice\\nis 841! sq. ft.; 341! S( l- x 15 5 119 ozs 16 320 lbs nearly.\\nTo this is to be added the strip 20 wide and 28 long, which goes on\\nthe space on the deck immediately behind the deck or cresting cornice, that\\nis, if galvanized iron is to be used for it. In case iron should be used the\\ntotal amount will be as follows: 28 x 12 336 x 20 6720 144=\\n46 I\u00c2\u00ae\u00c2\u00ae sq. ft., or nearly 47 sq. ft. X 15 ozs. 705 oz. -f- 16 44 lbs. -f 320\\nlbs.= 364 lbs. This will be the total weight of all the iron required for\\nthe entire job. The table further gives all the data for the cost of the iron,\\nas will be readily seen by reference. The tin for the gutters must also be\\nfigured in this estimate. They are to be made of 20 wide tin, and the\\ntotal length required will be 20 The tin is to be painted on both sides,\\nand to be put into the wood through which the carpenter will build and\\nmake ready for the workmen doing the putting in of the gutters. A3\\nsquare leader is to convey the water down the building. The conducting\\nleader is to be provided with a suitable filter, and cutting off two feet up\\nfrom the surface level of the ground.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0105.jp2"}, "106": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n96\\nIn the foregoing is presented all that is needed to give the student a\\ngood idea of the different items which he has to figure, measure up and\\nestimate on when a job as the designs\u00e2\u0080\u0094as presented by the Figs. 89 to\\n94\u00e2\u0080\u0094is under consideration.\\nIn the following are some of the parts of this cornice drawn to a larger\\nscale; I will term them detail or working drawings. Although the space\\ndoes not permit to give full size drawings for these details, the scale that\\nthey are enlarged to will give the student sufficiently large enough draw\u00c2\u00ac\\nings so that he can very readily understand them, and use them to practice\\nfrom. Besides this, if he would practice and make the drawings to a dif\u00c2\u00ac\\nferent scale from that given, the benefit derived from such a course will\\ngreatly help to make him familiar with the different scales, and will tend\\nto make him proficient and accurate in his future work.\\nThe first design shown, which has been enlarged from to the scale", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0106.jp2"}, "107": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n97\\nof 1 to the foot, is one of the trusses or head-blocks of the deck cornice. The\\nFigs. 95 and 96 present two views of these. The part A of Fig. 95 shows\\nthe front view of one of the trusses. This view gives all the details of\\nthis block seen from this point of view. It gives the proper relative posi\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion of all the curves and moldings in both the pendant part of the truss\\nand of the deck cornice, the relative position of the hemispheres, which\\nare soldered to the receding curves of the moldings, also the position of\\nthe 1 square pieced cresting and the upright posts for it. The paneled\\nprojections are shown at the bottom end, both for the block and for the\\nwall coping. Part B shows the apex of the gable and the section of the\\nridge cresting or coping, as it appears from this front view, giving a full", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0107.jp2"}, "108": {"fulltext": "93\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nFig. 93, at No. 3. No. 4 is the profile of the deck cornice and is shown in\\noutline by the dotted line in Fig. 96. The head block is shown in the\\nproper relative position that it occupies on the deck; the position of the\\ncresting is shown by the dotted lines through the head-blocks..\\nThis figure also presents the projection of the panel on the coping,\\ngiving its shape and the data of its proper location. A side view of the\\nprofile for the stretch-out, as demanded for it by the front elevation in Fig.\\n89. Fig. 96 gives the side view of Fig. 95, showing the profile of the truss\\nmolding and the paneled projection in front of the head-block. The pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nfile as shown by No. 3, corresponds to that of the profile as shown by\\nQ", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0108.jp2"}, "109": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n99\\nridge coping is also given in this figure, this coping being the crest of the\\nmain gable. The two views, Figs. 95 and 96, also give all the data for the\\ntop part of the head-blocks and show how the balls are situated on their\\nsupports. The drawings show the top slightly raised with flanges soldered\\nto them. This can be seen on the under side of the ball. The position of\\nthe hemispheres, which are used on the trusses and on the deck cornice,\\nare also shown.\\nFigs. 97 and 98 are drawn to the scale of J to the foot and are the\\ndetail drawings of the finial on the main gable. The ornamental scale\\nFig.98.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0109.jp2"}, "110": {"fulltext": "100\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nwork is to be made of either iron or zinc, hammered or stamped to the\\nshape as the design demands. The positions and the outward projection\\nof all the ornaments is clearly shown by the side view, Fig. 98. The rod\\nhas three sections divided and fastened together by the balls as shown\\nin the figures.\\nThe arrow vane is to be made so that it turns freely, in order that it\\nmay indicate at all times from which direction the wind blows. In Fig.\\n98 is illustrated the shape that the ridge coping has where it joins the linial\\nand at the same time where and how it braces the latter. The details of\\nthe spear-head and cf the feather end of the vane are all plainly presented\\nin the drawings.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0110.jp2"}, "111": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n102\\nv\\nFig.101\\nFront Elevation\\n1 to the Foot", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0111.jp2"}, "112": {"fulltext": "102\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nThe detail drawings of the dormer window are seen in Figs. 99 and\\n100. These are drawn to the scale of to the foot. Fig. 99 gives\\none-half of the entire front view of this window. All the ornamental\\nscrolls on this front may be either stamped or hammered to shape by hand\\nwork. The front view of the finial and a section of the ridge coping is\\nshown. Down the outer edge a half-inch projection is to be made, and at\\nthe lower scroll the center is to be cut as the projection on Fig. 100 indi\u00c2\u00ac\\ncates, so that it can be formed into the shape as the figure demands. The\\nfront being given by this view, Fig. 99, for the shape of the frame for the\\nwindow, refer to Fig. 100 for the profile as at A or B. Fig. 99 gives the\\nprofile of the cornice for this window. At 1 is shown the gable cornice\\nand at 2 the profile of the horizontal part. These two profiles correspond\\nwith those of the numbers 1 and 2 as in Fig. 93. Fig. 99 gives the actual\\nlength of the gable cornice, while the side view, Fig. 100, gives the length\\nback for that part. The sheathing or covering of the sides is to be carried\\nstraight backward as the outline of the front indicates. The curved\\nwindow moldings are to be fitted to a frame which will be furnished by\\nthe carpenter. Fig. 100 presents to view the end wall coping at its lower\\nend showing where the panel terminates. The entire side view of the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0112.jp2"}, "113": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n103\\nridge coping or cresting for the dormer window is given, showing both\\nends, how connected and joined to the finial, etc. This view also gives the\\ndata for the dimensions of the finial from this point of view, while Fig. 99\\ngives it for the front.\\nFigs. 101 to 103 give all the details of the entire pillars or the orna\u00c2\u00ac\\nmental turrets, showing all the joints where the gable cornice miters on\\nthe round and curved parts of the pillar. Fig. 102 shows how the hori\u00c2\u00ac\\nzontal cornice miters on the same and also by the dotted profile of the\\ngable cornice where it has its position from this point of view. In Fig.\\n101 the position of the horizontal cornice is shown by the dotted outline,\\nNo. 6. It will be observed that the horizontal sections of the cornices are\\nof two different profiles, and that the gable cornice has a different profile\\nfrom either one of the two other cornices. The reason for this will be seen\\nby examining Fig. 103, which is the plan. This shows a different projec\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion for each one of the sections. It also gives the correct relative position\\nof each of the lines and moldings of the three sections, placed in such\\nshape that all the data for the laying out of the patterns for the miters of\\nthese shapes can be obtained for this view from it. This view, at the\\nsame time, gives the correct position for all the curved parts of the pillar,\\nas far as is consistent, so that they can be used in laying out the\\nvarious patterns further on.\\nThe profile of the gable section is shown by No. 7, cut at right-angles to\\nthe same. The profile X shows how this section appears to the eye looking up", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0113.jp2"}, "114": {"fulltext": "104\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nat it when the cornice is in position. This point, it will be noticed, is one\\nof importance in designing a structure of this class. The section of the\\nmain cornice, of which No. 5 is the profile, it will be seen, has a greater\\nheight than the gable cornice has, but when the two sections are in posi\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion on the building, the gable cornice will appear to be the larger or\\nwider section of the two, and yet is really the smaller one. This seeming\\ndifference is caused by the oblique position in which the gable section is\\nplaced from the horizontal, thus exposing more of the surface of these\\nsections vertically to the view than of the horizontal cornice. This, as a\\nnatural result, makes the gable cornice appear larger to the eye than the\\nother sections. The ability and judgment of proportion required to make\\nevery part of a design harmonize, so that the effect as a whole is pleasing*\\nand that every member of a cornice appears just right in a design, are\\nfaculties very desirable for every cornice designer and cutter to possess. I\\nwould recommend the student to cultivate and educate himself in this\\ndirection as much as he possibly can. The means to perfect himself in\\nthis branch of cornice work are ample almost everywhere. I would advise\\nthe learner to take a course of lessons in drawing, designing, etc., with\\nsome competent teacher in these branches, to begin with. Then the chief\\nmeans to make himself competent are his own willingness to study, his\\nperseverance and actual practical work in this branch, always striving to\\ncome as near to a perfect result as he can possibly attain. I hope that the\\nfew hints thus given may benefit the student and direct him into the\\ncourse of study which will enable him to add to his efficiency as a work\u00c2\u00ac\\nman. It remains with him to act upon them, so that he may reap the\\npractical benefits therefrom.\\nI will next describe the pillar of Fig. 101 in detail. The total length\\nfrom the top of the ball A to the bottom of the ball B is 6 4 The\\ndiameter of the ball A is 5 that of the ball B is 4 The width of the\\nwidest part of the fluted portion of the pendant is 14J as from C to D;\\nits vertical height is 11 from X to X The base from S to S is\\n12 and from S to S it is 9 across. The column is 9 in diameter and\\n2 7 high. The ornamental spiral ribs or flutes extend outward from the\\ncolunm J and are 1J wide. The widest part of the cap from 3 to 4 is\\n16 the distance from 1 to 2 is 10J from 5 to 6 is 12 from 7 to\\n8 is 16 and from 9 to 10 is 17 From 9 to A is 7 from A to B 4\\nand from B to 10 6 The foregoing figures give enough data to enable\\nthe student to draw the entire figure to any scale he desires. Fig. 101 shows\\nthe front view of the bottom end of the panel projection of the end wall\\ncoping for the left-hand end of the building. The various profiles as\\nshown in this figure correspond exactly with those in Fig. 93. The posi-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0114.jp2"}, "115": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n105\\ntion of each line of half-balls or hemispheres is also shown by Figs. 101\\nand 102. This completes the necessary preliminary data to enable th-i\\nstudent to get all the required measurements to lay out all the pitteras\\nfor each member of the different sections in this cornice, as given by Fig.\\n89. In this article I have also shown how to measure up and figure toe\\nweight, etc., of all the iron needed to complete this cornice. Toe next\\nitem to treat on in connection with this job will be the covering of the\\nfront roof, embracing the mansard, gable and dormer window.\\nXX.\\nDHTAIlkS OF SLATING AfiD SLATERS\u00e2\u0080\u0099 TOOLS.\\nThe first step to be taken in figuring up the quantity of slate it will\\ntake to slate or cover a roof, is to ascertain the amount of surface of the\\nroof that is to be covered. Then the style, size of slate to be used, how\\nmuch of the slate is to lap or cover and also how much of the slate is to\\nshow to the weather. Then the quality and color is to be figured on\\nwhich is to be used for any given job. The roof as submitted in the article\\nXIX, Figs. 89 and 92, may be measured up by the following method.\\nMeasure from the hip of the gable to the point X as Fig. 89 shows; this\\ndistance measures 7 Then add to this the distance from point X to the\\nleft end wall of the building which is 18 Then from point X which is\\nthe same distance away from the gable as the point X, measure the distance\\nfrom it to the right end wall of the front. This distmce is 10 6 add\\nthe distances as found together, which make 19 2 Multiply this by the\\ndistance from point 1 to 2 of Fig. 90, which is 9 Thus we hive 19 2\\nX 9 172J sq. ft. for this part of the roof. For the gable, measure\\nfrom point X to X of Fig. 90, which is 4 3 multiply this by the dis\u00c2\u00ac\\ntance from the top of the ridge of the gable to the gutter line, which is\\n11 as the front elevation, Fig. 89, shows. These 4 3 X 11 46| sq\\nft. Add to this the surface from point X of Fig. 90, to the front end of\\nthe gable, which is 2 6 X by 11 27^ add to this the same amount\\nfor the other side of the gable, which makes this result 55 sq. ft; then\\nadd the 46f sq. ft. as found for the surfaces for both sides from the point\\nX to X which makes 1011 sq. ft., which is the roof surface of the entire\\ngable.\\nFor the surface of the dormer window roof, multiply the distance\\nfrom point 1 to 2 of Fig. 90 by the distance from point 1 to 2 of Fig. 89.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0115.jp2"}, "116": {"fulltext": "106\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nThe distance in Fig. 90 is 1 6 and in Fig. 89 it is 3 6 Thus we have\\nV 6 X 3 6 sq. ft. Add to this twice the amount of the area\\ncontained between points 1, X and the outer edge of the gable of the\\ndormer window. This is 2 6 for the distance from point 1 to the front\\nedge of the roof multiplied by the slant height of the same, a3 2 6 X 3\\n6 8| sq. ft. X 2 17^ sq. ft. 4* 5J sq. ft. 22J sq. ft. of actual\\nsurface on this dormer roof. The amount of area found for the entire\\nsquare, but less than. 8 feet square. We deduct one-half of the area as\\nfound for the dormer from the whole total of the entire result as found,\\nthis is, 359 sq. ft. 4 sq. in. 9 sq. ft. 350 sq. ft. 3J squares as the\\nactual total of slate roofing to be figured for the roofs as given in Fig. 89.\\nFor convenience sake, we will drop the extra 4 sq. inches out of this calcula\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion. The next step will be to get the quantity of slate required to cover\\nthis surface. In general work the sizes most used are 8 x 16 and 10\\nX 18 The size or nails used are generally 1J either galvanized,\\ntinned or wire.\\nsurfaces so far, are for the main roof 172J sq. ft., gable roof 101\u00c2\u00a7 sq. ft.,\\ndormer roof 22| sq. ft., making a total of 297 sq. ft. nearly. It is a\\nstandard rule among slate rooters, architects, contractors and builders\\nin general, to figure for roofs with hips, gables and dormers, the valleys\\nfor their entire length as one foot more surface as long as the section is\\nthat adjoins the valley. Each valley has, as a matter of course, two\\nsections of roof adjoining* so that the entire length of the vaUey is\\nfigured double. To illustrate this rule in this case, we have 23 2 of\\nvalley on the main gable roof and 8 of the valley on the dormer roof.\\nBoth added together mike 31 2 X 2 =^62 sq. ft. and 4 sq. in., this\\nresult must now be added to the total of the roof surface as found. This\\noperation is 297 sq. ft. 4- 62 sq. ft. 4 sq. in. 359 sq. ft. and 4 sq. in. The\\nforegoing rule and the extra allowance that it gives, is to compensate for\\nthe extra waste and labor in fitting, cutting and laying these parts as des-\\nscribed. It is also customary to make no reduction in figuring the quantity\\nof slate for a roof, for the openings for chimneys, dormer windows, sky\\nlights, scuttle holes, etc., unless they are larger than four feet square. In\\ncase they are more than four feet square and less than eight feet, allow one-\\nhalf. If larger than ten feet square, deduct the whole surface as found for\\nthem, that they occupy of the surface of the roof. All extra cutting, miter\u00c2\u00ac\\ning and fitting is to be charged for as extra. It is understood that the builder\\nis to furnish all extra wood-work and cant strips required. In accordance\\nwith the foregoing rules, the dormer window as f^hown by Fig. 89 takes\\nup only 18 sq. ft. of the roof area, this being 2 sq. ft. more than 4 feet", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0116.jp2"}, "117": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n107\\nThe next item would be, what amount of nails will be required to\\nproperly lay this amount of slate? This will depend upon the kind of nails\\nused for the purpose. Galvanized iron nails are the heaviest, next in weight\\naie tin nails, while wire nails are the lightest, and for a given amount of\\nslate, the lightest amount in weight will b3 required.\\nThe following table gives all the particulars needed for this item fig\u00c2\u00ac\\nured in pounds. In this table an ample margin is left for waste, loss, etc.\\nWEIGHT OF NAILS REQUIRED TO LAY A SQUARE OF SLATE.\\nSizes of Slat e\\nin Inches.\\n3ds. in pound-.\\n4ds. in pounds.\\nGalv\u00e2\u0080\u0099d.\\nTinned.\\nWire.\\nGalv\u00e2\u0080\u0099d.\\nTinned.\\nWire.\\n12X12\\n4\\n3\\n2K\\n4K\\n3\\n2K\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\n12X 6\\n6\\n5\\n4K\\n7\\n6\\n5\\n14X12\\n2K\\n2\\n2\\n3\\n3\\n2\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\n14X7\\n4K\\n4\\n3K\\n5K\\n4M\\n2M\\n16X12\\n2%\\n2\\n2M\\n2\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\n16X 8\\nCO\\n2\\n3 K\\n3M\\n3K\\n18X12\\nm\\nIK\\nIK\\niK\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\n18x 9\\n2K\\nIK\\n3 K\\n2K\\n20X14\\nIK\\nIK\\nl\\nIK\\nIK\\nIK\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\n20X10\\nl 7 /s\\nIK\\nIK\\n2K\\n2\\nIK\\n22X14\\nIK\\nIK\\nl\\niK\\nIK\\niK\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\n22X11\\nIK\\nIK\\nIK\\n2\\nIK\\nIK\\n24X16\\n1\\nK\\nK\\nIK\\nl\\nK\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\nto\\n24X12\\nIK\\nIK\\n1\\nIK\\nIK\\nIK\\nThe third item to be considered is the roofing felt or paper to be used\\nunder the slate. The material most used by roofers for this purpose is\\nwhat is called tarred board. It is usually sold by the roll and the different\\nthicknesses are designated by the numbers 1, 2 and 3. No. 2 weighs from\\nId to l-i lbs. per yard. A roll weighs 50 lbs. and comes in width from 80\\nto 32 wide. This paper board is made out of straw and is then saturated\\nwith tar. Roofing felt or a better quality of sheeting also used for this pur\u00c2\u00ac\\npose, is made from old rags, etc., and is in fact a felt, thoroughly saturated\\nwith tar; this weighs for No. 1. 2\u00c2\u00a3 lbs. per square yard; No. 2, If lbs. and", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0117.jp2"}, "118": {"fulltext": "108\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nNo. 3, 1 lbs. per square yard. Of the two kinds the tarred-roofing felt is\\nundoubtedly the better. The cost is somewhat higher than that of the\\ntarred paper board, although the latter is a somewhat stiffer material, and\\nregarded with favor by many roofers and slaters. I may also state that\\nsome roofing firms use even a lighter grade of tarred paper board than\\nNo. 2 in some cases.\\nThe following are general rules and data which will be useful to the\\nstudent:\\nA square of slate roofing is an area of 100 superficial feet of slating\\nwhen laid. By the term gauge is meant the distance between the courses\\nof the slate. By the lap or cover is meant the distance which each slate\\nover-laps the slate one below it. This lap varies f-om 2 to 4 The\\nstandard is 3 The margin is the width of the course exposed to the\\nweather; the pitch of a slate roof should be at least 1 in 4 for the best\\nresults.\\nTo compute the surface of a slate when laid and the number of\\nsquares of slating, subtract the lap from the length of the slate, which is\\n3 Half of the length remaining will give the surface exposed, which\\nwhen multiplied by the width of the slate, will give the surface required.\\nUse the surface thus found to divide the sum of square inches in a square\\nand the result is the number of slates required to make a square. (The\\nforegoing table has been figured by this rule).\\nExample: The size of a slate being 8 xl 6 lap 3 how many slate\\nare required for a square of slate when laid? 16 3 13 2 6.5\\nX 8 52 14,400 4 52 275.48 or as the table gives, 276 nearly\\nThe weight of slate varies from 2 to 4.53 lbs. per square foot and in\\nthickness from .125 to .3125 of an inch. The average weight of slate is\\nfrom 167 to 181 lbs. per cubic foot. It requires nearly 2 J sq. ft. of slate\\nto make one of slating. The principal slate quarries in this country are\\nlocated in Rutland Co., Vt.; Washington Co., N. Y.; Northampton, York\\nand Lehigh Cos., Pa.; some in Virginia; Monson, Me.; and in Baraga\\nCo., Mich.; and in different other localities to some extent. Most of our\\nred, green and purple slates are found in the quarries of New York and\\nVermont. The blue-black and black varieties are found in the other states\\nmentioned. The Lehigh and Bangor brands are from the quarries in\\nPennsylvania; of these brands the Bangor brand No. 1 seems to be the\\nfavorite with consumers. The celebrated Peach Bottom brand is also a\\nPennsylvania slate. This variety of slate is principally noted for tough\u00c2\u00ac\\nness, making it one of the best and most durable known for the purpose of\\nroofing. Of all the different varieties of slate, the clay slates stand at the\\nhead, both.in price and in general worth.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0118.jp2"}, "119": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n1(9\\nThe best kinds of slate to select for use are those that are easily split\\nand are of a compact grain. If hard they should not be too brittle, or it\\nsoft they must be tough and free from impurities, thus being non-absorb\u00c2\u00ac\\nent of water. The familiar experiment of setting the slate upright in a\\ndish of water and noting how far the water ascends by capillary attraction\\nin the substance of the slate, is still one of the best tests that can be made.\\nIn a good slate the water should rise only slightly above the surrounding\\nsurface. A slate which draws up the water to a considerable height should be\\navoided as likely to be destroyed by frosts and the disintegrating influences\\nof the air when exposed to the same. Some slates apparently hard and\\nnon-absorbent decompose on exposure to the air by chemical action. These\\nare best detected by placing samples in test tubes and covering them with\\na saturated aqueous solution of sulphurous acid. A bad slate will always\\nbegin in a few days to crumble away, while a good sample will resist the\\naction of the acid for weeks and even months.\\nGood slate also has the ability to withstand a considerable amount of\\nheat and this without crumbling or cracking. The average crushing re\u00c2\u00ac\\nsistance of first-class brands of slate is from 18,000 to 20,000 lbs. per\\nsquare inch. The foregoing qualities are in a measure the property of all\\nthe various firts-class slates, these varying from a dark, deep black to blue,\\nif uniform in shade, with a clear ring, they may be considered as unfading\\nand of good quality. The other shades, such as the sea-green or purple varie\u00c2\u00ac\\nties, are with some exceptions not so reliable as to their ability to retain\\ntheir original color. Of the red varieties, the medium grades are the most\\nreliable, being tough and the best to retain their original color. The de\u00c2\u00ac\\nfects inherent in some of the softer kinds of black slate, which appear on\\nroofs in the shape of spots or a white efflorescence after the slate has been\\nput on but a short time, and in some cases ruining the roofs, is principally\\ncaused by carbonaceous matter and disseminated sulphide of iron partly de\u00c2\u00ac\\ncomposed. Great care must be used in selecting slate of this grade. See\\nthat they are even in color and have a good ring to obtain the best results.\\nThe hardness or specific gravity, contrary to the usual belief, gives no\\nreliable indication of the quality of the slate. A better test consists of\\nstriking them together or tapping them with a hard substance. If they\\nring clearly under this treatment they are likely to be good, and a dull\\nsound or percussion usually shows a poor slate.\\nOf the different grades that slate is classified into, the No. 1 grade is\\nof course the best. This is the grade which is free from knots, of smooth,\\neven texture, of straight grain, and of a solid uniform color. The second\\ngrade in some cases is nearly up to the standard of good slate, but it will\\nbe noticed that they are mostly lacking in one or more of the points enum-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0119.jp2"}, "120": {"fulltext": "110\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nerated for the standard for No. 1. The third grade of slates is what is\\nknown in the trade as ribbon slate. This latter kind are slates that have\\nsometimes a band, varying from an almost inperceptible line to a band\\nfrom a half-inch wide to one or two inches wide, running through their\\nwidth or across their face. This kind of slate is very easily broken and I\\nmay add, a kind that cannot or should not be used if a good job of slatinglis\\nto be done.\\nAs a rule, all slates contain fine lines, running parallel with what may\\nbe termed planes of secondary stratification or crystallization. By holding a\\nroofing slate a little below the eye and inclined from it, these lines may be\\nseen. If they run parallel with the long side of the slate this is properly\\ncut, and, if of good quality, will keep its place on the roof. If the lines run\\nacross the slate, or at an angle with its sides, it is likely, whatever the\\nquality, to break across or lose a corner at the least provocation.\\nIt may be of interest to give the method of laying or slating a roof,\\nthat contractors of the cheap or lowest bidder class sometimes use\\nwlun they get a chance. A job of this kind is generally done in the follow\u00c2\u00ac\\ning manner: Strips from two to four inches wide are used and laid an equal\\nspace apart, as the strips are wide, or even further apart in some cases.\\nThese strips are nailed to the rafters with as few nails as possible, so that\\nthey will not slide or roll off the roof when the extra weight that the slate\\nimposes upon them to hold to the roof is placed upon them to hold there.\\nSome \u00e2\u0080\u009cJerry\u00e2\u0080\u009d contractors would even go as far as to put no paper on these\\nstrips under the slate at all if they dared. Then by using the cheapest\\ngrade of ribbon slate and as few nails as possible, they use no cement and\\nto cap the whole operation, have the cheapest grade of help with which to\\ndo the work. It is easily seen by this how parties of this stamp, by follow\u00c2\u00ac\\ning the methods described, are able to underbid and to the discredit of the\\ntrade in general, to often succeed in getting work when competing with\\nhonest firms who do good work and bid accordingly. In contrast to the\\nforegoing a first-class job, to be done well in every particular, requires that\\nthe quality of the slate is fully up to the required standard as indicated for\\ngoo t woik. In the stock selected, all inferior slates are thrown out, and when\\nor where cement is needed it should be used; the slate should be securely\\nand properly nailed with the proper lap and exposure for the best\\nresults. The sheathing should be of properly seasoned stuff, with no mora\\nsp ice than one inch between the boards and these securely nailed to the\\nrafters and covered with a good quality of roofing felt. On this the slates\\nmay be laid according to the size slates used as indicated in the foregoing\\nrules and directions. Then the workmen should be mechanics to the full\\nextent that the name implies\u00e2\u0080\u0094men who are able to set tfie slate in perfect", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0120.jp2"}, "121": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n111\\nline, and do their own laying out of their work from a set of plans, whether\\nof a plain or ornamental design. They should be able to do all the cutting\\nand trimming so that when the slate is laid it will present a smooth and\\nfinished appearance on the roof. In short, to do a first-class job of slating\\nrequires mechanics of a high order in this trade, men of good judgment,\\ncool heads and a high grade of skill. These are the desirable and the only\\ngrade of workmen who will do work as it should be done. The following\\nare a list of some of the tools used by slaters. One large and one small\\ntrowel, one leather belt with loops to attach or fasten tools to when at work\\nand a nail pouch fastened to it in such a way as to be handily got at to get\\nthe nails when required. A dressing stake as in Fig. 104, and a slater\u00e2\u0080\u0099s\\nknife as shown by Fig. 105. These two tools are used to trim, dress, and\\nby some slaters who have no slate-dressing machines in their shops or\\nyard, to make the nail holes through the slates, before they are taken to the\\njob where they are to be used on the roof. These tools are also used on\\nFig. 105\\njobs where there is any mitering, trimming, etc., to bo done. Fig. 106\\nshows the common roofing stake; this is a more handy and lighter tool\\nthan the dressing stake, Fig. 104, and which can be fastened in almost any\\nconvenient position on a roof. The slater\u00e2\u0080\u0099s hammer, as Fig. 107 shows, is\\nso well adapted to the various uses that it is put to, that there is probably\\nno better shape that could be devised, that would meet all the requirements", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0121.jp2"}, "122": {"fulltext": "112\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nmade of a first-class slateing tool of this kind, as the shape now in general\\nuse is as presented by Fig. 107. A hammer as illustrated in the figure,\\ncombines the following features in one tool. A slater\u00e2\u0080\u0099s knife, a claw to draw\\nnails, the flat-faced end to drive nails and the other end to punch nail holes\\nthrough the slates. The tool shown by Fig. 108 is called the ripper; it has\\na long thin blade with two notched flat hooks at its end, used for the pur\u00c2\u00ac\\npose of drawing out or cutting nails with which the slates are fastened to\\nthe sheathing, so that the slates can be drawn out from under those laid\\nover them, in case it is desired to replace a slate when broken or for any\\nother cause. This tool has its handle so arranged that it keeps the hand\\nfree from contact with the roof so that it may not be injured when using\\nthis tool. There are some slaters who use a more extensive kit than the\\ntools indicated. The above are those that can be bought from any slater\u00e2\u0080\u0099s\\nsupply house, and are made in a superior and better style than they could\\nbe made by any shops outside of the regular manufacturers. That is, these\\ntools can be bought cheaper from them than from any firm not regularly\\nengaged in manufacturing such tools could make one single tool of the\\nkinds that a slater uses to order. This fact alone is sufficient to show\\nwhy it is policy to buy them from the regular trade. Any other small\\ntools that a slater may want any blacksmith can make for him on short\\nnotice, and that in any shape that he fancies or wants them made.\\nRoofing cement can also be bought from supply houses anywhere. The\\ncement used is Portland, roofer\u00e2\u0080\u0099s putty and cement made from iron ore,\\noil, lead and cement. Many roofers have their own favorite cemenv for\\nthis purpose.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0122.jp2"}, "123": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n113\\nXXI.\\nDETAILS FOH VOHlTLOfiTKIi AflD HR^lfiO JAITBH\\nPATTE1RHS.\\nIn the chapters XIX and XX the preliminary details, outlines of the\\ndesigns, weights and all necessary data to estimate the total cost of a cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nnice and the slating as demanded by the designs shown by the Figs. 89 to\\n92, are given in full. Some of the more important parts of the cornice are\\ndrawn to a larger scale than what the full design as Fig. 89 gives. This\\nhas been done so as to enable the student to more readily understand how\\nto transpose drawings from one scale to another of a different scale of\\nmeasurement. How this is accomplished has been given fully in the\\npreceding chapters.\\nIn the following descriptions and methods which I will make use of to\\nlay out the various parts entering into the make-up of this design, I will\\nmake frequent and numerous references to the drawings shown in the pre\u00c2\u00ac\\nceding chapters, particularly those which have been enlarged to the scale\\nof one inch to the foot, from the original elevations as shown by Figs. 89\\nto 92..\\nThe first detail of the entire structure, which I will treat on in full,\\nwill be the section of the horizontal cornice designated by the letter B of\\nFig. 89, and the adjoining section C, as shown by the Fig. 90. These\\ntwo sections B and 0 form a right-angle miter where they join to each\\nother, both being horizontal cornices, and each having the same height\\nvertically but differing from each other in their horizontal width as is\\nshown by the profiles 5 and 6 of Fig. 93. The section No. 5, when the\\nstretch-out of the same is shown fully developed, will also show the miter\\nline of the same as demanded by the junction of this section turned to the\\nright hand, as shown by the Fig. 90. The enlarged view of this section\\nis shown by the Fig. 102, which is 1 to the foot. In the development of the\\nvarious miters and stretch-outs I have made use of a still larger scale, namely,\\n2 to the foot. By using this larger scale a more convenient and plainer\\ndrawing is presented to the student than what the cramped and smaller\\nscale allows of, thus enabling one to make the different and numerous lines\\non the drawings in such a manner that they can be easily traced and\\nreadily understood by the student. I will assume that the general hints\\nand rules given in preceding papers on this branch of cornice work have\\nbeen read by the student and that he will avail himself of the information\\nand knowledge he has obtained therefrom to the fullest extent as far as it\\nis applicable to the problems presented by this cornice now under considera-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0123.jp2"}, "124": {"fulltext": "114\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ntion. In particular, I would advise him to adopt the shortest methods to\\naccomplish the end sought for, namely, the laying out of correct patterns\\nfor the different problems met with in the development of the various parts,\\nmiters and stretch-outs of this cornice.\\nSome of the most important considerations and items to be borne in\\nmind by the person arranging the different parts of this cornice are how\\nto cut the different parts out of the iron to the best advantage with the\\nleast possible waste, then in arranging the grouping or assembling of the\\nvarious parts of the cornice aim to have the work in such shape before it\\nleaves the shop that it can readily be transported to the building on to\\nwhich the work is to be placed, and finally that the operation of fastening\\nthe work permanently into position is simplified to the least possible\\ndegree. To illustrate this last point, the Fig. 101 furnishes a very apt\\nexample of where the generalship of a thorough mechanic in this branch\\nhas full scope to display itself, although the example in itself is not one of\\nthe most intricate which are often met with in cornice work, yet it will\\nserve the purpose to show where a very material saving of time and labor\\nmay be effected by adopting the right way to attain this result; namely,\\ninstead of arranging the details of these members in 3uch a shape that\\nthey would be intended to be put upon the building piece-meal or singly,\\nthe better method would be to make this entire section of the cornice as\\nshown by the drawing Fig. 101, solid or in one piece, embracing the mem\u00c2\u00ac\\nbers shown by profiles 5, 6 and a part of 7, all joined permanently to the\\nturret as the drawing shows, and when so done this much of the cornice\\ncould be put up on to the building in one piece and permanently fastened\\ninto its final position. As will be noticed, I have deemed this subject\\nworthy of a rather critical treatment. In addition I would urge the stu\u00c2\u00ac\\ndent to bear in mind that if it is desirable for him to attain the highest\\ngrade of efficiency in this branch, the hints given as to their general appli\u00c2\u00ac\\ncation in this class of work in the cornice trade must be applied and can\u00c2\u00ac\\nnot be ignored if the best results are aimed at.\\nThe first step in getting out these problems is fully set forth in the\\nfollowing: Draw the profile of number 5 to any convenient scale as shown\\nin Fig. 109. I have drawn these profiles to the convenient scale of 2 to\\nthe foot, the plan and elevations being drawn to only to the foot. I\\nregarded the latter scale as too small for the purpose of giving the full\\ndevelopment of these figures; for this reason I preferred the 2 scale which\\ngives the student a better chance to more readily understand the full\\ndevelopment of the problems which follow.\\nAs will be seen, the profile number 5 of Fig. 109 gives the full outline\\nof B of Fig. 89 and also corresponds to 5 of the Fig. 101. As this projeo-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0124.jp2"}, "125": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n115\\ntion is drawn to the correct width as demanded for the same by the plan\\nFigs. 92 and 103 in all its different curves and molds, this member will\\nserve as the guice and in a measure determines the outline of the member\\nnumber 6 of the horizontal cornice which miters onto it at right-angles, as\\nshown by the plans Fig. 92\\nand 103. The vertical height\\nand also the horizontal width\\nof both these members being\\nfixed, it remains only to obtain the true outline\\nof either profile, one taken from the other as\\nthe case may be, if one outline has been drawn,\\nthis being the case in this instance as the Fig\\n109 shows. For number 5 in this case the\\nmanner in which the entire operation is accom\u00c2\u00ac\\nplished is as follows, both to obtain the correct\\ncorresponding profiles and also the data for the\\nmiter line for both members, as demanded for\\nthis case. I may add at this instance that the\\nsame principles governing this case are also\\napplicable to most any problem where it is de\u00c2\u00ac\\nsirable to join moldings of different widths to\\ngether and their development in full.\\nFirst draw the line A to B, Fig. 109. The\\ndistance from point A to C in this case being\\nmade only the precise length demanded for the\\nmiter or width of section number 6; I leave it to\\nthe student to add whatever length is desired on any cornice he may employ\\nthis method for, my aim being merely to show how to develop the data for\\na miter-joint of this class, the line from 0 to point 2 being at right-angles\\nto line A to B-\u00e2\u0080\u0094as shown for the top of this section. The outline of the\\nprofile is shown from point 2 to 41; this completes the projection of section\\nnumber 5. Next draw the miter line S to A as shown. Draw line A to K\\nat right-angles to line A to B. Draw the line S to N as shown, the dis\u00c2\u00ac\\ntance from point A to N is the same as the extreme width of section 5\\nshows as a matterhf course. Now the lines from both the lines S to N", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0125.jp2"}, "126": {"fulltext": "116\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nand S to 0 downward have the same corresponding length to\\neach other as shown, but their positions are different on a horizontal\\nplane as shown where they cut the lines S to N and S to C. Or to\\ngive another description and a more graphic illustration of the true\\nrelation of these various lines to each other, I will put this problem\\nin this way: assume the rectangular space bounded by the points\\nS, N, A and C, which is cut by the line S to A, is one end of a block equal\\nin length or height as the distance is from line S to C to the line 38 and\\n39. Stand this block on one end, draw the projection as shown by 5 on one\\nof the widest vertical sides of this block, or suppose that the line S to C\\nhinged the tw* surfaces so that the side number could be dropped to a", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0126.jp2"}, "127": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n117\\nvertical plane against the side of this block. The outline of the profile as\\nshown may now be divided into any number of convenient parts, as has\\nbeen done in the drawing from 1 to 41; draw from the points as found or\\ndetermined by the division of the outline of the profile lines, cutting the\\nine S to C and ending at the miter line S to A. All these lines are\\nat right-angles to the line S to C, or, in other words, to the upper edge\\nof the rectangular block. Now if each of the dotted lines were marked on to\\nthe projection drawn on to the vertical side of the block and continued on\\nto the top end as shown, then if the block were cut into two parts verti\u00c2\u00ac\\ncally on the line S to A and also the outline of profile cut at right-angles to\\nthe side on which the same is marked on, an exact shape as it is desired\\nthe envelope for this section shall have would be the result. Then again\\nif the solid block as last described be cut through vertically on each dotted\\nline as shown for this section, where these lines of separation would occur\\non the line of the profile which shows on the face of the diagonal vertical\\nplane the point of intersection of the miter occurs for that plane both ver\u00c2\u00ac\\ntically and also the position of its extreme end on a horizontal plane. All\\nthe foregoing also applies to the narrowest projection of this block for the\\nsection number 6.\\nThe manner how to determine the correct relation and its shape so as\\nto correspond to the section number 5, is as follows: All the dotted lines\\nof section number 5 being carried to the miter line S to A from the point\\nof intersection of each and every line drop lines at right-angles as shown\\ncutting the line S to N of 6, and extending below this line precisely the same\\ndistance as the same corresponding line extends below the line S to 0 in sec\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion 5, where this termination of the lines occursfis the true position of the\\noutline for the profile of section 6 for that particular point as developed by\\nthe foregoing operation for each line. Through the points thus found draw\\nthe outline of the profile as found, whicn is shown so done in the drawing,\\neach point being numbered corresponding to the profile of section 5. The\\nposition of the lines as shown gives the positions of all the points in the pro\u00c2\u00ac\\njection 6, or, in other words, they give their location on the horizontal planes\\nof this profile.\\nThis much completes the description of the Fig. 109 and gives all the\\ndata for the development of the stretch-out of both sections, and also their\\nmiter lines where they join at line S to A. The Fig. 110 gives a still fur\u00c2\u00ac\\nther exposition of the various changes that occur when the outlines of pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nfile of the section number 5 is presented to the view at different angles from\\nthat of the end view of this section. Number 1 of Fig. 110 correspond to 5\\nof Fig. 109, and is so numbered in Fig. 110. The plan is also shown. Now", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0127.jp2"}, "128": {"fulltext": "118\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nlet it be assumed that the entire section 1-5 of Fig. 110 is swung around\\non a horizontal plane with line C S as center or pivotal line so that\\nthe line 0 to S would be at right-angles to the line S to C, as pre-\\nI\\nQ\\nX\\nr-\\nk\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\ni\\nt\\n5\\n6\\n7\\n8\\n9\\n10\\n11\\nia\\nId\\ntL\\n4\\nA\\n4\\n4\\n4\\n____\\nf\\nL.\\n1\\n1\\nr\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\n14\\no\\n15\\nu\\nir 3\\n16 O y-t\\nCh g\\n17\\nO\\n18 5\\no tr m\\n19\\n20 is\\ncn\\n4\\n4\\n22\\n28\\n\u00c2\u00a34\\nX\\nryy\\n9.ft\\n4*\\n4\\n4_\\n4\\n4\\nt\\n1\\n30 Scale, 2 to the f\\n31\\nm\\n)Ot.\\n1\\nl\\nX\\nh\\nf\\n4\\n3h -22\u00e2\u0080\u009c-\\n35\\n36\\n37\\n1\\nan\\nDO\\non\\nA 0\\ncL _\\nui\\nB J)\\nFig. Ill\\nsented in the plan view after this change has taken place. The miter Im5\\nin this new position, or rather the vertical plane of the same if viewed from\\nthe same point as the vertical plane of section 1\u00e2\u0080\u00945 is viewed from in the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0128.jp2"}, "129": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n119\\non a horizontal plane with line C S as center or pivotal line so that the\\nline C to S would be at right-angles to the line S to 0, as presented\\nin the plan view after this change has taken place. The miter line\\nin this new position, or rather the vertical plane of the same if viewed from\\nthe same point as the vertical plane of section 1-5 is viewed from in the\\ndrawing, will present the true outline of section 2-6 or 6 of Fig. 109.\\nIt will be seen in this view that none of the vertical lengths of any of the\\nproportions of this section are changed in the least, but that a corresponding\\nchange has taken place in the aspect of all the horizontal distances of this\\nfigure 2 6 from those of the outline of section 1-5. This much proves and\\nestablishes the correct outline of section 6 of Fig. 109, and gives the true\\noutline and length which the envelope or stretch-out of this section must\\nbe made. The true outline that the plane presents where the junction\\nor miter occurs between the two sections 5 and 6 of Fig. 109 has been de\u00c2\u00ac\\nducted from the foregoing and is fully shown by the outlines of number 3\\nof Fig. 110. The foregoing descriptions of these simple geometrical evolu\u00c2\u00ac\\ntions are imperatively necessary to be fully understood by the student as\\nthey are but simple step-stones to the more complex and difficult problems\\nto be mastered in the development of shapes further on. These principles\\nonce learned, a great stride has been accomplished by the student toward\\nthe rapid and easy solving of the most difficult problems. The next step\\nto be taken is to measure up the profile of section 5 of Fig. 109. This\\nmeasures from point 1 to 41, 30J Now instead of allowing 2 lap at the\\ntop of the crown of this section, allow only 1 This will allow of using\\n30 wide iron for these sections. This has been done in this case and is\\nan instance where the practical application of some of the hints given be\u00c2\u00ac\\nfore come into play in regard to the saving of material and of adapting the\\ndesign so that the least expensive size of material may be used to fulfill all\\nthe requirements as demanded by the design. Draw the line A to B of\\nFig. 111. Divide this into as many divisions as the profile of section 5 of\\nFig. 109 demands; make each point thus drawn to correspond precisely as\\nit is on the outline of section 5. The longest line to be drawn at right-\\nangles to line A B of Fig. Ill need be no longer than the distance from\\npoint A to 0 of section 5 of Fig. 109. Then the distance between the line\\nA B to line D E is 22 only, as demanded by the plan Fig. 103. As the\\nend of the section B of Fig. 89 shows a flat surface only, this is, as a mat\u00c2\u00ac\\nter of course, shown by a straight cut or line only on the stretch-out by\\nline D E. Next draw out all the lines for each point as marked on the\\nline A B of Fig. Ill from 1 to 41. The distances that these lines are\\napart from each other are, as a matter of course, determined by the dispo-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0129.jp2"}, "130": {"fulltext": "120\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nsition of the corresponding points as developed by the divisions on the pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nfile of section 5 of Fig. 109. The lengths that each and all the lines have\\nout from line A B of Fig. Ill are all correspondingly given for each and ev\u00c2\u00ac\\nery line in the space between the line S to O and the miter line S to A of Fig.\\n109, and are each transposed to the corresponding line of Fig. Ill, thus\\nFig 113\\nestablishing the true length of each in that figure, as for instance the line\\n14 of Fig. 109 has the same length in Fig. Ill, etc. After all the respec-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0130.jp2"}, "131": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n121", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0131.jp2"}, "132": {"fulltext": "122\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ntive distances are so transposed and established on these lines of Fig. Ill,\\ndraw a free-hand line through the points thus found, and the miter line\\nfor the junction of the section 5 of Fig. 109 with the section 6 of the same\\nfigure is done. This kind of miter is sometimes termed by cornice makers\\nan inside right-angle miter.\\nThe stretch-out of section 6, of Fig. 109, measures 26^- this can also\\nbe made out of the narrower material, namely, out of iron 26 in width.\\nDraw the line A to B of Fig. 112. Divide this line into an equal number\\nof parts as the line of the profile of section 6 of Fig. 109 shows, placed the\\nsame as they are shown by that figure as to their proper and relative posi\u00c2\u00ac\\ntions on line A B of Fig. 112. This has been done. Obtain the length for\\nall the lines from the space between the line S to N and the miter line S\\nto A of section 6 of Fig. 109. These distances transposed to their proper\\ncorresponding lines of Fig. 112 establishes the miter line for this section\\nto the section 5 of Fig. 109. Draw a free-hand line through these points\\nas found and the miter line is done, as shown by line X to X of Fig. 112.\\nThe next consideration that this section demands is the development ot\\nthe mitering or joining of the same with the turrets, as shown in Figs. 89,\\n90, 92 and 102. For this purpose draw a parallel line to line A B of Fig.\\n112 just 11 apart from the same; this last drawn line will cut this section\\nat right-angles and at the extreme point of where the circular turret cuts\\nthis section vertically. This line is shown in Fig. 112 by line C to D. I\\nhave qpt put this line in its strictly relative distance away from line A B,\\nbut instead have given the distance in figures as it should be in this case.\\nThis much is as far as the development for this section can be gone\\non with until the necessary drawings are first made showing the line of\\ncontact of the same with the turret. The Fig. 118 gives this point in full.\\nIn this figure is shown a complete outline of one of the turrets as far as\\nis necessary to show the position of the profile of section 6 of Fig. 109 and\\nalso the plan of the turret. It will be noticed that the spiral flutes are not\\nshown in the drawing at all. These we will leave out of consideration\\nat this stage altogether as they are intended to miter on to the face of the\\nmore important members of this section of the cornice and also to the tur\u00c2\u00ac\\nret. I will reserve them for a special treatment further on.\\nThe following are some of the main preliminary details of this draw\u00c2\u00ac\\ning, Fig. 118. The line A to B shows the wall line; to this is connected\\nthe line C of plan, showing the relative position of the turret to the two\\nfaces of the wall in the plan. From a to b shows the outline of the entire\\nprofile of the section 6 as it shows in elevation to the turret. This outline", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0132.jp2"}, "133": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n123\\nis divided into spaces, numbered as shown, and is correspondingly trans\u00c2\u00ac\\nposed to the stretch-out, Fig. 112. From the points or spaces that are\\nmarkod on the profile, dotted lines are carried to their respective relative\\npoints of contact with the turret as shown in the plan. The entire prob\u00c2\u00ac\\nlem to be solved may be stated as follows: The cornice is a horizontal\\nmolding, as the profile 6 of Fig. 109 shows, fixed in position against the\\nwall line A to B. This molding is cut by the circular turret vertically, the\\noutline of the turret being in outline partly straight and partly composed\\nof various curves and moldings as the outline of the base of the column in\\nFig. 113 shows. The horizontal section thus cut vertically by the turret\\njoins or has its line of contact with the turret at the greatest depth into\\nthe body of the moldings at the center line of the turret vertically, as shown\\nby line C D of Fig. 113, and as a consequence the horizontal section partly\\nmiters or joins on to the body of the circular shapes of the members of\\nthe turret, partly in front of the center line and out from the wall line\\nof the building, and also partly in the rear of the center line which, as a\\nmatter of course, places this part of the cornice closer to the wall and join\u00c2\u00ac\\ning or mitering to the receding part of the circular turret up to a point\\nwhere it joins on to the wall itself. It will be noticed that all the differ\u00c2\u00ac\\nent members of the entire design, Fig. 113, are placed in strictly correct re\u00c2\u00ac\\nlationship to each other,as the plans and elevations, as given before, demand.\\nThe operation of developing this problem is as follows: First draw the\\nwall line A to B; then the angle from line A to B to 0. Then draw the\\nelevation of the turret itself, placed in its correct position as is shewn in\\nFig. 118. Draw in elevation the outline of the profile of the section of the\\ncornice as demanded by 6 of Fig. 109. Some of the main outlines of the\\nprincipal moldings and turret may now be drawn in plan, as shown in\\ndrawing. After the foregoing has been done the real work begins of ob\u00c2\u00ac\\ntaining the data for the development of the stretch-out which miters on to\\nthe turret. The first step to be taken now is to divide the outline of the\\nprofile of the horizontal cornice into the most suitable number \u00e2\u0080\u0099of spaces,\\nwhich will do to lay out the desired stretch-out; this has been done, as the\\ndrawing fully shows for this case, numbered from a, 1 to 27, for the first\\nset of spaces, and from 1 to 11 and b for the second set. The stretch-out\\nis the same for this profile as it is for number 6 of Fig. 109, with the dif\u00c2\u00ac\\nference that the miter line that is to be developed has to conform to the\\ncircular shapes on this end instead of uniting to another molding as it does\\non its other end to the miter line of section 5 of Fig. 109. The line 0 to D\\nof the stretch-out, Fig. 112, is shown divided into the same number of\\nspaces as the profile demands and is also numbered to correspond with the\\nsame. It will be seen that the profile miters against the circular part from", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0133.jp2"}, "134": {"fulltext": "124\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n1 to the 28 only; the balance of the divisions miter against the circular\\nmoldings down to space number 8. From this point down the molding of\\nthe turret again assumes a vertical position as far down as the lowest break\\nor bend in the profile occurs for this section.\\nOn the upper part of the column of the turret is also shown how the\\nsection 6 appears after the same is fitted to the column, viewing the l?ne of\\ncontact from the left end of the building or the reverse side. In develop\u00c2\u00ac\\ning the parts that occur on the left-hand side of the gable cornice the same\\noperations as done for the right-hand end are used to develop the different\\nsections, only with the difference that they miter to the reverse from those\\nthat are shown by the Figs. Ill, 112 and 113, and will have to be done ac\u00c2\u00ac\\ncordingly when they are gotten out and at the same time they will have to\\nbe made to the lengths and measurements horizontally as their respective\\nplaces, into which they are to fit, demand for them to be. The actual\\nlengths for each space and line used to develop the stretch-out are found in\\nthe following manner. I will describe the entire operation to obtain the\\ndata for one line or point only, for as all the lengths of the remaining lines\\nare found in the same manner one description will answer for all.\\nIn this case, point number 1 of the profile has been selected. The\\ncircle numbered 1 is the plan for both the upper column and also for the\\npart marked number 8 or part of the outline of its base. As has been no\u00c2\u00ac\\nticed, the part of section 6 from point 1 to 23 miters on the column and as\\na consequence all the connecting dotted lines shown for these points in\\nFig. 113 end on the plan line of the same, thus establishing the actual\\nlengths for all these lines. The line X to X is drawn at right-angles to\\nthese lines, being the farthest point that the circular moldings of the turret\\ncut into the body of section 6, and as a consequence this line is shown on\\nthe stretch-out, Fig, 112, by line 0 to D, and is the line from which all the\\ndistances and points that make up the outline of the miter line for this part\\nare set out from to establish the correct relative position and lengths of\\neach and every line in this problem appertaining to the miter line of tho\\nstretch-out.\\nNow for the point 1 of profile: connect this point, as shown by the\\ndotted line, from point 1 to 1 of plan line; then the distance established\\non the line thus drawn between line X to X and the point V of plan line is\\nto be transposed to the line 1 of stretch-out, Fig. 112, using line 0 to D as\\nstarting point, and the miter line as drawn is the termination of its length.\\nThe foregoing gives every move that is needed to work out each of the fol\u00c2\u00ac\\nlowing lines of the section 6 from points a-1 to 23, as all the foregoing\\nmiter lines have their ends terminate at the vertical circular wall of the\\nturret, as shown by the circle 1 in the plan of the same in Fig. 118. It is", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0134.jp2"}, "135": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n125\\nunderstood, as a matter of course, that the measurements of the lengths of\\nthe different lines vary according to the planes and different positions that\\nthey are located in, horizontally and vertically, but at the same time all end\\nat the same plane line. This is all shown in the drawings. The points 24 and\\n25 are the two which recede the farthest into the body of the stretch-out, as\\nshown in Fig. 112. This is caused by reason of the part 2 of Fig. 113\\nprojecting out, and in the part of section 6, as a consequence, this is shown\\non line C to D of the stretch-out, corresponding to the distance shown at\\nline X to X of plan. The two points, 26 and 27, miter on circle 1 of plan\\nwhich is the same as number 3 of the outline of the base of turret to which\\nthese two lines join. The receding curve of the base is divided into as\\nmany corresponding planes as the profile of the cornice is divided into parts\\nfor the section from 1 to 11-b. This is shown by the line 1 to 8, and\\ncorresponding planes at right-angles to the same, cutting this part into\\nhorizontal planes.\\nThe plan shows these planes in outline numbered from 1 to 6, and\\nthe quarter circles as shown give them in detail for the points 6 to 11 and\\nb. All these points\u00e2\u0080\u0099 of contact are given in the drawing and transposed\\nin their respective correct positions on the stretch-out, Fig. 112.\\nIn all the foregoing deductions and operations made use of in the de\u00c2\u00ac\\nvelopment of this problem, the line X to X has been taken as the starting\\nline for all the measurements of all the lines and distances as drawn out\\nat full length on the stretch-out, Fig. 112. The circle A of plan has been\\ngiven to show the relative position of the furthest outside point that the pen\u00c2\u00ac\\ndant comes to when the same is in position and finished. The dotted line\\ninward from the outline of the receding curve of the base of the turret\\nshows the line of contact that the section 6 has with the same from a side\\nelevation, or a view at right-angles from that which it has as demanded for\\nthis case. This view also gives the distance that the stretch-out has to\\nproject forward from the plan X to X so as to come in contact with the re\u00c2\u00ac\\nceding curve of the base which it assumes at ea^h point where the fixed con\u00c2\u00ac\\ndition of the rigid moldings of the section 6 project so as to form this miter\\nor line of contact as demanded by the drawings of Fig. 118. Although the\\nentiie problem is shown in the fiat or on one plane, the operation is the\\nsame as if the plan were on horizontal and elevation on vertical planes,\\nthese situated at right-angles to the axis of the plan, parallel to the line\\nX to X\\\\\\nI would advise the student to give particular attention to the arrange\u00c2\u00ac\\nment and grouping of the different sets of lines to each other in this\\nproblem. He should not be satisfied until he has thoroughly comprehended\\neach step taken, and made the knowledge, how this problem is solved, his", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0135.jp2"}, "136": {"fulltext": "126\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nown. Then he will be prepared to solve the raking or gable cornice mi ter t\\nwhich joins the other side of the turret, with greater ease and a good deal\\nmore satisfaction than if the method used in this problem had not been\\nmastered before attempting to solve the more difficult problem which will\\nbe presented by the junction of the raking cornice with the turret further\\non. The foregoing also completes the entire stretch-out, with both miter\\nlines for the section No. 6, as demanded by the elevation C, of Fig. 89,\\nand also the opposite section D, at the other end, at the base of the gable\\ncornice connected with the turret at that end.\\nThe next section in order is the raking or gable cornice. The height\\nof this member, as deducted from the elevations, is 15J- and 8 wide at its\\nwidest part. The profile is drawn out in full in Fig. 114, and is divided into\\n37 parts as the drawings show. To obtain the data for a miter of this class,\\ndraw the angle that it is desired the rake should have, as has been done in\\nthis instance in the drawing Fig. 114. This completed, draw or project\\nlines parallel to the top or bottom lines of the profile, cutting the points as\\nfound for the proper division of the same, and extend these last drawn\\nlines until they intersect the miter line of the angle desired. This is shown\\nin this case by line A to B.\\nNext erect line C to B at right-angles to line 0 to A. From line C B\\nto the miter line gives the data for the correct lengths of all the lines used\\nin developing this problem. When drawing the lines that cut the different\\npoints in the profile, have a line cut at each place where a square bend or\\nbreak occurs, and also as many as are deemed necessary for the easy de\u00c2\u00ac\\nvelopment of each curved part when the same is laid out on the stretch-out.\\nThe usual way that cutters employ when laying out work of this kind is\\nto first make the drawing on paper and then lay the paper on the sheet of\\niron out of which it is desired the stretch-out is to be cut, and prick the\\ndifferent bends and places that are to be bent in the brake at each end of\\nthe piece used; the same is also done for the outline of the miter line, but\\nclose enough so that the correct outline can readily be cut to these marks\\nas pricked. It is of course not necessary that the entire lines be drawn\\nout on the iron, as has been done in the drawing, but for the work on\\npaper I would advise to always do this. The drawing then explains itself\\nat a glance, which would not be the case if it had been only half-done in\\nthe first place, and had, perhaps, been laid aside for some more important\\npiece of work at the time which had to be got out at once. Then, when\\nthis is finished, if the first drawing is fully drawn out in all its details, it\\nis far easier to take it up again at once than it would be if it were but in\u00c2\u00ac\\ncompletely done, so that most of the work would have to be studied over", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0136.jp2"}, "137": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n127\\nagain before all the short cuts, etc., would be once more fully understood.\\nLittle matters of this kind, if properly attended to in tbeir proper time,\\noften save time, money, vexation and extra work, which in itself ought to\\nbe inducement enough to cause the hints to be followed in regular work\\nof this kind.\\nThe stretch-out of Fig. 114 is shown fully developed by Fig. 115; the\\nwidth of the same is 23J this allows the use of iron 24 wide for these\\nmembers. Divide the stretch-out into as many parts as the profile is di\u00c2\u00ac\\nvided into, which in this case is 37. The line A to B in this figure corres\u00c2\u00ac\\nponds to the line C to D of Fig. 114. Transpose the length of each line\\nin regular order from Fig. 114 to the corresponding lines of Fig. 115;\\nwhen so done draw the miter line through the ends or points where the\\nlines end as demanded by Fig. 114, and the miter line for a raking mold\u00c2\u00ac\\ning or, as often termed, a pediment miter, is completed. The manner in", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0137.jp2"}, "138": {"fulltext": "128\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0138.jp2"}, "139": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n129\\nwhich these pieces are best joined together has been described in previous\\nchapters and need not be gone over again in this instance.\\nIn Fig. 116 is shown the gable or raking section mitering on the tur\u00c2\u00ac\\nret, as the elevation demands for it in this ease. The first step to take\\nis to draw a complete correct outline drawing of all parts of the turret that\\nare necessary to develop the required data for the development of the shape\\nthat miters on to it, as the outline of A, of Fig. 116, demands. This has\\nbeen done in Fig. 116, as shown by the solid outline drawing of the turret.\\nAlso draw the plan lines as shown for all the more prominent projecting\\nparts that occur in the outline of the turret on which the raking moldings\\nof section 7 miter. Then draw the profile and the connecting lines of the\\nsame to the angle of inclination that the gable cornice is to have when in\\nposition as shown by B and C.\\nDivide the profile B into any number of parts, as many as the person\\nworking out this problem sees fit to make use of, or which could be em-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0139.jp2"}, "140": {"fulltext": "130\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nployed to the best advantage in solving this problem. As will be seen in\\nthis instance, I have divided this profile into 38 points or 37 parts. From\\neach point thus determined on, lines are drawn parallel to each other, ter\u00c2\u00ac\\nminating each one at the point where its correct point of contact happens\\nto be on the surface of the turret. To ascertain the point of contact of\\neach line as drawn for the profile B, the following method is to be used\\nin this case. First, the part of this figure as described for the profile B\\nso far, gives a representation of how the section 7 actually appears when\\nfinished, mitering on to the turret, and in position on the building for this\\nside of the gable cornice. Second, the dotted outline C shows how the\\nprofile appears on a plane cut through the section 7 on line C to S. Tha\\ndotted outline n, m to k is merely introduced here to show the relative po\u00c2\u00ac\\nsition of the section C or profile 6, described before, to the raking gable\\nsection now under consideration. Third, the foregoing being fully under*\\nstood as to the various positions that all the parts have to each other in\\nthis design, Fig. 116, assume that the turret has been turned one-quarter,\\nor, in other words, that the position of the line D to E is turned so that\\nit is presented to the view as line D E or center line of the turret. Fourth,\\nthis view as presented, by reason of such change as described, will place\\nthe section 7 in the position as shown by the profile A, presenting the\\nprofile B in a vertical plane instead of a raking one, if the elevation of\\nprofile B is first swung into a horizontal position before such change\\nis made.\\nThe actual operation of changing the position of the profile from its\\ninclined position to that of a vertical one is not necessary to be shown in\\nthis case, as if so shown, the great number of lines, extra drawings, etc.,\\nwould only tend to confuse the student. For this reason I have omitted\\nshowing the same in this drawing, but have only shown the profile as it\\nactually appears after such change has been made. In this case it is not\\nstrictly necessary that the outline of the profile A is put into any certain\\nfixed position vertically. It could have been shown just as well either\\nabove or below the entire design, as in the position in which I have placed\\nit, the object of drawing the same being to show the position which the\\nplanes assume, which are projected from the points that the profile is di\u00c2\u00ac\\nvided into by a vertical view. The profile B shows planes horizontally. The\\nvertical planes as drawn show the position of each point on these planes as\\ncut by the vertical planes, and also so that by extending them, as has been\\ndone in the drawing above profile A and continuing them to where they\\ncome in contact, or where they touch the outline of the turret, the actual\\nlength that each line has horizontally and also where they come in contact", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0140.jp2"}, "141": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL 13i\\nWith the plan lines of the turret, are shown. We now have only to allow\\nfor the extra length which is added to all the lines by reason of the pitch,\\nor the inclined position that the problem calls for. This extra length can\\nreadily be determined for each line, by drawing lines at right angles to the\\ncenter line of the plan as the lines a b c d and e give for each curve that\\nlength and position of the same at its point of termination. Now whatever\\ndistance the^e is between the lines as directed to be drawn and the curve\\non which the same miters, is the distance which the lines that correspond\\nto these in the elevation must be lengthened or projected beyond the line\\nD E of the turret, in order to show their true length which is to be trans\u00c2\u00ac\\nposed on the stretch-out when the final drawing for the miter line is made.\\nTo illustrate: the length to be added to the line 2 is from 0 to O trans-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0141.jp2"}, "142": {"fulltext": "132\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nposed to O 0 shows the point of the termination at 0 this establishes\\nthe true length of the line 2 of the front elevation. Then again take the\\nline 15; this distance as shown is scarcely perceptible, transposed to where\\nits correct position is in the front elevation it is there shown as demanded.\\nThe same operation has been done for all the rest of the lines which miter\\no the upper cylindrical column of the turret. It may not be out of place\\nhere to remark that the line of contact as shown by the line from point P\\nto X shows the same on the side nearest to the person looking at it from\\nthe front; the line of contact below this point X is on the other side of the\\ncylindrical column and as a consequence is hidden and is shown by the\\ndotted line which the continuation of line P to X. The line C to R,\\nwnich cuts the profile of B, is used as the starling point to take all the\\nlengths for each line as transposed to the stretch-out, Fig. 117, line C R\\nhaving the same relative distance from the end of all the lines in that\\nfigure as it has in Fig. 116 at B. The foregoing description and method\\nto solve this problem is as simple a way to attain the end sought as has\\ncome to my notice. There are other methods to solve the same problem,", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0142.jp2"}, "143": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n133\\nbut they are somewhat more complicated than the one shown in this case\\nand as it covers all the points fully, I have given it in preference.\\nI have only shown in the Fig. 116 how to develop this problem down\\nto line 24, as all the lines up from 24 to line 1 miter to the one shape; that\\nis, the column of the turret is all of one diameter for these lines. In Fig. 118\\nthe development from line 24 to 38 is shown, but to a scale of 3 to the\\nfoot, this being larger than the size that Fig. 116 is drawn to and can be\\nmore conveniently read owing to the fact that the entire drawing is not so\\nsuch crowded, as would be the case on the smaller scale. This drawing\\nshows all the features as presented by Fig. 116, only that the parts shown\\nare given more in detail. A gives the section from line 24 to 38 in front\\nview. B shows the same profile for the plan lines. From a to 33 shows\\nthe line of contact that this profile has with the outline o! base of pillar\\nof the turret, and farther down, the points for Nos. 34 to 37 would show\\nbut are cut away by the curved members of the pendant. All the above as\\ndescribed when the section is in position on the building, viewed from the\\nfront, can not be seen from that point of view, and as a consequence, must\\nbe shown in the drawing by dotted lines as has been done on the side on\\nwhich it is located from the center line of this figure. Line K to K is the\\ncenter line. In order to show how this problem appears when the line of\\ncontact is shown in full, I have simply reversed it on the right hand side of\\nthe center line of the drawing. Dotted lines are dropped from the points\\n24 to 36, cutting the plan and showing the positions of these poinst or lines\\nas projected at their correct line of contact from that point of view, then\\nontinuing these same lines they end and show the line of contact that\\nthey have with the various curves and shapes of the base of the turret\\nviewed from the front, as this view gives it. It will be noticed that this\\nexposition goes a step farther and also shows the different upward corners\\nthat are to be filled out underneath some of the moldings. This is not so\\nplainly shown in the drawing on the left-hand side of the center line of\\nthis figure. It will be noticed that some of the lines apparently end at the\\nface of some of the parts which they come in contact with, but they again\\nappear underneath the same member down lower and farther into the body\\nof the drawing; notably is this the case with the line 29 and some of the\\nintermediate lines between lines 28 and 29. This is also the case with\\nline 32. All these different features are drawn out in full in the stretch-out,\\nFig. 119, and there is shown each line in its full minute development, as\\ndemanded for this problem. The line L to M of Fig. 119 corresponds to\\nthe line L to M of Fig. 118, and is the line from which all the lines for\\ntheir lengths on the stretch-out are measured; that is, measure from this\\nline to the points as shown in the drawing for the respective length of any", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0143.jp2"}, "144": {"fulltext": "134\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nline in this part as the length of the line 35 is from line L M to point 35\\nand the same is correspondingly so transposed to line 35 on the stretch-out.\\nOr the length of line 29 shows first from line L M to 29 then again from\\npoint 29 to point 29 where it ends and is so shown on the stretch-out, Fig.\\n119. As stated before, each line in this problem has received the same\\nminute treatment in all its details, making the line of contact complete of\\nevery bend or curve as demanded by the drawings. This problem has been\\ncarried to this length to show how it is done in every phase so that the\\nstudent will be competent to lay out every detail embodied in it ?f he so de\u00c2\u00ac\\nsires.\\nBut there is one point that I would draw his attention to in this\\ncase, which is that in actual work it is seldom that where joints and miter\\nconnections occur, which are in any way hidden or in such position that\\n-ET\\nthey are not seen, that any too much pains are taken in the cutting out or\\nputting together of such parts. Some cutters, if they had a case such as\\noccurs in this problem, would hardly go to the pains and lay out the pat\u00c2\u00ac\\ntern in all its minute details as has been done in this case, particularly so\\nin that portion which miters to the base of the pillar, and which for the\\nmost part miters on the receding rear portion of it, and as a consequence,\\nis partly if not wholly hidden from the view when the entire structure is\\nfinally put up into position on the building. The foregoing may serve as\\na hint to the student in cases of this kind. I will leave it to his own\\njudgment in regard to how much work to put into this detail or how much\\nhe can safely leave undone and still produce a good job so that the same\\nwill pass inspection and be rated as well done by the supervising architect\\nwho passes on alJ work done on the building.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0144.jp2"}, "145": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n135\\nXXII.\\nDEVELOPMENT OF DETAILS AND PATTERNS OF\\nTHE TOILETS,\\nIn the preceding chapter I have given a full exposition of the various\\nmethods for developing the patterns for the different miter joints that oc\u00c2\u00ac\\ncur between the members of both the horizontal and the raking gable cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nnice of Fig. 89. The next members of this structure which I will describe\\nand explain how they are to be laid out in every detail are the turrets that\\nare shown by Fig. 101. In work of this character it is well to have a\\nclearly defined plan how it is intended that every member that enters into\\nthe make-up of an entire structure is to fit and be joined to the next mem\u00c2\u00ac\\nber. The entire modus operandi should be fully determined before com\u00c2\u00ac\\nmencing the work. This is made necessary by the simple reason that there\\nare several ways of doing the work involved in the structure, as shown by\\nFig. 101. There are several different and distinct ways for the disposition\\nof the various pieces that compose it; instead of being made out of two or\\nmore pieces, members can be made out of one piece only; then the various\\nother points, such as joining the edges of the members together, either to\\ndouble seam, butt or l ip-joint them, etc. All these points alluded to will\\nbe fully treated in the following for this particular case. I will give several\\ndifferent ways that most of the members of the two turrets can be made.\\nThe first member or part of either of these turrets that I will discuss\\nwill be the vertical circular part between the top of the flange of the pen\u00c2\u00ac\\ndant and the lowest part of the ornamental cap, this being the part to\\nwhich most of the horizontal as well as the gable cornices miters, and is al\u00c2\u00ac\\nso the part to which the spiral flutes are fastened, as is shown by Fig. 101,\\nbetween the molding S S at the lower end and the molding 1 to 2 at theupper\\nend of the vertical circular column of the turret. In the measurements as giv\u00c2\u00ac\\nen, this part is shown to LeOJ in diameter and 2 7 higli between the mold\u00c2\u00ac\\nings S S and 1 to 2 of .Fig. 101, or as may be considered that part which\\nwould show between the square molding A of Fig. 120, commencing at A\\nand connecting at its other end with the round molding A of Fjg. 121 at\\nB; that is, if the two Figures, 120 and 121, were connected by the column\\nin one drawing. Now the question is, how best to lay out the envelope of\\nthis member? One way would be to make it just 2 7 in length and 2\\n5| wide for the circumference, with a half-inch added for the lap for that\\npart which is solid above the part of the cylinder which is set over on the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0145.jp2"}, "146": {"fulltext": "136\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ncorner of the wall of the building. Connections could be made with the\\nsquare flange A at a, of Fig. 120, and with flange B of Fig. 121 for the\\nother end of the described cylindrical member, and would be one way of\\ndoing this part of the work on the turrets.\\nA better and more solid job than the foregoing is shown in the follow\u00c2\u00ac\\ning description how to arrange the different connections of the different\\nparts that are joined to the vertical cylindrical member under consideration.\\nThe first point of difference by this method from the one previously de\u00c2\u00ac\\nscribed is that the cylinder, instead of being cut off or ending at point a, on\\nflange A of Fig. 120, is continued downward to point C. This operation\\nadds If to the length of the cylinder; then at its top end, instead of end\u00c2\u00ac\\ning it at point b of flange A of Fig. 121, continue it sufficiently long enough\\nto provide for enough material, in order to produce the shape as shown in\\nthe drawing from point 2 to point d of Fig. 121. The shape as shown is\\nproduced by stretching the end of the cylinder until the shape as desired is\\nobtained. This is a comparatively easy matter to do, involving less labor\\nand time than would be required if the first described method were used for\\nthis member. The extra length that the cylinder will have, to allow for\\nthe additional curved part at the top, is 4J making the full length of the\\nentire cylinder as described 3 If long over all. It will be seen that if the\\nmethod as last shown is used for this member it makes the entire structure\\nconsiderably more rigid, stronger and simpler, and easier to build. The la\u00c2\u00ac\\nbor of producing the curve of the part B of Fig. 121, as shown from 1 to d,\\ninvolves only the operation of enlarging the end of the cylinder If all\\nround or 3J altogether. In order to do this quickly, and at the sami time\\nproduce a first-class job, the following method is recommended. Bo all\\nthe stretching ovsr a rounding stake whose surface conforms to tee direc\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion and sweep that the curve of the section is to have when finished.\\nCommence to enlarge the cylinder from the point 1, doing this at first by\\neasy stages; then as the process of enlarging the curve progresses toward\\nthe larger end stretch the same correspondingly more than has been done\\nat the start of the curve. Care must bo taken not to stretch the iron\\ntoo much at the start, and that the whole operation is done gradually.\\nFeel the way along; in brief, use a little common sense and judgment\\nwhen doing work of this class. Good results may be expected if the fore\u00c2\u00ac\\ngoing suggestions are followed.\\nIt will also be observed that the flanges A of Fig. 120 and A of Fig\\n121, by using this method, fit on the outside of the cylindrical vertical sec\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion. This is shown for flange A from a to c and for flange A from 1 to 2.\\nNow, if the general arrangement of this end of the cylinder is or had been\\nmade as shown by the other end of the molding A\u00e2\u0080\u0094that is, the cylinder", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0146.jp2"}, "147": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n137\\ncut off or ending at b and the section B ending at X at its lower end, the\\nmolding A would be the member which would have to sustain the entire\\nweight of all the numbers of tin cap above it, and that without any o lnr\\nbracing than that which its own natural stiffness and the rigidity of the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0147.jp2"}, "148": {"fulltext": "133\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAt\\nmaterial would offer against its collapsing or bending out of shape while\\nsustaining the weight. A similar state of conditions would also occur at\\nthe other end of the cylinder if the foregoing described method were used to\\nconstruct the connection at the square molding A of Fig. 120, only in a\\nmore aggravated shape in so far as this molding would have to bear consid\u00c2\u00ac\\nerably more weight than the other one has. By the foregoing comparison\\nof methods the intelligent workman can easily see which of the two is ihe\\nproper and the better one to adopt for the purpose, and why I recommend\\nthe method which is followed for the construction of the parts as described.\\nThe lower cylindrical part as from L to k of Fig. 120 is to be made as the\\nmeasurements demand for it to be, as shown in the drawing; namely, 7\u00e2\u0080\u009d\\ndiameter and 10J high when done. If the workman is so disposed, he\\nmay also make this part of the turret after the same general directions\\nthat have been given for the larger cylindrical part of the turret. As is\\neasily seen, this section from S to K is precisely similar to the foregoing\\ndescribed sections, with this difference only, that it is somewhat smaller.\\nThe reasons why I have made the same project down into the pendant as\\nfar as shown in Fig. 120 will be fully explained further on when a descrip\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion of the pendant is given.\\nThe next step will be to give the best way to construct the various\\nmoldings that are used for these turrets, such as the moldings A and B, of\\nFig. 120, and A of Fig. 121. One way often used is to cut out the top and\\nbottom circular disks for a square projection, as for the molding A of Fig.\\n120. These disks are cut out with sufficient allowance for flanges both at\\ntheir outer as well as inside edges. Then when these flanges are turned as\\ndemanded a plain strip made of the width the flange is to be is soldered to\\nthe outside edges, and this completes the molding. D, of Fig. 120, shows\\nthe foregoing described disposition of the different parts fully.\\nThe foregoing involves a considerable amount of work which cannot\\npossibly be avoided if some such method as the above described is made use\\nof to construct these parts of the turrets. I may add that the method de\u00c2\u00ac\\nscribed is about the only one that cornice makers generally know of by\\nwhich to do a job of work of this class. A far easier way, which also makes\\na neater and stronger molding than those produced by the first described\\nmethod, is as follows: Take the square molding A D, of Fig. 120; make a\\nstraight square bent piece of the same width as tire stretch-out and equal\\nin length to the circumference that the extreme outside edge of the square\\nmolding is, or this piece can be cut in two parts making each half the\\nlength that the circumference demands, with an allowance for laps added,\\nwhich are required to join the two pieces together when they are finally", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0148.jp2"}, "149": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n139", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0149.jp2"}, "150": {"fulltext": "140\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nThe stretch-out or width that the pieces are to be made is shown by A\\nof Fig. 122 which shows the end view of the pieces made out of one piece\\nA of the same figure gives an end view of this molding if it is made out of\\nthree pieces. This is clearly shown in the drawing. When getting out the\\ntwo pieces which are needed to form the molding as demanded by the draw\u00c2\u00ac\\ning in Fig. 120 for the molding D A care must be taken that due allow\u00c2\u00ac\\nance is made for sufficient material on the inner curve for the burrs or\\nflanges which are to be turned on the molding, as shown in the drawings\\nfor this part, A at a and b of Fig. 120. All the foregoing preliminaries\\nprovided for, bend the strip to shape, as shown by A of Fig. 122. The\\nshape of the sections done as far as described would be straight, as shown\\nby one of the strips at B, which is only partly formed to the shape desired.\\nThe manner in which the shape is produced, as in Fig. 122 showing\\nthe molding when formed up, will be described in the following. Fig.\\n123 shows one of the common crimping machines used in nearly all shops,\\nmainly for crimping the small ends of conductor pipes, etc. Most of\\nthese machines have an attachment consisting of a pair of beading roils\\nat the outer ends of the spindles: these rolls, as a matter of course, in\\nFiji 1ZZ.\\norder for the machine to be suitable to accomplish the following operation,\\nmust be taken off from the spindles or shafts of the machine and the\\nshafts themselves cut off so that the crimping rolls appear at the ends as\\nshown in Fig. 123. If a machine of this kind is at hand, arranged as des\u00c2\u00ac\\ncribed, we may now proceed to form up the moldings in the following\\nmanner: Place the square-bent piece with one of its inner edges between\\nthe crimping rolls; turn down the set-screw c, Fig. 123, but slightly, then\\nrun the straight square- bent molding through, causing the side thus", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0150.jp2"}, "151": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n141\\ntreated to become slightly corrugated. One side done as described, reverse\\nthe molding and do the same for the other side or edge. The foregoing\\noperation repeated two or three times, but each time with increased pres\u00c2\u00ac\\nsure on the rolls will cause the molding to gradually assume a circular\\nshape as demanded for the section D, of Fig. 122, and the molding D A of\\nFig. 120. The method as described can also be used on larger work than\\nis required for this case, and is in the opinion of the writer a cheaper\\nand neater way of doing the work than the other. There are occasions\\nwhere this method could not be used, but where the crimped appearance of\\nthe surfaces does not matter or affect the general appearance of the work,\\nI would advise to use it wherever applicable. In the case of the\\nmolding D A of Fig. 120, this plan of obtaining and producing the cur\u00c2\u00ac\\nvature of the sections of which the molding is composed also adds greatly\\nto its rigidity and improves the appearance of the whole structure of the\\nturret. At C, Fig. 122, is shown by a plan view the quantity that has to\\nbe cut out of this molding in order to allow it to fit into its proper position\\nagainst the corner of the wall when the entire turret is completed and put\\nin its final position on the building in connection with the horizontal and\\ngable cornices. The burr or edge 0 O Fig. 122, is then turned, which\\ncompletes the square-cornered molding D A ready to be soldered to the\\ncylinder E, of Fig. 120. The reason why the action of crimping the edges\\nof the straight-out pieces causes them to assume the circular shape, is the\\ncorrugations as formed by the crimping machine gathering the metal to\u00c2\u00ac\\ngether at the edges more than they do nearer to the outer flat surface of\\nthe moldings, and thus, without stretching the metal, causing them to\\nform in the circular-shape as desired, The next molding in order would", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0151.jp2"}, "152": {"fulltext": "142\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nbe the round-face mold, as shown by B, of Fig. 120. Moldings of this\\nkind are often made in two parts and are joined together at the seam in the\\ncenter, as shown by seam X X, Fig. 120. If this method is used to con\u00c2\u00ac\\nstruct the molding for this case, two circular flat disks of material will\\nhave to be cut for it, the outside diameter being equal to twice the distance\\nfrom center line F to point R. The inside disks, which are to be cut out\\nof these again, are to have a diameter of 7 From this is to be deducted\\nthe quantity that is to be allowed for the edge or burr ab t t or the inner\\nedge of the large disks. Then after the pieces of material are cut as\\nwanted, the rounding outside edges are to be bumped or raised to the de\u00c2\u00ac\\nsired shape. The Figs. 124, 125 and 126 show three very desirably\\nFig. 124. Fig. 125. Fig, 126.\\nshaped raising hammers used for this style of work. These styles of mold\u00c2\u00ac\\nings can also be made by the same general method as described for the\\nflat-faced styles, the only difference being in the shape of the outer face of\\nthese moldings from the square or flat variety as the mold D A of Fig.\\n120 is shown. The foregoing description in every detail is also applicable\\nto the molding A, of Fig. 12 L. As to the manner of producing it need not\\nbe repeated again, the only point of difference being that the measure\u00c2\u00ac\\nments of all the diameters are somewhat larger than the molding B, of\\nFig. 120. I will also describe another method to produce these styles of\\nmoldings. The modus operandi is as follows: Cut a flat strip equal in\\nlength to the circumference to the outer edge of the molding, and equal in\\nwidth as the stretch-out of Fig. 127 shows from 1 2 to 3. This strip is\\nfastened together, forming a wide band or hoop, and beaded to the desired\\nshape in an ordinary heading machine, for which special rolls have been", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0152.jp2"}, "153": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n143\\nmade to suit the style and shape of the molding desired.\\nFig. 128 shows a beading machine made for this purpose. As will be\\nseen, this method does not allow for any moldings that have considerable\\nFigi M\\ndepth, or if they are very wide in the face, but for certain special styles and\\nsizes it is an excellent one, and is about as cheap and easily arranged a style\\nof machine as could be devised for the purpose. Especially is this true in\\nregard to the case of accomplishing the inter-changing from one set or\\nstyle of rolls to those of another profile, as the circumstances may demand\\nfor different designs. If a half a dozen different sets of rolls are prepared\\nand made to be used especially for this style of machine, each set having a\\nprofile conforming to a standard style of moldings, I would venture to\\nassert that this would be sufficient for all ordinary requirements of any\\nsmall cornice shop for this special line of work, and would be a great con\u00c2\u00ac\\nvenience besides being a material help in the getting out of work rapidly\\nand economically", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0153.jp2"}, "154": {"fulltext": "144\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nFor more elaborate curves and designs, if it is desired that they b@\\nformed to shape by machinery, I would recommend some of the more\\nelaborate and special molding machines now on the market. These ma\u00c2\u00ac\\nchines are, as a matter of course, more costly than the kind described and\\nillustrated to some extent by Fig. 128.\\nIn connection with this description of some of our American-manufact\u00c2\u00ac\\nured machines for curved moldings, etc., descriptive illustrations and special\\ndesigns of which can be obtained from any cornice-maker\u00e2\u0080\u0099s tool supply\\nhouse, I have introduced two views of a machine made in Germany and\\nused for this class of work.\\nFig. 129 of this machine presents somewhat the appearance of a large\\nbeading-machine. By using a set of gauges as shown by Fig. 130, some\\nvery fine moldings can be produced. The machines are adapted so that\\nthey can be adjusted vertically, horizontally, or to any radial adjustment\\nFig\\n129\\nthat may be necessary to meet any requirements demanded from them for\\ndifferent styles of moldings. As will be seen by examining the two figures,", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0154.jp2"}, "155": {"fulltext": "Cornice work manual\\n145\\nthese machines do not differ to any great extent from our beading or swaging\\nmachines, excepting in the gearing, and also that the standard is especially\\ndesigned for a machine of this character. Different styles of rolls are\\nat the foot of the standards in both views, showing to some extent the range\\nof profiles that moldings can be made to by these machines.\\nFig. 130.\\nThe molding A, of Fig. 121, as shown by the Fig. 131, is produced by\\nthe method as described for the molding B, of Fig. 120. In the description\\nof this last-mentioned molding the size or length of the band is given as\\nequal to the diameter of the outermost point of the circular face of the\\nmolding. If this direction is followed a safe allowance is provided for, an 3\\nin no case is there any danger of the molding not having enough mateiial\\nso as to be long enough to go all the way around the vertical circular part\\nof the turret against which the molding is fitted and fastened.\\nIn the course of the operation of beading or swaging th j\\nbands to the shape as the profile demands of each, there occurs consider\u00c2\u00ac\\nable stretching and at the edges of the material some compression by\\na machine as described. Just how much stretching there occurs by the\\noperation is a matter that is best studied and learned by actual experience*", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0155.jp2"}, "156": {"fulltext": "146\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nDifferent shapes and kinds of material vary somewhat as to the exact de\u00c2\u00ac\\ngree that the metal stretches, but it is safe to assume that it does stretch\\nsome more or less. The safest method is to make allowances for enough\\nmaterial, so that when the shape desired is produced no shortage occurs;\\nhow to do this has been shown.\\nThe next members of the turret that I will describe are the sections C,\\nof Fig. 120, and B, D, Eand F of Fig. 121. I will assume that instead\\nof continuing the circular piece as shown by the projecting vertical pa^t k,\\nof Fig. 120, so that it would, by flanging it outward, form the curved ac\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion C in one piece, it had been determined to make the curved section\\nC, from a to b separate and independent of the others. This bein^r\\ndetermined, the next thing in order is to develop the pattern for the enve\u00c2\u00ac\\nlope of a form which by proper manipulation and treatment will produce\\nthe shape demanded by 0, of Fig. 120. There are two other sections of the\\nsame general style as C, of Fig. 120, in the make-up of these turrets,\\nnamely, the sections B and D, of Fig. 121. The section E, of the same\\nfigure, may also be classed under the head of flaring curved moldings, if it\\nis made in two parts. A detailed treatment of this section will be given\\nfurther on. If the cutter has to lay out a pattern for an envelope of a\\ncurved moulding, as the section C of Fig. 120 shows, the first step is to\\nget the correct radius for the sweep of the patterns. If the same is to be\\nraised or stretched to the shape and curve as shown by the drawing, by\\nhand, that is, by hammering out the correct curves, the outline of the\\nfrustum of a cone as ne*eded for this problem must be of a size so that it\\nwill have a point of contact with the curve desired, as shown at the point\\nX. This point of contact is precisely in the center of the curve a to b.\\nThen the radius, as shown by the dotted line from a to c must be an\\nequal distance away from the curve at both the pdints a and b, as is shown\\nin the drawing, This disposition of the angle of inclination of the outline\\ntoward the center point C gives the frustum its proper shape for a prob\u00c2\u00ac\\nlem like this. It will be seen by this disposition of the angle that the frus-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0156.jp2"}, "157": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ni4f\\ntum will have when aone, both the top and bottom end require an equal\\namount of stretching to produce the curve desired. This would not bo the\\ncase if the angle were at any other degree and, as a consequence, it is cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nrect.\\nFrom point X the slant height that the frustum is to have depends\\non the distances that the curve has from the center point X to the points a\\nand b, with an allowance for the required lap above point a, as shown in\\nthe drawing. The correct length and position of the required radius deter\u00c2\u00ac\\nmined, the envelope can be drawn as shown by the sweep and outline for it\\nfrom center-line at R out to G and again ending at point L, being the en\u00c2\u00ac\\ntire stretch-out of the required envelope of a frustum of a cone as the prob\u00c2\u00ac\\nlem demands. When the pattern is cut out, allow for locks or laps; then\\nform the flat part or parts (if made out of more than one piece) to the\\nshape of a frustum of a cone. Fasten the same together by whatever\\nmode the fastening is to be and proceed to stretch the two edges to the re\u00c2\u00ac\\nquired curve as the drawing shows. This is done by first drawing and\\nstretching by hammering the material with the proper tools on the inside\\nof the cone. The mechanic who is doing a piece of work of this kmd, as a\\nmatter ol course will understand that the cone, in order to have the round\u00c2\u00ac\\ning shape as the curve from a to b demands, must not stretch the iron as\\nmuch at the point X as he does when he gradually works toward the t?/o\\nouter edges. A few general hints may be added here for the guidance of\\nthe workman on this class of work. These are: Don\u00e2\u0080\u0099t be in a hurry at the\\nstart, but make haste slowly. Do not pound the material too hard when\\nan iron stake is used to stretch the material on; and last, but not least, try\\nand work evenly. Have the blows of the stretching hammer fall on the\\niron in such a manner that the entire surface presents a fine and finished\\nappearance when the work is done and not, as some botchy workmen turn\\nout work, with the surface all dented and bruised where, in some places,\\nthey did not strike with an evenly balanced blow with the hammer, and in\\nother places where they did not hammer the material at all. Next turn the\\nedge r as demanded and this part is done, ready to be put into its proper\\nplace on the turret.\\nThe directions given for the section 0, of Fig. 120, also apply in every\\nparticular to the section B, of Fig. 121, in order to produce the same as\\ndemanded by the drawings. In this case I have added an additional allow\u00c2\u00ac\\nance for the straight-down part from point 1 to 2 for this curve. The ra\u00c2\u00ac\\ndius for this single section of B is shown from points 8 to 4 and center\\npoint at C\\\\ H shows a broken view of the envelope for this frustum of a\\ncone. For the section E, if it is determined to make it out of two parts.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0157.jp2"}, "158": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nwith a seam at line a b, the radius from points X, 0 to the center point C\\nis the correct length for these parts. L shows part of an envelope for ono\\nScale 2 to the Foot.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0158.jp2"}, "159": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n149\\nof these parts drawn out as wanted for this method of producing one-half\\nof the shape of section E, Fig. 121.\\nThe section E can also be produced by forming up a straight cylinder\\nequal in diameter to the narrowest part that this section lias, as from\\npoints b to d. The distance from points X to X is the length of the re\u00c2\u00ac\\nquired material for the curve from points K to y, and is the required width\\nor height that the cylinder would have to be made to in order to make the\\nrequired shape as section E calls for. The two ends of this cylinder form\\nthe point d to the point X for its upper end and from point d to X for its\\nlower one are to be flanged and stretched in the same manner as described\\nbefore for this kind of work; also make allowances for proper connection\\nlaps, at each end where this section fits to the adjoining sections and parts\\nof the turret.\\nThe next style of molding to consider, which w.e have to develop for\\nthese turrets, is the section D of Fig. 121. As will be seen, the curve of\\nthis section is outward instead of in ward,as the foregoing described sections\\nwere. In order to strike the correct radius for a molding such as this style\\nrequires, always have the two points at an equal distance away from the\\ncurve, as at points k and 3; then instead of having the radius line in con\u00c2\u00ac\\ntact at the center of the curve at the outside, as at point S, if there is\\nconsiderable sweep to the curve, as from points k to 8, have it cut at the\\ncurve somewhat to the inside, as shown in the drawing. This will save, in\\nsome instances, considerable stretching or raising and is especially appli\u00c2\u00ac\\ncable in this case, as this section D has considerable curve between points\\nk to 3. Another point: when forming up work of this style of molding\\ncurving outwardly, as section D presents, do not use the bumping-hammer\\ntoo much, but rather try and use a round-headed tool for a stake and if\\npossible try and form the shape by using a wooden mallet for this purpose.\\nIt will be found, that in a great number of .instances this method is\\nsufficient to produce the desired shape, and, I may add, that it is a far more\\nexpeditious way of doing the work than with a raising hammer, providing\\nthat the work in hand can be done in this manner. I would advise, when\u00c2\u00ac\\never allowable, to use the quickest way of getting there. It may at times\\nbe necessary that recourse be had to the raising-block and hammer to sink\\nor bump a curve. Whenever this is necessary, do so.\\nThe section F, of Fig. 121, will be in the shape of a flat band or hoop\\nof the proper size. This section is so simple that I do not deem it neces\u00c2\u00ac\\nsary to give it any particular description at this time. M and N are the\\nstretch-out for the three sections, D, F and B, if they are all three made\\nin one piece and are to be formed up to shape by using a circular molding", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0159.jp2"}, "160": {"fulltext": "150\\nCORNICE WO UK MANUAL\\nmachine for this purpose. The angle that the outline has for a frustum of\\na cone, needed for the production of a molding, or a shape as the curves\\nfrom point X to X have, is shown by the line from point U to center point\\nW. This at the same time gives the length of the radius and also the way\\nof averaging the pitch of the angle that it passes through the profile of all\\nthe moldings of this member. In contrast to this last described angle that\\nthe frustum of a cone has for these sections D, F and B all combined in\\none, notice how much difference there is from it in the pitch of section I)\\nalone, as from point k to the center point at li. This latter divergence is\\ncaused by the reason that if one section only is done, the radius and pitch\\nof the cone must conform to a degree of outline for it, which offers the\\nbest possible shape for an easy attainment of the desired curve as demand\u00c2\u00ac\\ned, so that the curve can be produced from a cone as developed by the least\\namount of labor possible. On the contrary, when a number of sections are\\nall made out of one piece, the pitch of the outline of a cone must be aver\u00c2\u00ac\\naged in order to allow all the different bends to be obtained from one\\npiece; and that the material while undergoing the process of developing the\\nvarious bends, will offer the least possible amount of resistance. This\\npoint is fully covered.\\nIn the disposition of the radius and angle line, as shown by line v to\\nw of Fig. 121, for this case, and which may, with a little modification, be\\napplied to almost any problem in this line, it will be well for the student to\\nmake himself thoroughly familiar with the principles governing this class of\\nmoldings, as given in the foregoing.\\nThe ornamental hemispheres ou section E are to be trimmed and\\nfitted to the section; each one of them is to be soldered to its correct rela\u00c2\u00ac\\ntive position, as shown in the drawings. Another curved molding for this\\nturret is shown by the section I, connecting and serving a3 the base upon\\nwhich the large ball is fitted to the cap of the turret. P gives tte envelope;\\nmake its outside curve equal to the circumference of the bottom end of I\\nand the top curve equal to the top of the column I. At point y is shown;\\nthe center point of the radius by which the envelope P is drawn. At poinfi\\nX is showm the other end of the outline of the cone from which the curved\\ncolumn I is developed. The raised piece e in the drawing is cut in the\\nflat, equal in diameter to the length from point a to b of the raised disk c.\\nWhen a flat circular piece has been cut as directed, the rounding edge is\\nthen hammered or raised as the disk shows. When so done, it is to be neatly\\ntrimmed and fitted to the center on the top to the cap of the turret and\\nsecurely soldered to it.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0160.jp2"}, "161": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n151\\nThe next section which I will describe is the cap of the turret. As\\nwill be seen in the drawing, Fig. 121, the outline of the cap shows that it\\nis not exactly (by a side view) a true hemisphere, but somewhat less, as\\nshown from the center point 1 to the base line 2 to 3, in Fig. 121. One quar\u00c2\u00ac\\nter of the plan is shown from point 4 by the quarter circle to point 2. The\\ncap is to be made out of eight pieces; the plan is so divided by the line O\\nto t. In order to develop the pattern for a stretch-out of one of these parts,\\nproceed as follows: Divide the line 1 to 2 into any number of equal parts.\\nThis has been done in the drawing in six equM parts. Drop lines from\\npoints to base line 2 to 3. From where these lines intersect the base line\\n1 to 2, using point 0 as center, draw the curv s abode. The foregoing\\ndescription is all that is necessary for all the data required to lay out the\\npattern for the various sections which are need-d to complete the cap. Fig.\\n132 shows one of the required sections fully devrloped. To lay out a pat\u00c2\u00ac\\ntern, as shown by Fig. 132, proceed according to the following directions:\\nMake the line 0 to X equal in length to line 1 to 2 of the outline of the\\noap of Fig, 121. Divide 3me 0 to X into as many equal parts as the line 1\\nto 2 of Fig, 121 haa been divided into. Next, draw the straight lines a to\\ne at right-angles to the center line 0 to X, and equal in length to the cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nresponding curved lines shown them in Fig 121. These lines evenly\\ndivided, as shown, and connected by the curved outlines 0 to t and 0 to 3,\\nand also points S and t connected by the curve line t, X and S, using 0 as\\ncenter for the same, completes the outline for one of the eight sections for\\na cap of one of the turrets, Figs. 101 and 121. The extra length that is\\nadded to the width of these sections by reason of transferring the length of\\neach one of the curves of Fig. 121 to the straight transverse lines of Fig.\\n132, or in other words, the fact that the length of the straight lines of Fig.\\n132 have been made equal to those of the curves in the section of the plan\\nof the cap of Fig. 121, causes the pattern to have a greater width than a\\nstrict geometrical and an actual measurement of the surface taken on. the\\noutlines that these plans would show, as represented by plan curves of Fig.\\n121. The reason these sections are made wider is, because, in the opera\\ntion of raising or bumping and forming it will be found that on curved\\nwork there is some liability of the metal not stretching at all and also of\\nthe edges fraying or becoming rough by the action of the hammering, etc.,\\nmaking it necessary to trim the edges before joining the sections together.\\nAn extra allowance of metal is also shown for laps on the edge 0 to S.\\nThe four dotted cleats are left on every piece which serves to hold several\\nof the sections together when more than one is fastened and hammered up\\nto shape at the same time. The bottom piece having these cleats only,", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0161.jp2"}, "162": {"fulltext": "152\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\no\\nthen two or more sections are laid on to it, the cleats turned over and fas\u00c2\u00ac\\ntened down; thus they serve to hold the pieces together while the operation\\nof forming the sections to shape is in progress. The sections can either be\\ndouble-seamed or lapped as the workman may determine when construct\u00c2\u00ac\\ning these members of the turrets, but whatever method is adopted, this must,\\nas a matter of course be allowed for when the sections are laid and cut out.\\nFigs. 133 and 134 show two old-style appliances in use many years\\nago to form and block up raised work in cornice shops. In connection\\nhere it may be stated that similar dies and blocks are still to be. found in\\nmany cornice shops throughout the country, these establishments finding\\nMia\\nFig m.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0162.jp2"}, "163": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n153\\nit cheaper to use some such contrivance as Fig. 133 for the purposes stated*\\nthan to invest in the rather expensive and more elaborate machines made\\nfor these purposes. The two views, Fig. 133, may be briefly described:\\nThe top pieces or plunger part and the bottom dies or negatives are made\\nfrom some tough and enduring kind of hardwood. The shape that it is de\u00c2\u00ac\\nsired the molding shall have, to which the material is to be formed, is du\u00c2\u00ac\\nplicated in the profile and curve that the wooden plungers and bottom dies\\nare made to. The shanks at the bottom part are shaped so that they can\\nbe conveniently fastened to any bench or block which has a suitable hole cut\\nout for it, so as so allow the shank of the bottom die to fit into it, and\\nserve to hold the die securely while the workman is manipulating the upper\\ndie on the metal placed between the wooden tools, where it gradually as\u00c2\u00ac\\nsumes the shape desired by reason of the forcible pressure imparted to the\\nupper plunger by means of blows struck with wooden mallet, as shown.\\nThe block and die, shaped as shown by the view b of Fig.\\n183, would nearly do for the forming to shape of the sections needed for\\nthe cap of Fig. 121, and of which Fig. 132 presents a fully developed sec\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion in the flat. I will next describe how to lay out the fluted sections of\\nthe pendant of which a part view is shown by the dotted lines of Fig. 120.\\nFig. 185 gives a complete plan view, showing how the various parts\\nthat the pendant is composed of are fitted and placed to each other; it also\\nshows the correct position that the pendant has in relation to the wall-line\\nof the building, as shown by P, 0 to S in part A of Fig. 135. The center\\nJine, A to B, divides the plan view A from the part B, which is a complete", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0163.jp2"}, "164": {"fulltext": "154\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nelevation of the pendant, an outline of which is shown by the curve 1 to\\n10. By part C is shown a complete half of the stretch-out of one of the\\nsections, from point 1 on center line A to B to point 10 corresponding to\\nthe same length as the curved outline of the elevation B. The dotted line\\nshown near the solid curve of the outline and connected to it at all the points\\nfrom 1 to 10 by short solid lines, gives the extent of the curve the sections\\nhave throughout their entire length. At each transverse solid straight line,\\nas shown by the stretch-out of part C, is also shown by the dotted curves at\\neach line the amount of curvature the section has at this particular point ai\\nwhich the straight line is placed. These straight lines, as described, have\\nthe same length that the dotted-line curves have; in fact, their length is deter\u00c2\u00ac\\nmined by these, and is so shown in the drawing. At the points thus deter*\\nmined, the curved outline of the sections cuts and forms a continuous line\\nfrom the top to the bottom of each section, as from point 1 to 10 of the\\noutline as shown in Fig. 135 for part 0. In the plan view of one of the\\nsections is shown with all the profiles of the points drawn out which are to\\nbe cut in order to enable the pendant to miter against the corner which cuts\\ninto the pendant at that point. The line that the cut has through the sec\u00c2\u00ac\\ntions is shown by the wall-ltne S, C to P. The full development of the\\nstretch-out of one of the?e sections is shown by D. The dotted line shows the\\ncourse which the cut has when the pattern is in the flat, before it is formed\\nto shape as demanded by the outline of the pendant. The deduction and\\ntransferring of the distances from the plan view to the stretch-out is so\\nsimple and so plainly shown in the drawing that no further description is\\nneeded for this point. There being two sections which are affected by the\\nposition of the pendant which it occupies in relation to the corner of the\\nbrick wall, the relative position that they have, both to each other and to\\nthe wail, is shown in plan, part A, of Fig. 135. This merely makes it nec\u00c2\u00ac\\nessary that the section adjoining the one shown by D should have a corre\u00c2\u00ac\\nsponding piece cut out of its surface as the piece D has, only to the reverse\\nside, as shown by the section D. This completes all the necessary descrip\u00c2\u00ac\\ntions of the method of cutting out the sections that are needed to make up\\nthe complete pendant. Each one of the sections can have a small burr\\nturned on one side, to which the corresponding raw edge of the adjoining\\nsection can fit, then they can be soldered together; that is, the foregoing is\\nto be done after the sections have all been formed and hammered to the\\nshape that the profile of the pendant demands each section should have.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0164.jp2"}, "165": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n155", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0165.jp2"}, "166": {"fulltext": "156\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nReferring again to the vertical cylinder that projects down into the\\npendant, as shown in Fig. 120, if the cylinder has a solid bottom at the\\nend K which makes*the cylinder stiff and solid, it is easily seen that it\\noffers the best form of a stay, and a good solid background on which, when\\nit is made up complete, the pendant can be fastened. This secures for the\\npendant a means to stiffen it all around where the bottom of the cylinder\\ntouches the sections inside, and also from where an additional fastening for\\nthe sphere L can be made, independent of what it would have if it were\\nsoldered only to the pendant at the end of the sections at X of Fig. 120.\\nAnother point, if it is decided that the 7 cylindrical and the curved\\nsection C of Fig. 120 are to be made out of one piece, it is necessary to\\nolder the molding B to this member before fastening the pendant to it.\\nIf all the parts so far described for the turrets are made up and ready\\nto be put together, a good plan would be to use the following order of ac\u00c2\u00ac\\ncomplishing this object: First, put together the caps, then fasten the\\ncolumn I and the top sphere securely to it; then add the section E and\\nthen D and F. Next in order, finish the pendant and sphere and the parts\\nup to section C. Then fasten either of these parts of the turrets to the\\nlarge cylindrical section E and connect it with the remaining part. Solder\\nevery joint well.\\nPay particular attention to and be careful that the entire structure is\\nin perfect alignment throughout. Never allow work of this kind to have\\nthe appearance of being lop-sided or bear the ear marks of carelessness and\\nincompetence. After the turrets are completed as far as described in the\\nforegoing descriptions, they may be connected to the sections of both the\\nraising as well as the horizontal cornice, which miter to them It now only\\nremains to add the spiral flutes to the cylindrical part of the turrets and\\nthis operation makes them complete. The methods by which these flutes\\nare produced in every particular are fully explained and illustrated by the\\nFig. 136 and are as follows: The problem presented in this instance devolves\\nitself into developing the square or block-shaped spiral flutes in the best\\nmanner. To attain this end there are several methods by which this may\\nbe done, three of which I will describe in full. Fig. 136 shows that the\\nspiral has a degree of pitch which causes it to revolve around the cylindrical\\ncolumn one and one-half revolutions. The tracing of the course which it\\npresents when fully developed is shown by the dotted line from point B to\\nA for one-half revolution and from that point it makes one continuous\\ncurve completely around the column to point C, ending at its extreme upper\\nend. The outer and upper outline curve only is shown for the spiral in the\\ndrawing above point A to point C by a solid line for that portion which is", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0166.jp2"}, "167": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n157\\npresented by a face view to the person viewing the drawing. The inner\\ncurve or that part of the flute which is in contact with the column, is shown\\nby dotted lines only in the drawing, as it would appear viewing it from a\\nfront view, considering the line C, A, B as the center line of such view.\\nThese preliminaries noted I will first discuss one of the simplest methods\\nused by some cornice workers of producing a series of spiral fiutes or ridges\\non the surfaces of columns or on work pertaining to the same general char\u00c2\u00ac\\nacter as the turrets uuder consideration. The operation consists in merely\\nbending up the ridges as desired in a brake; the ridges as a matterof course\\nc\u00c2\u00a7n not be as deep nor as sharply cornered as those shown in Fig. 136. I\\nhave merely giveu this description to show how a simpler style can be pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nduced than the variety shown in the drawings. The course of the line of\\ncontact that a spiral has on the surface of a cylindrical shape as in tbe col\u00c2\u00ac\\numn of Fig. 136 is merely a straight line drawn diagonally across the\\nstretch-out of the circumference of the column at an angle coinciding to\\nwhatever rise or pitch the spiral has. In a case as shown by Fig. 136 this\\nangle would be as indicated from point C to A, which is equal to one-half of\\nthe circumference of the desired spiral for this case. Having shown by the\\nforegoing that the line of contact is only a straight line on the surface of a\\nstretch-out of the column, it can very readily be seen how ridges represent\u00c2\u00ac\\ning spiral flutes can be produced in the flat or a stretch-out of a column by\\nthe use of a brake. Provision must be made for the extra amount of mate\u00c2\u00ac\\nrial required for the flutes thus produced on the stretch-out of the column.\\nThe foregoing described method is a favorite one with many cornice makers\\nto accomplish the desired effect on work of this class, providing the re\u00c2\u00ac\\nquire! projections are within reasonable bounds, or are not too large to al\u00c2\u00ac\\nlow the stretch-out after the aforesaid flutes have been bent up in the brake\\non the flat piece to be readily bent and formed to the proper required shape,\\nwhatever that may be, to suit the work in hand. One of the simplest\\nmethods to accomplish the desired result for the problem as presented by\\nFig. 136 is to simply bend up a strip of the required profile as shown by D;\\nthis made in convenient length or such lengths as are demanded in this\\nproblem to miter to the horizontal and raking cornices which join the tur\u00c2\u00ac\\nrets. After the pieces are bent to the shape as profile D demands, they can\\nbe subjected to the process of running the edges 1 and 2 through the rolls\\nof the crimping machine, Fig. 123. By this treatment the required degree\\nof curvature is obtained, which with the proper twist given by the workman\\nto the flutes, cause the same to assume the appearance of the spiral of a\\nscrew as demanded for the flutes in order to conform to the shape they must\\nhave to fulfill the conditions as set forth by Fig. 136. The foregoing dea-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0167.jp2"}, "168": {"fulltext": "153 CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ncribed method is the simplest one by which the work involved in the pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nduction of these spiral flutes cxn be done, and is to be recommended for the\\nreasons that they are the cheapest produced, easiest made, neatest and\\nstrongest shape that the flutes could be made, so as to meet at once all the\\nrequirements demanded by the drawing, so as to be readily mitered and\\nfitted to the column X of Rig. 136. The concentric circles give a plan\\nview of the sections of the flutes. The profile G to H shows the outline of\\nthe horizontal cornice No. 6 of Fig. 101, while the profile from point R to\\nS shows the outline of the line of contact that the raking cornice of the\\ngable has where it joins the turret. These explanations show the student\\nfullv where the ends of the flutes end or miter to the two cornices on the\\n4\\nface of the column X of Fig. 136. The third and last method which I will\\ndescribe to produce the spiral flutes is as follows: By this method it is pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nposed to produce the flutes out of three separate pieces or parts, namely:", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0168.jp2"}, "169": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n159\\nthe top and bottom parts and the vertical face or side-parts. In developing\\nthe top and bottom spiral stretch-outs the fact must not be lost sight of\\nthat a template cut-out of a flat piece of metal for a shape as demanded by\\nthis problem must, after being so cut, be subjected to a certain amount of\\nhammering and stretching, more or less, as the case demands, in order that\\nthe spiral flat piece will conform to the shape that it must have in order to\\nfit correctly against the column and at the same time present a horizontal\\nplane out to its outer edge from any point of its surface, and this in regular 1\\nprogressive order, as demanded by the line of contact as described before.\\nThis in brief is the problem to be solved. By the m ithod describeJ in the\\nfollowing, the best possible shape is evolved that can be produced in the\\nflat, the only stretching necessary to make the spiral strips fit as demanded\\nis around the edges in order to compensate for the loss which the surface\\nof the strip sustains in drawing it up to the shipe as shown in Fig. 186.\\nAll laps and allowances for joints are extra and will have to be allowed for\\nwhen the pieces are.gotten oat for the spirals. The first step to take is to\\nmake the line B to 0 equal to one-half of the circumference of the column\\nX; connect point G as shown by dotted line to point A wh ch is where the\\nine of contact occurs that the spiral has with the column in one-balf\\nrevolution of it around the column. Make the distance from point C to\\npoint n equal to one-half diameter of the column X. Erect the line n\\nfrom point n at right-angles to line 0 B. At the point at which the line n\\ncuts the line 0 to A is the end of the radius by which the inner curve of\\nthe required pattern for the spirals is cut, using C as center. The circular\\nline o being the inner line, it remains only to draw an outer Line, corres*", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0169.jp2"}, "170": {"fulltext": "ponding in position to a distance away from line o equal to the width that\\nthe required spiral is to have; this has been done and the line k is the re\u00c2\u00ac\\nsult. In the practical application of this rule as to the length of the dif\u00c2\u00ac\\nferent flutes required for the turrets, the student must make them as re\\nquired according to the various measurements to fit each particular one for\\nitself. Fit the miters to the cornices by trimming the faces of the differ\u00c2\u00ac\\nent parts, as required in each instance. Each flute has a top and bottom\\nspiral face; the vertical face is merely a flat straight strip equal in width to\\nthe vertical height of the drawing for the same at any point of its face.\\nThe manner of fastening the flutes together is best accomplished by first\\nsoldering the spiral pieces to the column and then soldering the cap or\\nouter face to the burred edges of the spiral. In this way a good job can\\nbe done. It would also be well for the workman, before he attempts to\\nsolder the spiral strips to the column, to mark the line of contact on the\\nsame in order that the mark will serve as a guide so that the strips will be\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0170.jp2"}, "171": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORE MANUAL\\n161\\nCorrectly placed when soldered fast to the face of the column. If these\\nlines of contact have not been marked on the metal before the columns\\nhave been formed to shape, and which is more than probable that they\\nwould not have been in a case like these turrets, I would advise to draw\\nthe triangle C B A, connected by the hypothenuse A to C (which latter lin\\nis the line of contact for the upper edge of the spiral flute Y) out on paper\\nAlso make similar angles for the other lines of contact, that is, if those\\ni\\nalready made will not answer for the purpose of being used over again in a\\nnew position. If one of the foregoing described angles is cut out and the\\npoints A and B fixed correspondingly against the column X at points A\\nand B, then if the triangular piece is wrapped around the column so that\\npoint C of it comes to point B of the column, a line drawn to the outline\\ntraced by the bypothebuse of the triangle against the face of the vertical\\ncylindrical column X of the turret is the result as shown by the drawings\\nof Fig. 136. This concludes ihn complete exposition of all the patterns,\\nmethods and tools used to produce a complete turret as shown by the Fig.\\nlOi.\\nHaving disposed of and given a description of the entire details of all\\ngable as well as the horizontal cornices, and a thorough exposition of the\\nmethods by which the patterns are developed for the pillars or turrets as\\nshown by the Fig. 101, Chapter XXII, I will next give a detailed exposition\\nof the remaining members of the cornices that have not as yet been de\\nscribed and accorded detailed treatment.\\nThe two paneled end copings I will describe first. A front view of\\nIhese and also of their relative positions, together with the other members\\nwhich I will describe, are all shown by front elevation This view shows\\nV A 1 -Scal-0 1 to t/u. ShtL\\nFio 137\\nthe front e levations of, first the end copings, the trusses or the head\\nblocks, then the crown or cre3t cornice and surmounting it the 1 square\\ncresting; the two finials and the front of the dormer window are shown to\\nthe scale of to the foot.\\nIn order to render the laying out of the copings easier, and\\nto a more adaptable scale for ready work. I have drawn the profile\\nFig. 137 to the scale of 1 to the foot. This is a so the scale\\nthat Figs, 95 and 9G, of Chapter XIX are drawn to, which give a", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0171.jp2"}, "172": {"fulltext": "162\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\npartial front and side elevation of the right hand end coping as\\nshown by the front elevation of the cornice and of which Fig. 137\\nis the profile. The first step to take to obtain all the necessary data for\\nthe laying out of the patterns for these copings is as follows: First meas\\nureup the girt or stretch-out. This has been done and is shown in Fig. 137\\nto be 44 Then the next measure to be ascertained is the entire length\\nof the coping. This is 9 5 long over all; that is, if the lower part of the\\nbead block is to be incorporated with the coping; or, in other words, if the\\nupper end of the coping is to serve as the lower section of the head block,\\nthe joining together of this member with the coping proper occurring at the\\nline shown by the dotted line 2 to 2 of Fig. 90 of Chapter XIX, the fore\u00c2\u00ac\\ngoing would be one way of planning out and measuring up this member.\\nAnother, and in my estimation a preferable way, would be to make the co\u00c2\u00ac\\nping m two sections, one section 8 long, or as long as the material will\\nallow, and the other sections top or upper end of the coping could be made\\nas shown by Fig. 138. This figure shows the base of a trus3 or head block\\nand also the upper end of the coping all made in one section. This method\\nI regard as the simplest, and resulting in the most sub3tmtial form for a\\ncoping for the desired end sought in this case, therefore I have made use\\nof it to the exclusion of any other method that would perhaps serve to the\\nsame end, but would not be as easily made or be of such simple construc\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion as the method described and made use of for these members. Another\\npoint, by this method both the cop ngs can be made each out of one sheet\\nof 24 by 96 iron so that for these members there need be absolutely no\\nwaste of iron if the mtthods are used to lay them out as are shown and ex\u00c2\u00ac\\nplained in the following:\\nFig. 137 shows the cross-section of the panels to be J high from the\\nface of the coping and also that the inclined flat parts of the panels are 3J\\nwide. The extreme length of the entire panels over all is 7 long, as deduc-.\\ntions from the various elevations show.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0172.jp2"}, "173": {"fulltext": "Cornice work manual i#8\\nof cutting the shapes desired is different, the final result when the shapes are\\nJ lb Ju Fqoi\\nFig 137\\nformed up is the same. I will only show two methods for these members,\\nalthough there are several other combinations to cut these patterns that\\ncould be used and which would all lead to the same result. I regard these\\nas ample for all reasonable requirements to cover this case. Method num\u00c2\u00ac\\nber one: square a sheet of iron 24 by 96 then draw lines at right-angles", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0173.jp2"}, "174": {"fulltext": "164 CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nby lines a, a and b, b of Fig. 139. This leaves 7 of space between these\\nline 3 so drawn, which is also the full length of the raised panels on the\\ncopings. Next, divide and spice the sheet into as many parts as the profile,\\nFig. 137, demands for the stretch-out of the copings; that is, across.\\nThis has been done in Fig. 139 and the sheet is shown to be divided into\\nnine parallel parts, each one of the correct width as demanded according\\nto the position it has or fills in the stretch-out of a profile such as Fig.\\n137 is. Ig will be observed that the two center spaces, exch one of which\\nis 3| wide, are divided by line x, x, or the highest point that the panel\\nhas when formed up to shape. This dividing* line is as a mat er of course\\n1\\\\ shorter than the panel at the base or where the panel joins the coping,", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0174.jp2"}, "175": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n165\\nas between the points o and n of Fig. 139. Next, draw oat tne triangular\\nspaces S and S using the line x, x as center line, mike the distance from\\nO the center point of the triangle S to point t on line x to x, equal to the\\nslant of ihe panel, which is 3f Then the line k, t to R of the triangle\\nS is to be equal in length to the distance between points 1 and 2 of the\\nprofile, Fig. 137. Add to this, as shown ia tbe drawing, the J strip and\\nthen the remainder of the full she^t up topoiut x\\\\ Next, draw Jine 1, 2,\\n3 to 4 at right-angles to line x, x space off the required material between\\nthe lines 1 to 4, as shown between thehe points in Fi^.\\n139, an I as demanded by ihe profile, Fig. 137. Next. cut the\\nbottom section B on line 1 to 2, then up J to point x K, then to\\nC next to R down f to point 3 and then to point 4. This would com\u00c2\u00ac\\nplete the section B of the c ping as far as the cutting out p trt by this\\nmethod i\u00c2\u00bb concerned, proviling that the lap3 as sh wn were a l to be left\\non the main piece ot the stretch out. These l ips may be left as wide as\\nthe f space and also what is left from tbe difference between the slant\\ndeck of the panel and the straight horizontal covering of the top of the copings;\\nthat is, if the covering is laid out in the flat. Just how to arrange for the\\nJaps is so clearly shown in the draw ng for both ends in this case th it further\\ndescription is unnecessary. The top end can be cut on line b c n to\\nb, so that all the laps are to be allowed for this end on the top section.\\nFi$ 140.\\nThe laps are all shown in this figure to lay under instead of over the lower\\nsection. I have shown them this way as some cornice men prefer to solder", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0175.jp2"}, "176": {"fulltext": "166 CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nthe laps thus, claiming that they can soak them better with solder when\\nwork is in position on a building. But as these members can, by the\\nmethod described, be finished wholly in the shop, this way of lapping the\\njoints would not be of any material gain over any other plan. If the\\nstudent cares to reverse the order in which the laps are shown he is at\\nliberty to do so. Fig. 140 shows the profile to which the two end sections\\nare to be bent and broke when forming them to shape as demanded for\\ntheir proper fitting together with the main part of the stretch-out, which is\\nto be formed to 3hape in sections, as the Fig. 137 shows. The foregoing\\nis one way to lay out the paneled copings. Fig. 141 illustrates another\\nmethod for the same purpose. This figure is drawn to the scale of 2 to\\nFij.m.\\nthe foot. From a to b shows the elevation or profile; the plan view is also\\nshown above line c to d for part of the lower end of the paneled part of the\\nright-hand end wall coping of the building as shown by Fig. 89. By using\\nthe method shown by Fig. 141 the entire paneled coping can be made out\\nof one solid piece of iron, it being only necessary to cut out the required\\nstrips as shown by Fij. 141 so as to allow the iroi to be readily formed to\\nthe shape demanded by the profile of the same figure. The preliminary", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0176.jp2"}, "177": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n167\\nsteps for this stretch-out are the same as described for the method shown\\nby Fig. 139 as far as the division of the sheet for the various surfaces pre\u00c2\u00ac\\nsented by the coping in the profile is concerned. The foregoing applies to\\nthe entire coping, panel, etc., up to the line c a of both ends of the cop\u00c2\u00ac\\nings. Beyond this line toward the ends is where the really difficult part of\\nthe patterns to be laid out in this problem will be found. In the elevatiou\\neach surface of the coping presented is numbered and correspondingly\\nnumbered in the stretch-out. The parts 1, 2 and 9 may be drawn out fully\\nthe whole length of the sheets, as these parts of the profile are all bent only\\none way; that is, lengthways, the only point to be determined for them, is\\nthe length that they should have down or up from line c d, as the case\\nmay be. This is shown by the lines e f and s t. Then also the distance\\ndown from line c d to the dotted line m n can be made equal in length for\\nall the sections numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8 and 9, but not for the sections 5\\nand G of the stretch-out, Fig. 141.\\nConnect the points 0 and O of sections 5 and 6 with the center point\\nX, as shown by the dotted line. Next make line X to h equal in length to\\nthe slant of the panel; connect point h with point 0 of section 5. The\\nline X to h is at right-angles to the line h to 0. Continue the line X, h\\ndown to point] k, making from point h to point k equal in length to the\\ndistance that the profile shows for the height that the panel is raised up\\nfrom the bed of the coping, namely, J and also to this add the length\\nbetween line m and e. This has been done. Now connect point K with\\npoint y, and this point again with point 0. Next connect the triangle\\nshown p, y and the 2\\\\ base to the position it has, as shown. Then con\u00c2\u00ac\\nnect the points f and u of section 3, and from point u connect to point 0,\\nthus completing the lower end of the section 4. A similar operation has\\nto be done for the lines of the sections 6, 7 and 8 on the other side of the\\ncenter line of the panel. All the foregoing described lines and how they\\nare to be disposed of in the drawing is so plainly shown in Fig. 141 that it\\nis needless to give a further description, as they can be readily understood\\nwithout it. To cut the waste material from this stretch-out so as to allow\\nits proper forming up to shape as demanded, proceed as follows: Cut from\\npoint e to f, then to u and to 0. If these joints were to be butted together\\nthe course of (he cutting could be continued from point 0 to r to w, from\\nw to K, and from K to center point X. This would ^complete one-half or\\none side of the coping. But it is not at all probable that a job of this de\u00c2\u00ac\\nscription would be put together with the joints butted. They would proba\u00c2\u00ac\\nbly be lapped, which is the proper and better way, so provision must be\\nmade for the required laps. Material for the laps as shown is to be left\\nwhen cutting the patterns.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0177.jp2"}, "178": {"fulltext": "163\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nWhen forming up a piece of work such as this coping presents, if laid\\nout as in Fig. 141, it would be best to break up the side shape first to the\\nprofile as demanded the coping should have when finished. After this is\\ndone the end pieces would have to be flattened and straightened out again\\nand then formed to the required shape that they should have as demanded\\nfor them by the plan and profile of Fig. 141. The method as described\\nin the foregoing is one by which the entire lower 8 lengths of the copings\\ncan be made out of a single piece. Which of the two methods as (described\\nand shown by Figs. 139 and 141 is the better I leave the student to decide\\nfor himself. I have used both methods in actual practice and have found\\nboth ways to have some good points which would particularly recommend\\none or the other for some particular occasion. It is well\u00e2\u0080\u0099to be able to have\\neither method at one\u00e2\u0080\u0099s command when occasion requires the use of such\\nknowledge.\\nThe next members of this cornice which I will describe in detail are\\nthe head blocks. Fig. 95 shows a full front elevation of one of these, while\\nFig. 96 shows a side view. Both figures are drawn to the scale of 1 to\\nthe foot. As it would not be advisable to make such a structure as one of\\nthese head blocks out of large single pieces of material for the simple rea\u00c2\u00ac\\nson that such a method would be too wasteful, as the iron could not be\\ncut to advantage, to meet this case the following order and methods of as\u00c2\u00ac\\nsembling and proportioning the various parts are suggested and recom\u00c2\u00ac\\nmended. A neat and well made piece of work is. the result, if the direc\u00c2\u00ac\\ntions as given are followed for the construction of the head blooks under\\nconsideration. The first section which will be given in detail is the base\\npart of one of the head blocks. Fig. 188 shows the side elevations.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0178.jp2"}, "179": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL 169\\nThe outline bounding points A to F show outer part of right hand end\\nblock, and also the continuation of the side covering of the end wall above\\nthe coping as described before. For the inner part that fits against the\\ncrown or deck cornice the line H to K shows the inner boundary. As it is\\nintended that these side pieces are to have the front part of the base sol\u00c2\u00ac\\ndered and laid up against them, suitable laps and edges must be provided for\\nthis purpose. This has been done as shown on the outline A to C of Fig.\\n138. The J x9|- long patt as shown by the strip X X is added at the top\\nabove line A to B to provide for a suitable lap up into the mrin part of the\\nhead block to fasten the same to the base, and an equally wide but 12\\nlong strip is also added to the stretch-out for the front of the base as shown\\nby Fig. 142. As the head blocks and base are to show a 12 front the\\nstretch-out has been figured at that measurement for width; the length is\\n26 as demanded by the outline A to C of Fig. 138. All the bends are\\nshown on the stretch-out, Fig. 142, by the lines 2 to 11; these corresponding\\nFig 14\\nto all the various bands of the profile A to C of Fig. 138. Cut the two\\nside profiles as directed and also the front; form thi* latter piece to shape\\nand solder the three pieces together as demanded by the drawings. This\\nfinishes the base part of a head block ready to have the upper sections\\njoined to it, which I will next describe. Fig. 143 shows the stretch-out of\\nthe back and the two sides of a block. The back is made 12 high and\\n12 wide; at the bottom of the same an allowance has been made, shown\\nby the f strip X, X, for a flange to be laid off at right-angles to the verti\u00c2\u00ac\\ncal side of the block. The same amount for (dges has also been allowed", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0179.jp2"}, "180": {"fulltext": "170\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nfor the inner side at its bottom edge, as well as at the top of all the three\\nparts of this stretch-out; the top edge is to be turned inward while the two\\nbottom edges are to be turned outward from the body of the truss or head\\nblock. The two ornamental rectangular tracings of lines shown by 1 and\\nV\\nj Prof\u00e2\u0080\u0099tit.\\nVc\\nScale 1 to lie Foo t\\nfrom b to c, to be made out of one piece. A complete stretch out of the\\ndiamond-faced cap is shown by B of Fig. 144. This part when formed up\\nto shape will fit over the edge S of the front frame and thus complete the\\ntwo on each one of the sides is to be traced or creased a design to pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nduce the effect as shown by the lines on the finished head blocks. The\\ntwo parts shown by the projections 3 and 4 at each end of the stretch-out\\nare here introduced in case it should be intended to mak*e two strips, shaped", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0180.jp2"}, "181": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n171\\nthe same as strips 3 and 4, thus forming the outer frame of the head block,\\nor, to be more explicit, this woul i finish the outer part of the front as\\nshown by the profile from a to b, Fjg 144. This leaves an edge for the cap\\npart, or a shape as demanded by the profile of Fig. 144. C of Fig. 144 shows\\nstill another method to make the front pirt of the head block. This is ac\u00c2\u00ac\\ncomplished by making the front out of four pieces. From a to b has to be\\nmade so as to correspond to the profile of the front. Each bend and break\\nmust be marked in its correct relative position; then each division must be\\nmarked and cut to the correct miter so that the pieces when b.-ht up to\\nshape will fit together perfectly. All this has been done for the stretch-out\\nC of Fig. 144 according to the data deduced from the front elevation, Fid.\\n95, and the profile of Fig. 144. After the front, back and two sides of the\\nhead block have been laid out according to whatever method is deter\u00c2\u00ac\\nmine, cut the parts out and form them to shape as demanded by the\\nprofile of each respective part; then solder the parts together and join this\\nto the base part of the head blocks before described. Fig. 145 shows the\\nprofile of the half of the front and also the side of a very desirably-shaped\\ntop to put on the block. To cut the template for a top which is to be\\nraised to the required shape as demanded by the profile shown, it must have\\nthe sides curved outward, as shown in Fig. 145. How much to curve the\\nedges outward from a straight edge is determined by measuring the swell\\nof the profile, or the difference between the two distances, which deter\u00c2\u00ac\\nmines the amount of swell or curve to bo given to the template at its\\nedges, as shown by Fig. 145 for the top of the head-block. After the top\\nis cut out, raised and fitted, it may be fastened permanently to its position\\non the top end of the sides.\\nFig. 14G shows the tapering support for the ball surmounting the\\nhead-block; the numerals 1 to 4 give the outline and the stretch-out is\\nshown by points 2, 4, 5 and 6 As will be seen, the stretch-out has been", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0181.jp2"}, "182": {"fulltext": "172\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ndeveloped by the usual method used to lay out the frustum of. a cone; X is\\ncenter point for both the elevation as well as the stretch-out of this part.\\nFig. 147 shows the elevations and also the two disks which are used for\\nP,^,le% C^3\\nthese head-blocks. The larger one is placed on the top of the head-block\\nand the tapering section described and shown by Fig.-146 is fastened to\\nthis, while the smaller disk is placed between the same section and the ball\\nat the extreme top of the head-blocks. The positions of these disks just\\ndescribed, and also the tapering conical-shaped support, as well as all the\\nother details of the pieces which constitute the make-up of these head\\nblocks, are fully shown in Figs. 95 and 96. These two figures also show\\nthe position in which the cresting post is placed against the inside of the\\nhead-blocks. As these view\u00c2\u00a7 denote, the cresting is made 1 square.\\nFig. 95 shows that there are two lines of horizontal cresting supported\\nby square upright posts 18 apart from center to center. A of Fig. 148 shows\\nc\\nFig", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0182.jp2"}, "183": {"fulltext": "GORNICE WORK MANUAL 178\\nhow the full or solid posts are laid out in the flat before the posts are bent up\\nto shape; C shows how the finished rail looks in section; B, shows the half\\nposts, one of which is given in Fig. 95 soldered up against the head-block.\\nEach one of the upright posts is surmounted by a 1\u00c2\u00a3 ball. In making the\\nsquare bars for the cresting make them as long as possible and have\\nas few joints as convenient. This saves time in the making and also se\u00c2\u00ac\\ncures a neater job, being stiffer and firmer in every respect than if short\\nbars and consequently many more joints are to be fitted together. The deck\\ncornice, a profile of which is shown by line H to K of Fig. 138, measures\\n18 wide for girt, and is 26 3 long. This molding can be made in two sec\u00c2\u00ac\\ntions as to length, tho joints occurring where the apex of the gable cuts\\ninto the front of the deck cornice. For this member 2G in. wide sheets\\nmay be made use of, the sheets being split in two lengthways.\\nThe next members of the designs which I will discuss, are", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0183.jp2"}, "184": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n174\\nthe two finials of both the gable and the dormer window e. Fig. 97 shows\\na full front view of the gible finial, while Fig. 98 shows a side v,. w of\\nthe same; boih views are drawn to the scale of J in. to the foot. Fig.\\n149 shows by B the stretch-out of one-half of the front or rear elevation of\\nthe fiuial for the main gable. The strip X X is intended to be bent out\u00c2\u00ac\\nward and is to be used for a flange to fasten the finial down solid to the\\nroof by long screws, etc. The part Sis half of the quarter-piece which folds\\nover and closes the square opening at the top of section B of the finial.\\nThe part A is the stretch-out of the strip demanded for one of the ends of\\nthis finial shown by the side view Fig. 98. All the numbers marked on\\nthe same correspond to the front B of the same figure. The dotted lines\\nshow the lap to be allowed for these parts. When cutting out the fron~\\npart for this finial, of which part B of Fig. 149 is just one-half, or one\\nside only, of the front, continue the cut along the line from point 1 to a,\\nthen gradually bend the part from point 6 to point a at the end of the cut\\noutward, causing it to assume the shape of a spiral scroll. Then, when\\ncutting out the piece A for the side, the part S, as shown from point G to\\nthe end at S, can be formed to the curve G to a. The raw edge of the flat\\nfront part B is to be soldered to this outward guiding part S, causing the\\npart B to assume the spiral curve that is demanded for it by Fig. 98 for", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0184.jp2"}, "185": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n175\\nthese parts of the finial when the parts are finally soldered together. The\\npart S, which is to be added on the strip used on the other end of the\\nfinial, must be the reverse of that shown on the strip A of Fig. 149\\nThe parts described for the finial so far can now be put together, if it is so\\ndesired.\\nFig. 150 shows the development of the three tapering sections de\\nmanded for the staff and vane for the finial. These three sections are to\\nbe cut out, then formed to shape and their seams fastened -either soldered", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0185.jp2"}, "186": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nor riveted, as desirable. Fig. 151 shows the manner in which to make the\\nswivel joint for the vane. The entire pipe part can be made of f in. pipe.\\nMake the section a long enough to fit in a socket soldered on the cap S of\\nsection B bf Fig 149, and place it so that when the section A of Fig. 150\\nis soldered to this part the swivel joint will have ample room and free play\\nto turn easily, and not interfere with the tapering section a of Fig. 150,\\nwhich fits over the pipe a of Fig. 151 when the same is placed in position.\\nThe foregoing points being provided for, the pipe a can be permanently\\nfastened to the section A of Fig. 150, which has previously been soldered\\nto the base of the finial. The arrow vane, as shown in Fig. 151, consists\\nof two pieces of J in. pipe, which are screwed into the ends of the cross\\nX. Then fastened so that they cannot become loose or disarranged from\\nthe fixed position they are constantly to have, so that they always present\\ntheir flat sides to the view in a vertical position. How to construct and\\nfasten the spear head and also the feather end of the vane to the two\\nartns or pieces of piping shown by C and D in Fig. 151 has been shown\\nand explained in these articles on former occasions and need not be gone\\nover again. It will be observed that the sleeve nut n on pipe A is fas\u00c2\u00ac\\ntened permanently into position, then the cross X above this, which has", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0186.jp2"}, "187": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nbeen enlarged so that it turns easily around the section of pipe above the\\nsleeve, rests on sleeve n and cannot sink down any lower, As shown in\\nFig. 97 a ball is fitted around the cross hiding it from-view when the\\nfinial is complete. The two sections and the two balls, as shown in view\\nFig. 97, can now he formed and put together, and to the ball which is\\nfitted around the swivel cross of the arrow vane. The section of pip 3\\nwhich shows above the cross X is to be long enough to fit up into the tap\u00c2\u00ac\\nering section b to the second ball, thus rendering it impossible for the\\nheavy vane and the two lighter tapering sections to lift up or off no matter\\nhow strong the wind may blow. By the arrangement as described in the\\nforegoing the two small sections by reason of their being fastened to the\\ncross or swivel joint turn along with the arrow vane every time it turns,\\nbut as these sections always present a vertical view and always have the\\nFiji 152.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0187.jp2"}, "188": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n178\\nsame position, this does not alter the general appearance of the finial in\\nthe least as far as the two sections above the arrow vane are concerned, no\\nmatter which way the vane itself may be tamed.\\nThe ornamental ball and star, as well as the other ornament shown by\\nthe front view, Fig. 97, can either be made to suit the design by hammer\u00c2\u00ac\\ning them up by hand or they can be selected from among the many styles\\nof stamped ornaments on the market. Designs that come very near to the\\ndrawings shown can be had from almost any manufacturer in this line\\nThe foregoing gives in brief the complete method of constructing a finial\\nsuch as the designs, Figs. 97 and 98, call for and cover this case fully. Fig.\\n152 gives the complete drawing for all the parts of the finial shown by Fig.\\n99 on the dormer; a side view is also shown of the same by Fig. 100. The\\nvarious parts as shown by Fig. 152 are developed as follows: First draw\\nout the front and back parts of the base of the finial as shown by D of Fig.\\n152; allow for laps as shown by the dotted lines, and also for the flanges\\nX X on both the front as weil as the rear piece; then measure up and\u00c2\u00abcut\\nout the end or narrow strips, one of which is shown by the section E.\\nTwo of these are needed. Then get out the tapering sections 1 and 2, The\\nstretch-out of each one of these is shown by A and B. Form these parts to\\nshape as well as all the rest of the parts of the entire finial, then assemble\\nthem in their correct positions to each other and solder and fasten them\\npermanently together, making the finial ready to be put in its final position\\non the dormer roof. The members next in order to describe, and being\\nthe nearest and in a measure the connecting links between those members\\nalready described, are the ridge crestings of both the main gable and the\\ndormer window. Fig. 95 shows a cross-section of the main cresting,\\nwhile in Fig. 96 is shown a side elevation of the cresting where it connects\\nwith the deck cornice.\\nFrom the measurements deducted from these two views the stretch\u00c2\u00ac\\nout as shown by the accompanying Fig. 153 has been drawn. Only one-\\nhalf of the-first and last upward curving part onto which the 4 bales are\\nfastened that surmount the cresting is shown. The center line shows where\\nthe drawing for each of these parts ends. The part A is that of one side\\nof the cresting which joins the finial, while the part B shows where the\\ncresting fits and joins to the deck cornice. The stretch-out from a to b gives\\nthe entire length that the outline of the profile for the cresting has as\\nshown by Fig. 95. I did not deem it necessary to show the full length of\\nthe cresting horizontally when laying out the full patterns; the student can\\nadd the parts omitted himself. The width of the strip which is to be", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0188.jp2"}, "189": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n17\\nsoldered on the top of the cresting, and which holds the two sides apart at\\ntheir proper distance, is to be as is shown in Fig. 95 immediately under\\nthe 4 ball shown in that view. In putting this cresting together have the two\\nsides formed correctly to profile, then let the strip lap over the sides about\\nan eighth of an inch; solder the same fast, then fasten the three balls in\\ntheir proper position as demanded for this design as shown in this case.\\nFig. 154 shows the stretch-out of the dormer window cresting. All the\\ndirections as given for the larger gabla cresting can also be applied to this\\ncase, suiting the measurements for this stretch-out as the Figs. 99 and 100\\ndemand. The end a of Fig. 154 shows where the cresting fits to the fiuial,\\nwhile the end b shows where it lays up against the attic roof with the\\nflange c. Thi\u00c2\u00a7 cresting differs somewhat in its dimensions, but in every\\nother respect is similar to the one shown in Fig. 158, and is to be treated\\nin its construction in all its parts by similar methods as have been de\u00c2\u00ac\\nscribed for the cresting, Fig. 153.\\nThe profile of one side of the cresting, also placed in its proper relative\\nposition, the profile of the deck cornice shows how the proper outline of\\nthe stretch-out of Fig. 158 is obtained. First the profile a of the cresting is\\ndivided into as many parls as the student wishes, then from points thus\\ndetermined extend lines to the profile of the cornice against which the\\ncresting miters. Then draw .a line any distance away from the profile b,\\nas the line d, e. has been drawn. When the stretch-out of the cresting is\\nlaid out draw a line corresponding to the line d, e on the,stretch-out, and", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0189.jp2"}, "190": {"fulltext": "180\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ntranspose the distances found on the lines 1 to 12 of the profiles to those\\nlines that correspond to them and are drawn on the stretch-out. The dis\\ntances so found and established determine the outline or the position that\\nthe miter line has, which is to be cut out on the sides of the cresting as\\nshown in Fig. 153. This completes the description that is needed for this\\nmember, so that the student can readily lay out all the parts that enter\\ninto the construction of the two styles of crestings shown in Figs. 153 and\\n154.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0190.jp2"}, "191": {"fulltext": "Cornice work manual ibi\\nThe last member of the design, Fig. 89, that now remains to be de\u00c2\u00ac\\nscribed and all its parts laid out and explained, is the dormer window shown\\nby Fig. 99 for front view, and by Fig. 100, the side view. Fig. 155 gives,\\na working drawing for the entire front and also for the sides of the dormer\\nwindow. The drawings that this figure gives do not show the details of\\nthe cornice for the dormer but merely gives the correct position that these\\nmembers have toward the others as far as necessary, so that the parts di\u00c2\u00ac\\nrectly adjoining or which are a part of the members of the cornice on the\\ndormer window can be laid out. As is seen by the drawings the dormer\\nis entirely flat with the exception of the projection at the profile of the oval\\nwindow and the square bead or edge X, X, and also the spiral scroll or\\nvolute D shows. The distance and shape that this last-mentioned member\\nof the front has outward from the face of the dormer is shown by B of the\\nsame figure. The shape that the sides have is shown by the right-angled\\ntriangular shape 1, 2 and 3. These pieces are to be cut out to this shape,\\nand are to have sufficient material allowed at the edge 1 to 3 to lay against\\nthe attic roof. This edge is shown in the drawing by the strip 1 to 1\\nIt is there shown to be 2 wide, but may be made to a greater width if the\\nstudent so desires; then the top edge 1 to 2 can be made so that it will\\nhook.on to the lower edge of the horizontal cornice, when these members\\nare plaoed in position the joint thus made can be laid over or double-seamed\\ntogether. The dotted line S to T shows the position which the sides have\\nin relation to the other parts of the dormer. If the workman should deter\u00c2\u00ac\\nmine to have the sides and also the part which is directly behind the\\nscroll D embracing all the space shown outside the dotted line S to T all\\nout of one piece he can do so. These two parts could easily be made out\\nof one piece of iron for this case, particularly as the entire width of both\\ndoes not exceed 26 If so made the two parts could be bent at right-\\nangles to each other at or on the line S to T. Of course there would have\\nto be two pieces made as described in the foregoing, one for each side of\\nthe dormer, if this method were used to attain the result aimed at. Some\\ncutters would make the sides separate from the back coverings of the scrolls,\\nhaving the joints between the parts come in the corner of S to T. Either\\nway may be taken to do this part of the dormer covering as suits the stu\u00c2\u00ac\\ndent. If he should decide to adopt the last-described method he will have\\nto get out four separate pieces for these parts, two for the sides and two for\\nthe back parts of the scrolls.\\nTo lay out the front of the dormer proceed as follows: Draw a com\u00c2\u00ac\\nplete outline of the front, bounded on the top by the line m n, which is\\nthe lower end of the gable cornice. A suitable lap or enough material is to", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0191.jp2"}, "192": {"fulltext": "132 CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nbe allowed in addition to make a connection between the gable cornice and\\nthe flat front. It is presumed that the student is aware that Fig. 155 is\\nonly one-half of the front and in the directions given it is meant that the\\nfront extends up to a point, although this is not shown m the figure, but\\nfor this point Fig. 99 is lo be referred to, which gives a mdre complete\\nfront view of the dormer than Fig. 155. I did not think it necessary to\\ngive the full view in Fig. 155, but only the more important details. The", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0192.jp2"}, "193": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n183\\nflat front is to be bounded on the sides by the line from X X to point\\n4 then from point 4 continue the bottom line to point 3. For the other\\nside of the front the directions apply the same as for the side described, only\\nduplicated to the reverse in all its features from the left-hand side as shown\\nby Fig. 155. After having made the foregoing drawings, or at least deter\u00c2\u00ac\\nmined on the boundaries of the outline demanded for this front, the next\\nquestion will be, how to cover the same\u00e2\u0080\u0094whether it would be best to use\\ntwo 26 wide sheets of iron with a seam in the middle of the front and\\nthe outside edge of each sheet cut to conform to the shape as shown by\\nlines m m and X X, to point W to W, then continue around curve Y to\\npoint 4, then to point 3 or the center joint of the two sheets.\\nThen if the foregoing method is followed the spiral section or volute\\ncan be made separate and can very handily be put on to the front after the\\ncenter sheets are put on the same. The oval opening for the window is to\\nbecutoutof the sheet to the measurements demanded by the drawing; a\\nhalf-inch edge is to be allowed which can be turned up and outward from\\nthe flat front and on which the metal window frame is to fit over. In Fig.\\n155 is shown one-half front elevation of this oval window; then A shows\\nthe profile or section at A A\\nThe window frame is shown by sectional view of the frame by F. This\\nsection shows how to arrange the different members that compose the\\nframe so that each part fits nicely one over the other. The frame as\\nshown by this method is composed of three parts. To lay out these parts,\\ncut three straight strips, equal in length to the entire circumference that\\neach has as shown by the front view in Fig. 155; then make each as wide\\nas demanded for it by the profile F. This dotie bend all three strips as\\nshown by profile F, bub do not make the small bends which connect the\\npieces together. After the three sections 1, 2 and 3 of the window frames\\nhave been made as far as directed, take each one separately and stretch\\nthe curves for the top or outside surfaces by hammering them with a\\nstretching hammer until they are shaped and conform to the curves as de\u00c2\u00ac\\nmanded that each one should have, as shown by the front view of tho win\u00c2\u00ac\\ndow in Fig. 155.\\nAfter the three sections have been shaped as wanted, the small up\u00c2\u00ac\\nward or outward edges may be turned on sections 1 and 2. No. 3\\nhas a small edge turned inward or toward the flat front; this edge serves to\\nfasten the small 1 strip at its outer edge around the entire outer edge of\\nthe window-frame, while the inner edge of the 1 strip is fastened over the\\ni edge which is turned out on the flat front of the dormer. After the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0193.jp2"}, "194": {"fulltext": "184 cornice: work manual\\nthree sections have been made ready, as far as described in the foregoing,\\nthey may then be joined and soldered together so that when they are com\u00c2\u00ac\\npleted they will assume the shape as the profile A shows for profile and\\nas the oval curves show for front view. In getting out the volute-shaped\\nscrolls, cut out pieces of iron as the curve from points U to 4, X and W\\nfrom W to U. Then when the pieces are to be made to the shape, as B\\nshows them by a side view, continue the cut on curve W to the center\\npoint K. The square bead or edge shown from X to the center K can be\\nsoldered to the same after the projecting point of the scroll has been done.\\nHow this operation is accomplished has been explained when the descrip\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion of Fig. 149 was given for a similar problem.\\nThe ornaments shown on this front, if so desired, can either be raised\\nby hand or stamped zinc ornaments can be used as suits the student. In\\nthe foregoing has been shown how to arrange the sheets of iron if they are\\nused with the seams vertically. In the following I will describe how to\\narrange the sheets if they are to be used cross-ways or with the seams and\\nlaps placed horizontally. If this latter style is to be adopted to construct\\nthe fiat part of the dormer window front use 30 wide iron. By using this\\nwidth the entire portion of the front that is shown below the double line J\\nA to A can be cut out of one piece. Then the next section of 30 would\\ncover the front by allowing l lap a line J A A, up to the dotted line n", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0194.jp2"}, "195": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK xWANUAL\\n185\\nto R; the rest of the front could be covered by a piece of the size that it re\u00c2\u00ac\\nquires or else this piece could be fastened to the second section and both\\nthese two last pieces could be put up in one. All the other items, such as\\nfitting the oval window and the scroll part of the volute D, as well as the\\nmanner of constructing them, and also the directions for the ornaments\\nused on this dormer window, are precisely the same for the last style of\\narranging the sheets for the front as they are for the first described way of\\nputting them up. I have seen jobs of this kind done both ways. As a\\nmatter of preference I regard the first-described method as the easiest and\\nalso the way that would cut the least iron to waste in this case. I have\\ngiven both ways\u00e2\u0080\u0094the student has his choice.\\nFig. 15G shows by 1, 2, 3 and 4 some methods of laying out the gable\\nas well as the horizontal cornice of the dormer window. By 1 of Fig. 156", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0195.jp2"}, "196": {"fulltext": "186 CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nis shown how sometimes the profile of a raking cornice by using the profile\\nof the horizontal cornice mitering to the same can be made to assume a\\nshape that is entirely different from that which it was originally intended to\\nbe. This may occur by using the wrong profile, or if an architect should\\nnot take the pains to furnish what would be the correct profile in a case as\\npresented by 1 of Fjg. 156; that is, if the gable cornice profile was to be\\narbitrary as the same is given by the line A to B of part 1 in Fig. 156 and the\\nhorizontal cornice as shown should miter to the gable cornice in such a\\nform that the miter line would be shown by a straight line in a plan view\\nof the two numbers as these cornices would show if joined to each other\\nas the foregoing implies. As mentioned in the foregoing, if an architect\\nwere not as careful as he ought to be fora case of this kind and made the\\ndrawing for the horizontal cornice as shown by the profile C to D, without\\nany care whether the same were correct for a square miter joint or not, and\\nif the cornice man, instead of looking up this point as he ought to, proceed\u00c2\u00ac\\ned at once and took his profile to start with from the incorrect outline, C to\\nD, and then laid out the plan for the more conspicuous member, namely,\\nthe raking gable member, this would often cause the same to assume an\\nexaggerated and disproportionate outline, which is the case in this in\u00c2\u00ac\\nstance, as shown by 3 and 4 of Fig. 156, 3 being the profile of the horizon\u00c2\u00ac\\ntal member, while from this is deducted and derived the disproportionate\\nand incorrect profile of the raking gable cornice, as this figure presen ts by\\nthe profile 4 of Fig. 156.\\nAs has been stated in these articles, in order to attain a perfect miter\\nline between two members of a cornice mitering to each other at right\\nangles, but the two members having a different width or different profiles\\nfrom each other, one or the other member must be adapted so that it con\u00c2\u00ac\\nforms to the outline which the member has at the miter line to which it is\\nto join. The practical demonstration of a problem of this class is shown\\nby Figs. 100 and 110 in Chapter XXI, and is therein fully described and\\nexplained. As a matter of fact the two members as shown, although their\\nprofiles C to D and A to B are in their present outline unsuited to\\nother to miter them together, so that a perfectly straight plane would show\\na perfect union or joint between the two sections, the fact remains\\nthat a union between the two sections could be accomplished and a\\nmiter joint made between the two parts, but the miter line would not fol\u00c2\u00ac\\nlow a straight line but would, if such a joint were made, adapt itself and\\nfollow all the in and out curves which would occur by reason of the various\\nbends of one or the other section having to be followed by one section in\\nOlder to establish a junction between the two in one continuous", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0196.jp2"}, "197": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL 187\\njoint from top to bottom of the members. The foregoing gives the reasons\\nwhy two dissimilar moldings which have different outlines from each other\\ncannot miter together at right angles, or at any other angle for that\\nmatter, and have the miter line straight or in one plane vertically as in\\nthis case, unless the profile of one or the other of the sections is first\\naltered so as to be suitable and in the proper shape.\\nAnother point that the student will do well to remember and act. upon\\nis, that he should not make his drawings from the original for some mem\u00c2\u00ac\\nbers where accuracy and detail are of importance to too small a scale, but\\nrather in his studies should draw them out to the full size whenever\\npracticable. The part 1 and 2 of Fig. 156 is an example of what is meant\\nby the foregoing. It will be noticed that in a drawing of this kind the\\nleast little slip of a pencil, or even the width of a line, makes a very ma\u00c2\u00ac\\nterial difference in the measurement of the patterns drawn to so small a\\nscale. I may add that it would be almost impossible to get the correct out\u00c2\u00ac\\nline of a miter unless the greatest pains and time-wasting minuteness of\\ndetail were observed in laying out a stretch-out as 2 of Fig. 156 shows. In\\ncontrast observe how much easier and more correct, even with less care, one\\ncan work if a larger scale is used to study out the various problems given.\\nThen a large scale drawing of any object always gives more satisfaction to\\nthe person reading the same; all the details are easier understood; the\\nvarious proportions are more readily grasped by the mind, and a more\\nlasting impression produced by a large drawing than if such a small scale\\nwere made use of as shown by 1 and 2 of Fig. 156. In the foregoing de\u00c2\u00ac\\nscription of the profile and miter joint of the two members of the dormer\\nwindow cornice, it has been shown to some extent how not to do them and\\nthe reasons therefor; in the following is shown how to do them so as to\\nattain the end sought; namely, a perfect job with the least amount of labor\\nconsistent with good work. Fig. 157 gives the correct delineation of the\\nprofiles of both the gable cornice and the horizontal molding. The outline\\nof the gable molding 1 of Fig. 157 is shown from point 1 to point 20, and\\nhas been deducted from the profile 1 of Fig. 99. The entire outline of the\\nprofile 1 of Fig. 157 is divided into 20 parts in such a manner as is most\\nconvenient and suited to the various curves which constitute the make-up\\nof the profile of this member. The line A B shows the extreme inner\\npoint of contact that any part of this profile has with the dormer. At right\\nangles to line A B, and catting the same at point 20, is the line C D.\\nThis line is the wall line of the sides of the dormer, and as a consequence\\nthe innermost point of contact thit the horizontal cornice has with the\\nsides of the dormer window. Now the first step to take in laying out the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0197.jp2"}, "198": {"fulltext": "188\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nmiter joint for the two members for this cornice is to establish the miter\\nline for the same in the plan X. To do this proceed as follows: drop the line\\n2, 3, D to 2 of profile 1; make the length of the Hue from D to 2 equal to\\nthe distance that the profile 2 projects from line 0 to D to the point 8 of\\nprofile 2, thus establishing point 2 at the extreme point of contact that the\\ntwo profiles have in common on the miter line from point 20 to point 2\\nafter it is drawn and Connects the two points just described. Now as to\\nthe particulars for the profile 2 of the horizontal cornice, the different\\nmoldings, curves and points all line in the same planes vertically on ibis\\nmember as they do in the profile of the gable cornice, the only difference\\nbeing that the points as shown have different positions horizontally in the\\nhorizontal molding than the corresponding points have in the gable\\nmolding.\\nHow to determine the position of each point for the horizontal mold\u00c2\u00ac\\ning is the next move. This is done by dropping line3 from each point of\\nthe profile No. 1 to the miter line, then at right angles to the lines", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0198.jp2"}, "199": {"fulltext": "CORNtCE WORK MANUAL 18$\\nthus drawn and from where they cut or intersect the miter line drop or\\ncontinue the lines down, each one as far beyond the line A, 20 to B as they\\nare in length from the points 1 to 20 of the profile 1 to the line 0, 20 to 1).\\nIf the lines and distances are all drawn out as directed from the profile 1 to\\nthe profile 2, the termination of the lines if drawn and made the lengths as\\ndirected establish the line that the profile has as shown by No. 2 in\\nFig. 157.\\nBy these /operations the rectangular space which is cut by the\\nmiter line between points 20 to 2 is established, and also the length that\\neach line commencing from the points 1 to 20 has between the lines 20 to\\nD for the gable, and between the line 20 to B for the horizontal cornice.\\nThe outline as shown for No. 3 is merely added to show the outline\\nthat each one of the cornices has at the point of contact, as cut by the plane\\nor miter line vertically. By Fig. 157 is also shown the raking miter line\\nof the gable cornice of the dormer window. This is shown by the triangu\u00c2\u00ac\\nlar space between the points A, to 20, or the normal profile line as shown\\nby No. 1, and then the line from point 20 to point E, the extreme or\\nhighest point that the miter joint between the two sides of the gable cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nnice has. As w 11 be seen by examining the drawing, that from the points\\n1 to 20 of profile No. 1, lines are carried horizon f ally and parallel to\\neach other until they cut or intersect the gable miter line from point 20 to\\npoint E. The disposition ot the lines 1 to 20 as shown in Fig. 157 by the\\nprofile 1 and the gable miter, makes it possible to lay out the gable miter\\nline as well as the miter line between the gable and horizontal cornices by\\nusing only one set of lines for both purposes, as is shown in Fig. 158. In\\nFig. 157 is also shown tbe angle that the attic roof has; this is shown from\\npoint 20 to F for the angle-, from the line 20 to C considered as the vertical.\\nThe first step to take in getting out the stretch-out for the gable cornices\\nof the dormer window is to measure up the stretch-out of the profile of\\nsection 1 of Fig. 157. This measures just 14 next draw a line at right\\nangles to one edge of a 14 -wide sheet of iron far enough away from one\\nend to that enough material will be left for the proper laying out of the\\nmiter joint of the gable. The distance that the lino wcu id have to be away\\nfrom one end is to be equal to the distance between the line A B and point\\nX of section 1 of Fig. 158. If the student desires to lay out the left-hand\\nmember, as well as horizontal cornices, he should proceed as follows:\\nDraw the line A to B across the 14 -wide sheet, then step off on this line all\\nthe distances marked off on the profile 1 of Fig. 157. All this\\nis shown done in Fig. 158. Next transpose all the distances\\nfrom the lines contained between the lines A to 20 and 20 to", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0199.jp2"}, "200": {"fulltext": "lyu CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nE. of Fig. 157, to the corresponding lines of section 1 of Fig. 158. This\\nhas been done and at the points on these lines where the distances end, as\\non all the lines from 1 to 20, the miter line X to point 20 has been drawn,\\nas shown in this figure, for the miter line of the raking miter of the gable\\ncornice. For the other side, the miter line is only a reverse duplicate of\\nsection 1 of Fig. 158. The data of the outline for the miter joint X at the\\nlower end of the gable cornice to the horizontal, and the length that each\\nline has to come, where the miter line cuts it in the stretch-out, No. 2\\nof 158, are all shown in plan X of Fig. 157, bounded by line 20 to D, and\\nthe miter line from point 20 to 2. All the distances and lengths of each\\nline have been transposed to the stretch-out, number 2 of Fig. 158, each\\none on its proper and respective corresponding line to the plan of Fig. 157.\\nThe miter joint shows the proper quantity of material cut away for the space\\nbetween the lines 1, 2 and 3 of the lower end of the gable cornice, in order\\nto miter correctly to the shape that the horizontal molding has at this", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0200.jp2"}, "201": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n191\\npoint.\\nThe correct outline that the miter joint has for the end that miters to\\nthe gable cornice is shown, for the horizontal cornice, by section 1 of Fig.\\n159. This stretch-out is only 12 wide for these members. All the par\u00c2\u00ac\\nallel lines from 1 to 20, as drawn in Fig. 159, are placed and correspond\\n2 of Fig. 157. The distance that the miter lin 3 A to B is away from\\nline C to D, of Fig. 159, corresponds to the distance or length that each\\nsimilar line has from line 20 to B of Fig. 157, and the miter line from\\npoint 20 to 2. All the distances have been transposed from these lines to\\nthe lines 1 to 20 of section 1 of Fig. 159, and the miter line A to B of sec\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion 2 has been drawn through the points thus found on each line. In\\norder to obtain the miter line for the horizontal cornice, where it miters\\nagainst the attic roof, Fig. 160 has been drawn. This figure presents the\\ncorrect pitch of the gable cornice, and also gives the correct angle that the\\nhorizontal cornice has when it is in its final position on the dormer win\u00c2\u00ac\\ndow. In connection with this is shown the angle that the pitch of the\\nattic roof baa from the vertical.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0201.jp2"}, "202": {"fulltext": "192\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n7\\nDraw lines from the points 1 to 20 of this profile, but in a\\nhorizontal plane, or, in other words, draw lines from the points\\n1. to 20 of the profile to the line A B, or pitch line of roof; these\\nlines drawn as directed must be at right angles to the vertical line C D.\\nNext transpose all the distances contained between the lines A B and C D.\\non each line from X to X of Fig. 160 to the corresponding lines of. section\\n2 of Fig 159, thus establishing the miter line for the horizontal cornices\\nagainst the slate loof of the attic, which is shown and drawn out in full in\\nsection 2 of Fig. 159. All the foregoing miters, connections and joints can\\nalso be used for the opposite members of the dormer window cornices, onlj\\nthey will have to be laid out on the stretch-out in the reverse order from\\nthat shown in Figs. 157 to 160, when the other or reverse members belong\u00c2\u00ac\\ning to these cornices are laid out and made. Suitable laps must be allowed\\nfor the miter joints. These I have not shown in Figs. 158 and 159. The\\nstudent can supply the deficiency to suit his own taste for whatever style\\njoints he cares to use for joining these parts together.\\nA few remarks and seasonable hints at this stage in regard to how the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0202.jp2"}, "203": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n103\\nvarious members entering into the make-up of the cornices, copings, finials,\\ncrestings, etc., as shown by the designs, Fig. 89, are handled to the best\\nadvantage when put up and placed in position on a job of this kind, may be\\nof benefit to the student. In putting up a gable cornice with raking miter\\nJoints, etc., as the profile No. 7 of Fig. 93, or as shown to a larger scale by\\nFig. 116, there are several styles or methods whereby this end may be ac\u00c2\u00ac\\ncomplished. Fig. 161 shows two styles of wooden lookouts on brackets\\nwhich would be suitable for this case. One style is shown by the solid\\nblock B, D and F C under the sheathing boards A, while a simpler, style is\\nshown by the dotted outline B D and K to R. The profile of the gable\\ncornice, as shown in Fig. 161, is the same as shown for it in Fig. 116;\\nnamely, the normal profile or the profile that the cornice pre\u00c2\u00ac\\nsents if/ cut at right angles as shown in Fig. 116. All the\\nbrackets or lookouts are also placed at right angles to the\\ngable roof in the figures shown. Fig. 162 shows the cornice\\nbraced and secured in position by 3-16 xl\u00c2\u00a3 iron lookouts, one of which is\\nshown from point 1 to 8 in this figure. As will be observed in this figure,\\nthere are no wooden bracket3_or_lookouts shown immediately under the", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0203.jp2"}, "204": {"fulltext": "194\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nsheathing in connection with the iron brace3. At points 2, 4 and 6 are\\nshown the places and positions where the braces are bolted to the pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nfile of the cornice; at point 1 of brace, or at its upper end, a hole is left to\\nconnect a brace of strong wire to it to hold that end in position. In con\u00c2\u00ac\\nnection with the wire brace the crown molding of the cornice is nailed to\\nthe sheathing boards, thus securing that edge of the cornice firmly in place.\\nIt will be noticed that at or behind the foot molding is shown in both Figs.\\n161 and 162 a strip of wood nailed fast to the brick wall, into which at\\nsuitable intervals wooden bricks have been placed for this purpose.\\nFig. 168 gives a side as well as a front elevation of the various wooden\\nbrackets and also the position of the strip behind the foot molding of the\\ngable corifice. Fig. 163 also shows the cornice braced by iron braces from\\na to point 8, where the same project into the brick wall. At points 1 and 2\\nthe brace is fastened to the cornice with bolts and by an extra spike through\\nthe profile of the cornice and each brace to the wooden strip X against the\\nwall of the building. At the upper end at a the brace is fastened by a wire\\nas shown. Thep this figure also shows in connection with the foregoing a\\ndifferent style of wooden bracket from the ptyle shown by the solid line\\nbracket of Pig. 161. The bracket for this Fig. 163 is shown from points 4", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0204.jp2"}, "205": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n195\\nto 5 and 6 to 7, being the same as the dotted line bracket in Fig. 161. The\\nfront view for the bracket in Fig. 163 gives the position that these members\\nhave from this point of view. The upper end tits up snugly under the pro\u00c2\u00ac\\njecting sheathing boards and the lower end rests on the strip against which\\nthe foot molding of the gable cornice is fastened. The foregoing descrip\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion gives some very good ways to put the members of these cornices up\\ninto position on the building. The methods as given for the gable cornice\\ncan also be applied to the horizontal members, but in a somewhat modified\\nform, in short, the profiles and other items, such as the brackets, braces,\\netc., are to be suited to the shapes of the horizontal members as they may\\nneed to be in order that the same will fit and answer the purpose. What\u00c2\u00ac\\never method the student may use of the several thaf; have been described,\\nthe main point is to get all the brackets and braces in perfect unison or line\\non the buildiog; this point satisfactory, a good job can be done. In Chap\u00c2\u00ac\\nter XV numerous hints and suggestions have been given which if thor\u00c2\u00ac\\noughly mastered by the student will be of material aid to him in the plan\u00c2\u00ac\\nning and disposition of methods to be used to fasten these cornices into\\nposition on the building. In regard to the operation of putting the mem\u00c2\u00ac\\nbers in position, providing all the measurements are ascertained and the\\nmembers are made to these measures correctly, so that no deviation of", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0205.jp2"}, "206": {"fulltext": "196\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nlengths nor in the angles of the mitres as shown exists, one of the best\\nmethods is to take the two turrets and secnre them in position by projecting\\nout from the corner of the brick wall two 2 x4 sticks which must be\\nsecured firmly to the wall, and to these anchors or braces fasten the turrets.\\nThen place the two horizontal members A and B, as shown in Fig. 89, to\u00c2\u00ac\\ngether with the two return members which miter to the turrets and have\\npreviously been connected to the long horizontal members A and B, in po\u00c2\u00ac\\nsition as the design demands. Another plan would be to make the member\\nB and the return and abo the turret all in one solid section and put these\\nthree up into position at once. Wnen the horizontal members are placed in\\nposition and provided for put up the two gable members; have the joint to\\nfasten at the center and also both members to fasten to the turrets. The\\nforegoing order of doing this part of the work will be found to give as good\\nsatisfaction as any other way that the work could be done. After the cor-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0206.jp2"}, "207": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL 197\\nnices and their gutters have been attended to put the copings in place and\\nthe head blocks and the deck cresting, at well as tbe deck cornice. The coping\\non the main roof may next be put in place as well as the finial as shown.\\nProviding all the angles and measurements are correct the cornices may be\\nmade in one piece entire; that is, if the same is not too large and unwieldy.\\nIf it is not possible to obtain all the foregoing required measures and data it\\nwill be best to either make these members each one separately or in two\\nparts having only one joint and that in the center or gable miter. The\\nhorizontal cornices are to be kept away a suitable distance from the slate\\nroof so as to allow for the step or counterflashing tins and slate to be\\nproperly placed; the slate adjoining the sides of the dormer are also to be\\nflashed. The copings shown by Figs. 90 and 96 are to be soldered up tight\\nto the finials and the other end for the dormer is to be flashed so that this\\npart of the roof will not leak, while the coping on the main roof is to be\\nboth soldered to the deck-cornice as well as suitably provided with fastenings\\nto keep it down tight to the slate of the roof so as to provide this part with\\na proper and secure joint. The cornices of the dormer window are to be\\nnailed at the top or crown mold to the sheathing boards, while the foot\\nmold can either be nailed or double seamed to the flat part of the front\\nand the sides. This depends altogether on which method the workman\\ngetting out this job decides using. Suitable allowance is to be provided\\nfor whatever method is made use of to accomplish this desired end.\\nThe drawing presented in Fig. 161 shows the front elevations of a two\\nstory building and a tower, which is covered with galvanized iron above\\nthe main cornice line. Only those parts and features of this drawing have\\nbeen given prominence which are necessary to show clearly and fully\\nevery part of this design that is connected with this cornice work and with\\nthe tin and slate roofing. These parts are in this drawing, the front and\\nside porches or porticos A and B. As shown for both, they each have a\\nlower and also a crown corn ice. The deck of each porch is covered with\\ntin for the flat parts, while the curved parts are covered with tin shingles.\\nThe deck of each porch is surmounted at the outer edge by an ornamental\\nrailing. The gable of the front porch cornice is capped by a finial as\\nshown in the drawing. The main cornice of this building extends from C\\nto D; from D it extends around the octagon bay projection as shown, back\\nto point E, where it joins the main cornice course of the square tower.\\nAbove the main cornice is shown a dormer window and four finials. The\\nentire square part of the tower above the lowest part of the main cornice\\nas shown by the line from E to G is covered with galvanized iron cornice\\nwork. The section H is the main tower cornice; section I is a paneled", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0207.jp2"}, "208": {"fulltext": "198\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0208.jp2"}, "209": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL 199\\ncourse with short pilaster columns extending from the top of section H to\\nthe bottom of the top molding of section I. Above section I is shown the\\nsection K and L. The tower changes in shape from a square at the top of\\nsection K or just above the lower part of the blind dormers shown at each\\ncorner of the tower, to an octagon, parts of the eight sides of the tower em\u00c2\u00ac\\nbraced by the section L being covered by tin shingles, while the rest of the\\nsurface of the four sides, above the four corners of the lower part of the\\ntower, have the roofs of the blind dormers mitering against them and are\\ntnus covered. The pediments shown in section L are the last or highest\\nparts of the tower which show the same as the \u00e2\u0080\u0098square parts. The gable\\nof each dormer extends back from the front to where it miters to the\\noctagonal surface of the section L. The roofs of these dormers are also\\nto be covered with tin shingles. The pilasters of the window casing are\\nshown extending from the top of section I to the top of section L. The\\nsection above L is shown by each side having an ornamental circular\\nmolding and fluted panel design. These eight sides are all in section M.\\nSection N is the upper top cornice of the tower. Above this is shown the\\nslate covered roof and the large finial surmounting the highest part of\\nthe entire structure. Fig. 165 shows a right-hand side elevation of the\\nfront bay extension, the front porch and of the tower. It also gives the\\nangle that the front and baok roof have. All the details enumerated and\\npartly described for the front elevation are almost the same for this eleva\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion.\\nThe only difference is that the paneled section I of Fig. 164 extends\\nto and is partly cut into by the roof of the bay, thus causing the section to\\nbe cuj off at an angle as shown in Fig. 164. Fig. 165 also shows the\\nfinials on the tower, the apex of the bay roof and the side view of the finial\\non the gable of the porch pediment. A side elevation of the dormer on\\nthe roof of the bay is also shown. The plan, Fig. 166, shows all the roof\\nsurfaces of the main roof, the tower roof and also the roof or decks of the\\norches. These are shown by A and B; the porch deck C is the roof of\\ndormer of the front bay. T shows the octagon tower roof and also the\\ngable roofs of the blind dormers of the tower. The five finials capping\\nthe different roof ridges of the building and also the finial surmounting\\nthe apex of the tower roof are shown by E for the tower finial, by N for\\nfront porch finial and by D F H and K for. main roof finials. All the\\nridges, hips and valleys are shown by the hips being marked. The val\u00c2\u00ac\\nleys of the main roofs are all marked with a letter V. From point R to\\nthe gutter shown at S a strip of 20 galvanized flashing is to be used and", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0209.jp2"}, "210": {"fulltext": "200\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAI\\nFig 165.\\n3", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0210.jp2"}, "211": {"fulltext": "u\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n201\\nfor that portion of the roof shown by M M the proper size flashing tins\\nare to he used under each slate and against the tower. The hips of the\\noctagon tower are to be fitted with blind flashing and each slate is to be\\nneatly and closely cut and mitered to the adjoining angle that the slate\\non the next side of the tower roof has. The four chimneys are all to be\\nprovided with suitable flashings. All the ridges and hips are to be capped\\nwith copings as shown in the drawing and all valleys are to have the slate\\nlaid close and neatly mitering against each other. These valleys in addi-\\ntion to the regular valley tin are to have a blind flashing tin put undei\\neach joint at the angle of the miter wherever two slates butt against each\\nother. The entire gutters are to be 28 wide, of X tin. The gutters ex\\ntend for the front from X to X and the back gutters from point S to poini\\nL. At points 1, 2 and 3 the 4 tubes for the leader or down spouting arf\\nto be placed.\\nThe front cornice extends from point C of Fig. 164, which\\ncorresponds to the position of the point X of Fig. 166, to the point\\nU to point P in plan, shown by D in Fig. 164, and from these correspond\u00c2\u00ac\\ning points as point P of plan and J) in elevation clear around the octagon\\nbay to X, as shown us plan and in elevation by E, Fig. 164 From point\\nX the profile of the main cornice around the tower changes somewhat from\\nthe profile that the main cornice of the building has, but both cornices\\nare alike as to height and are easily mitered and fitted one to the other at\\npoint X show in Fig. 166. The main cornice also miters to the raking cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nnice of the main side gable of the building at the point X, also shown by\\nFig. 166 in plan. Fig. 167 shows a complete detail diawing of the main", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0211.jp2"}, "212": {"fulltext": "202\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\ncornice drawn to the scale of 1 to the foot. In this figure the general\\noutline of the profile for the cornice is shown to be about the same as Fig.\\n164 shows it, but as to the matter of the enriched frieze course the\\nstamped ornamental scroll work as shown in Fig. 167 may be used in\u00c2\u00ac\\nstead of the ornamentation shown in Fig. 164 for this part. The crown\\nmolding for this design is shown by the member A, Fig. 167; directly\\nunderneath this is shown a wide fascia band B. The profile of the cornice\\nrecedes from point 1 to the bed molding C and from there down along\\nthe dotted line D of the dental course to the bed molding F. The outline\\nof the profile for the brackets is shown from point 1 to 2 between the\\nlower part of the fascia band to the bed molding F. G is the enriched or\\nornamental frieze course and H is the foot molding of this cornice. G is\\nthe enriched or ornamental frieze course and H is the foot molding of\\nthis cornice. All the foregoing description gives the outline of the profile\\nfor both the main cornice and for the brackets. The wall line or the line\\nfrom which the entire projection extends is shown by line x to x, all the\\nrest of this design, Fig. 167, shows a front view of the cornice, the general", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0212.jp2"}, "213": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL 203\\ndisposition of the different members, such as brackets, dentil blocks, mold\u00c2\u00ac\\nings, etc. The girt of the entire profile of this cornice measures 53^ or\\nsay 54 =4 6 The distance around from point x to x is as follows, mea\u00c2\u00ac\\nsured at the outer edge of cornice as shown by plan Fig. 166: From the\\nouter edge at X of a to b is 5 3 b measures 11 6 c is 2 9 d is 8 e,\\nf and g are each 5 10 h is 8 i is 2 9 and X is 2 long, making a sum\\ntotal of 43 5 for *he entire length of the cornice, or say 43 6 x 4 6 =l95f\\nsq. feet. Now allowing 4J Sq. ft. for waste we will make this say 200 sq. ft.\\nAllow one squ-re foot for each bracket; there being 22 of these, makes 22\\nsq. ft. more. Allow 5 q. ft. for 75 dentil blocks, making the total 200 22\\n5=227 sq. ft. of iron for the main cornice shown from point X to X in\\nplan and from C to E in front elevation, Fig. 164. In this cornice there are\\ntwo outside and three inside square return miters and one molding miter\u00c2\u00ac\\ning to a raking cornice from the side gable at X and the other end at X\\nmitering and fitted to the main cornice of the tower. Both these last-men\u00c2\u00ac\\ntioned joints are shown in the plan, Fig. 166. Thus is seen that this cornice\\nhas eleven miter joints in all. This item is to be taken into account when\\nthe time estimate is figured up for this cornice. The next section of the\\nmain cornice of this building which I will show how to measure up is the\\ngable cornice for the left-hand side of building, a3 shown in plan Fig. 166,\\nfrom points X, K to L, and extending back from the gable cornice proper\\nwith a square return to the point r. This section of the cornice from\\npoint X to r is designed in profile to correspond with its raking members\\nin outline to the profile of the main cornice, Fig. 167, from point X to point\\nO. This is shown by Fig. 168. Fart A is in outline the same as the sec\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion of the horizontal cornice, Fig. 167 is, and part B of Fig. 168 shows\\nthe profile of the corresponding raking cornice which miters to the section\\nA. As can readily be deducted from the front elevation and from the plan,\\nFigs. 164 and 166, the raking cornice will have three miter joints, one at\\nthe gable and two joints, one at each lower end where the raking cornice\\nmiters to the horizontal section. The section shown in plan from point L\\nto r is to be in profile the same as part A of Fig. 168, or as shown from X\\nto O in Fig. 167 for the same. The face of this cornice, Fig. 168, shows\\nthat there are to be no dentil blocks on the dentil course, but it is to be\\nplain throughout.\\nThe length of the gable cornice is for each side 13 x2= 26 long\\nfor the both sides, or for the length of the raking gable cornice. The\\nprofile measures in stretch-out 20J or say 21 Thus 26 x21 =45i-\\nsquare feet, are required for this part of the cornice. The section shown in\\nplan from L to r measures 8 long, the girt of profile is 23J This adds", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0213.jp2"}, "214": {"fulltext": "204 CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nanother 8 sq. ft. of mateiial to the list. The profile of the rear and the cor-\\nV,\\nnices at the back ends of the sides on the building are to be as shown in.\\noutline in Fig. 169.? The stretch-out of this profile measures 17J or say\\n18 the entire length of all ihe members of the cornice having a profile as\\nin Fig. 169 are from point r to point s as shown in Fig. 166 or plan. This\\nlength is 5b 8 .\u00e2\u0080\u0098t Thus 58 8 x 18 =88 sq. ft. to be -added to the total\\nquantity of material to be added for this section of the entire cornice. There\\nare four miter joints in this section. The two end joints, one at point r, the\\nother at point S, are each half-sections of a miter joint only/ The joint at\\npoint s is merely to be fitted to ihe outline of the main cornice course as far\\nas required by this member. The other end .of the cornice at point r is to\\nbe fitted to the section L and r, but as may be noticed, the two profiles of\\nthe two sections are not alike in height or in profile. One peculiar feature\\nin this joint is that a four-inch tube is to be let through the cornice at this\\npoint from the gutter; thus the greater part of both the dissimilar profiles of\\nthe two cornice sections will be cut by the outline that the four-ir ch tube\\nhas, and as a consequence the moldings of the two sections are to miter\\nagainst this tube, thereby reducing the amount of contact that the two sec\u00c2\u00ac\\ntions of the cornice should have together, and greatly improving the ap\u00c2\u00ac\\npearance of the remaining part of the irregular joint that these dissimilar\\nmoldings have when joined together. The foregoing embraces all the cor\u00c2\u00ac\\nnices around the main building. The next item will be the cornice around\\nthe square tower shown by H in Fig. 164 and in plan, Fig. 166, from point\\nX to Gto n for its entire length. This from point X to point n is 21 6\\nlong. The stretch-out or girt of section H as shown by Fig. 170, drawn to\\nthe scale of one inch to the foot, is from point 1 to 14 2S\u00c2\u00a7 or say 24", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0214.jp2"}, "215": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nfrom point 14 of profile to point 15 is 17\u00c2\u00a3 or say 18 frjm point 15 to 24\\nis 13\u00c2\u00a3 making altogether 55\u00c2\u00a3 girt measurement for this cornice. Thus\\n21 6 x55 =:99 ft. nearly, or to use even numbers say 100 square feet of\\niron. Now add to this the extra material necessary for the dentil blocks\\nfive square feet, and also allow for the extra material required to make the\\npanels shown for these 10 square feet more, which will make the quantity\\nof iron needed for this cornice 115 square feet. This completes the\\nentire course of the main cornice around the tower and building and\\nenves the iron needed for the same. This total so far is 483|- square feet.\\nFig. 171 shows a sectional elevation of one-half of the pediment\\ncornice for the front porch. It also shows the profile of the main and\\ndeck cornices for both the front and side porch (A and B in plan Fig.\\n166). The average width of the stretch out for the main cornices of\\nboth porches is 42 This includes from point C to D, E to H shown\\nin profile Fig. 171. The stretch-out of the cap cornices for both of the\\nporches is 15 wide each. The elevation as shown by Fig. 171 gives the\\ncorrect position of the g*neral details of the entire jrofile for both cornices", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0215.jp2"}, "216": {"fulltext": "206 CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nof the porches, and it also shows the position and outline of the ornamen\u00c2\u00ac\\ntal scroll shown by X for one side of the pediment; the other side has a\\nsimilar ornamental scroll, which is shown in elevation by Fig. 164. In\\naddition to this it also gives a broken view of part of the ornamental finial\\nwhich is to be placed on the apex of this pediment. From point C to D is\\nshown a section of rihbed coping. The curved roof parts of both front", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0216.jp2"}, "217": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n207\\nand side porch are to be covered with tin shingles.\\nFig. 17*-\\nThe two flat deck roofs are to be covered with flat seamed tin. Two roofs\\nhave curved corners Roof A of front porch has one square and one curved\\ncorner, while roof B of the back porch has two corners that are curved in\\nplan but have a different radius from each other. The curve S of roof A\\nand curve S of roof. B are alike, that is, they have the same radius in\\nplan. Fig. 172 shows a complete plan of the three curved parts in plan of\\nthe two porch roofs. Every necessary line needed to give a correct plan\\nview of both the two large curved parts and the smaller curve S of Fig. 160\\nare shown in Fig. 172. This figure shows by plan A the correct radius for all\\nthe lines of the larger curves and also a side elevation of the correct rela-", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0217.jp2"}, "218": {"fulltext": "208\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nfcive position such a view has to the lines in plan A. By part B the com*\\nplete radius of all the lines needed for the smaller curve are given. These\\ncurves are also placed in their correct relative positions that they have to\\nthe side elevation as in nart, a of Fig:. 172 The part C of this figure\\nshows the profile of all the moldings of these cornices placed in such a\\nposition as to indicate the relative positions they have to each other in a\\nplan view, but by the arrangement as given, are shown so place in profile*\\nBy this disposition of these members we are enabled to use both ways,\\neither above or below the profiles, to show the correct relative positions\\nthese curves have to the profiles of the deck moldings and cornices, as well\\nas the correct relation and position that the smaller curves of the curve B\\nhave to those of the larger curves of part A in a plan view. All this is\\nshown in a general way by the rear porch plan B in Fig. 166 by S and S\\nand is given in detail in Fig. 172. The amount of stretch-out for both the\\ncurved moldings as well as for a straight course, is in a sectional view\\nabout the same, but when the workman comes to lay out the curved mold-\\nngs he will find that they require considerably more material than is\\nneeded to make a straight molding of the same profile. Thi point is cov*\\nered by some cutters when they have a considerable amount of curved\\nwork to get out by allowing one-third more material for a curved molding\\nthan for a straight one, both being of the same profile in section. This\\nmethod answers all purposes where it is not required to be too precise or\\nwhere the absolute required amount has not to be determined in the prelim\u00c2\u00ac\\ninary stages of the estimating on the cost of any certain job of circular\\nmoldings for any cornice. I may venture to state in connection with this\\npoint that the additional one-third of material which some cutters add,\\namply covers all demands for this point, and for this case I have used it in\\nfiguring up the material required for the moldings as shown by Figs. 171 and\\n172. The foregoing understood and by using the methods described, we\\nmay now proceed to figure up the amount of iron required to construct\\nthe cornices for the two porches shown in Fig. 164, the stretch-out of\\nprofile of both main cornices being 42 and for the deck moldings 15\\nThe next step is to measure the lengths of these respective members. The\\ntotal length of straight cornice on porch a is 20 6 on porch B 9 are\\nrequired. Both being the same profile, add these two lengths together.\\nThus 9 -f- 20 6 29 6 -f- 42 103 sq. ft. of material is re\u00c2\u00ac\\nquired for these sections. The curved moldings on porch A are 6 ft. in\\nlength, while those of porch B measure 10 thus 10 -f- 6 16 -f- 42\\n57 J, or say 58 sq. ft. To this amount add one-third or 19 sq. ft., as\\ndirected in the foregoing descriptions, and the result is that for the curved", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0218.jp2"}, "219": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nm\\nmoldings of main cornices of both porches we allow 77 sq. ft. The total\\nlength of the deck moldings of the porches is 16 for porch A and 9 for\\nporch B. Thus we have 9 -f- 16 25 x 15 the stretch-out 31\u00c2\u00a3\\nsq. ft.\\nI will next give the methods for the same purpose for the remainder of\\nthe covering of the square and octagonal tower from the balustrade course\\nor section I to the section N or top cornice of the octagon part of the tower.\\nSection I of Fig. 164, or the balustrade course, is shown drawn to the\\nscale of 1 to the foot by Fig. 173. This section in the plan and both the\\nfront and side elevations run around only three sides of the tower\u00e2\u0080\u0094the\\nfront and back and the right-hand side only, the left-hand side of the tower\\njoining to the roof on a level with the top line of section I, consequently\\nfor this side theie is no course of covering as shown to be on the other\\nthree. The only point where the course would come around and on the\\nleft side is at the corner R shown in plan, but this part, instead of being\\nbrought around, the course is continued at the back in a straight\\nline until the roof X and the roof 0 is brought over with its edge to the line\\nbounding the outside of this course at the top. As will be seen, this course\\nshows on each of the three sides a cap molding, a to b, Fig. 173, each\\nside having two diamond capped panels and also two pilaster columns, as\\nshown by c to d of the same figure. A detail elevation and profile of both\\nthe pilasters and the panels are shown. The stretch-out of the profile for", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0219.jp2"}, "220": {"fulltext": "210 CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nthis section from point a to the bottom line of the cap molding is shown\\nfrom points 1 to 10, and measures 18J for the remainder down, I will\\ntake for the average, both pilasters and panels, the outline or profile of the\\npanel shown in Fig. 173. This measures, from point 1 to 15, 27| add\\nthe length between the points 1 to 10 to this, and we have the total of 45|\\nfor sfreteh-out. The length that this section has is from point XX to R,\\nshown in the plan Fig. 166, and it measures 33 Thus we have\\n38 x45i =125 square feet and a trifle over. The front part of section I\\nmiters to the roof. This cuts away part of the section, but I do not deem\\nthe quantity sufficient to take it into account when figuring up the total,\\ntherefore this has not been done. The next sections which I will discuss\\nare K and L, including the blind dormer fronts, the pilasters and window\\ncasings shown in the front elevation. Fig. 174 shows an enlarged detail\\ndrawing of the blind dormer fronts. There are eight of these fronts on the\\ntower. Each front has two ornamental rosettes\u00e2\u0080\u0094one in the pediment and\\none fixed to the apex of the gable, as shown by Fig, 174. Both in eleva\\nvation and profile or section these rosettes are either to be of stamped zinc\\nor may be made by hand, of galvanized iron. The totil surface of the\\nlower part of one of these dormers, as shown for section K, is from point\\na to b in profile, from point b where the sunken panel begins to its lower\\nend c. from that point to point d at the lowest line of this section 46 and\\nfrom X to X, which measures 38^. This multiplied by 46 the height,\\nmakes 13 square feet, nearly, which multiplied by 8, the number of dor\u00c2\u00ac\\nmers, makes the total for these fronts so far 13x8=104 square feet.\\nAdd to this the extra 3\u00c2\u00a3 square feet of iron needed for tne nine panels and\\nthe half-round moldings R and S for each dormer, which makes 31 x 8=28\\nsquare feet more to be added to the quantity found for these members.\\nThe gable molding K has a stretch-out of 6 for its profile, there being alto\\ngether six feet of this molding for each dormer, making the hngth for the\\neight 6x8=48 this length multiplied by 6 the stretch-out, makes the\\nquantity of iron required for these members 24 square feet. The triangu\u00c2\u00ac\\nlar pediment behind each dormer measures IJ square feet; that is 8 x H=12\\nsquare feet for these surfaces, making the entire total for the eight blind\\ndormers of the tower 168 square feet.\\nThe quantity of iron required for the pilasters and frame for the\\nin section K and L of the tower is shown by the Fig. 175. This figure\\nshows the columns, both in section and elevation, and a profile of the\\nframe which is to be covered. This is shown from point a to b and meas\u00c2\u00ac\\nures between these two points in stretch-out 6 The length of this frame\\nfor the two sides and top is 14 thus 14 x by 6 7 gq. ft. X by 8,", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0220.jp2"}, "221": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL 211\\nwhich is the number of windows in the tower, we have 21 sq. ft. for the\\nframes. The pilaster columns may be taken as having an average of 13\\nin girt and for length each one has in stretch-out G 3 This is for the pilas\u00c2\u00ac\\nter columns for the tower; thus we have 6 x by 6 3 37 6 x by 13\\n41 sq. ft. nearly; add to this the quantity found for the sash frames,\\nwhich is 21 sq. ft. and this makes the total for these members of sections\\nK and L 62 sq. ft. In connection with these figures given for the sections\\nK and L it may be well to state that the side of the tower toward the hip\\nroof which joins to it shows that the sides of the tower are cut by the\\ndotted fines where the roof line is. These dotted fines show that the roof\\ncuts away part of the blind dormers on that side and the pilasters if\\narranged as the other three sides of the tower are. This for the case as\\nshown would demand that some allowance be made for material to make\\nthe upper parts of the pilasters, but as the surface exposed is made flat as", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0221.jp2"}, "222": {"fulltext": "212\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nFi*176-\\nthe pilasters show, the material cut off from the lower part of the blind\\ndormers and which will not be used there can be used for tha,t part of the\\nsection L for which no material has been allowed for and whioh is amply\\nsufficient for those parts.\\nThe section M of the elevation showing the circular moldings and\\nfluted panels are drawn out to the scale of I to the foot and are thus\\nshown by Fig. 176, both in profile and elevation. One-half of elevation\\nbeing sufficient to show all the required details I have only shown that\\n^uch for this section.\\nThe stretch-out of this profile is from a to b, not of course, in this case\\nincluding the projections of the moldings C D, and the flutes E is 8 10 the\\nwidth of each one of the eight sides of the tower is 4 4 thus 4 4 x by\\n8 84 8 x by 8 10 183 sq. ft. nearly. Now measure up the pro\u00c2\u00ac\\nfile of the moldings C and D: these together are 12 wide, the length of the\\nsweep of these moldings is 6 long, thus we have 6 x by 8 48 x by\\n12 48 sq. ft.; now add one-third of this last found, total for waste\\nin cutting, etc., and we have 48 x 16 64 sq. ft. of iron required for the\\nentire circular moldings of all the eight sides of the section M of the tower.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0222.jp2"}, "223": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n213\\nThere are also 128 half-balls or hemispheres required for this eight-sided\\nsection. Sixteen 1\u00c2\u00a3 spun zinc half-balls are shown for a full side by Fig.\\n176. The foregoing deductions for the total quantity of iron required for\\nthis section were arrived at by the following disposition of the members\\nand surfaces entering into the construction of each one of the eight sides,\\none-half of one of them being shown by Fig. 176. From point X to b is\\nto be a straight or flat back, then the raised square panel X the circular\\nmoldings C and D and also the flutes are to be soldered to tdis back all in\\ntheir proper relative positions as demanded by Fig. 176. The total quantity\\nof iron required for the flutes of all the eight sides of section M is 48 sq. ft.\\nThe crown molding or the top course of cornice for the tower is shown\\nby Fig. 177, drawn to the scale of one inch to the foot. The stretch-out\\nof profile for this section N measures 36 the entire length for the eight\\nsides of the tower of this cornice measures 72 thus we have 72 x\\n36 216 square feet of iron required for this section N of the tower.\\nThere are 48 3 half-balls demanded for section N. Allow for these when\\nsumming up the total material required for this job. The next and last\\nmember of this structure, besides the finials, to measure up is the front\\ndormer, projecting from the front bay roof. Au elevation drawn to the\\nscale of one inch to the foot is shown hy Fig-. 178. This figure shows all\\nthe details of the front as well as the profile outlines at the extreme front\\noutline. Fig. 179 shows a side elevation of the covered side and part of\\nthe slate covered roof in connection with the angle line that the roof has,\\nas shown by line a, b.\\nI will first instruct how to measure up the front as shown by Fig. 178.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0223.jp2"}, "224": {"fulltext": "214 CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\nThe stretch-out of the gable molding measures from the point a to b T\\nThere are 6 6 of this molding, making 6 6 x 7 a little over\\nsquare feet, or say 4 square feet for this molding. The pilaster columns\\nhave an average width of 7 and measure in profile for their height each", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0224.jp2"}, "225": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n215\\n33 Thus the two require 3\u00c2\u00a3 square feet of iron. Allow 4 square feet\\nof iron for the curved molding, the sash frame and the pediment flat front.\\nAllowfor the two ornamental rosettes shown in this view. For the mate\u00c2\u00ac\\nrial required for the two sides measure the profile of the horizontal mold\u00c2\u00ac\\ning mitering to the gable molding, then from line a of Fig. 179 to point\\na of the roof angle. This distance is 28 then from a to d\\nis 18\u00e2\u0080\u009d; thus 28 multiplied by 18 equals 3J square feet. As each\\nside has one-half the area that this result would make, by reason of\\nthe roof line cutting the side of the dormer as it does, but as there are two\\nsides and each is just half this area, the result is correct as it stands,\\nnamely, square feet for the two sides of the dormer. The iron required\\nfor the coping for this dormer is 3J square feet, making the total quantity\\nof iron required for the entire dormer 18| square feet.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0225.jp2"}, "226": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n215\\nNext ascertain the quantity of iron required to construct a finial to\\ncap the tower drawn out to the scale of 1 to the foot in Fig. 180, both in\\nelevation as well as plan. To accomplish this proceed as follows: Measure\\nthe outline of profile from a to b. This for Fig. 180 is 48 Next take\\nthe outline of the fluted or ribbed part of plan from a to b which meas\u00c2\u00ac\\nures 12 then measure the width of the top octagonal part near the 8\\nball. This is say 2 for each section. The average width of these pieces", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0226.jp2"}, "227": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL.\\n21?\\nwould be 6 which would be an ample allowance to cut the sections from\\nif they had a gradual slope from a to b, but as the design Fig. 180 is some\\nwider on an average than the figures given before it would be well to allow\\nfor the entire width of the sections 6J thus 6i x 48 =2 1-6 square\\nfeet for each section and 2 1-6 square ft. x 8\u00e2\u0080\u009417^ square feet for the\\nentire finial. One 8 ball is to be charged to the cost of this member. A\\nsimilar method for the large finial can also be used to ascertain the quan\u00c2\u00ac\\ntity of iron required for the two smaller finials, Figs. 181 and 182. These\\ntwo members have each a hexagonal column and are mounted on a square\\nbase. The iron required for the finial shown by Fig. 181 is 5 square\\nfeet, and for the finial Fig. 182 it is 4|- square feet. Both results have been\\narrived at by a similar method to that used to find the area of surface for\\nthe tower finial. There being two finials like the one shown by Fig. 181,\\n11 square feet will be needed for these, making the total 151 square feet ol\\niron. Fig. 188 show r s the front and side elevations of a rather bizarre de\u00c2\u00ac\\nsign for a finial for the gable of pediment for the front porch, shown in\\nFig. 164. The design, although its appropriativeness for the general en\u00c2\u00ac\\nsemble of the entire front of this building is to be admitted, still there is a\\ncertain effect of heaviness about it, that, when this finial is compared wilh\\nthe graceful and delicate design shown by Fig 184, would lead one to give\\nthe last-mentioned finial the preference for an ornament to be placed on\\nthe gable of a pediment, as shown by the Fig. 164. Precisely such a change\\nas the above-mentioned took place and was ordered by the owner of such a\\nbuilding, as the designs show where the choice lay between two.desigus aa", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0227.jp2"}, "228": {"fulltext": "218\\nCORNICE WORK MANUAL\\npresented by Figs. 188 and 184, and he had the choice of style.\\nThe foregoing described circumstances in this case induced me to give\\nboth designs in this instance. I have also given the manner of estimating\\nthe material required to construct either style. To ascertain that required\\nfor a finial as in Fig. 183 measure up the base of front elevation A. This\\nis 1 square foot for the front and the same for the back. It will also re\u00c2\u00ac\\nquire 2 square feet for the two sides of the base shown by B, Fig. 183.\\nThen for the circular column from a to C, shown by both views, it will\\ntake 8J square feet more. The shell head scroll and fan spray ornamenta\u00c2\u00ac\\ntion will require 5J square feet more for this finial, making a total of 13", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0228.jp2"}, "229": {"fulltext": "CORNICE WORK MANUAL\\n219\\nsquare feet. The material required to construct the finial Fig. 184 will be\\nconsiderably less. Each base from the roof to the large 4\u00c2\u00a3 spheres or\\nballs requires 1J equare feet; both together 3 square feet. The two coni\u00c2\u00ac\\ncal parts from above the 4\u00c2\u00a3 balls to the apex of each lequire 2 square\\nfeet. It will take another 1| square foot for the base for the center ball\\nand the connecting rail between the three posts, thus making the total\\nsurface of the iron required for this finial square feet. Add to this total\\ntwo 4| one 8 two 1J and two f spheres or balls, twelve f hemis\u00c2\u00ac\\npheres or half-balls and two ornamental 3 rosettes. This completes the\\ntotal galvanized cornice work that there is about this building, with the ex\u00c2\u00ac\\nception of the hip copings of the roofs.", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0229.jp2"}, "230": {"fulltext": "INDEX\\nit\\nA\\nPAGE\\nAllowance for Waste. 92\\nAngles, Base Degrees of. 92\\nAngle Tret 10\\nArchitrave .10 12\\nArea in Ornamental Pillars. 91\\nArea in Turrets. 91\\nArrow Head Pattern. 55\\nArrow Vane. 100\\nAssembling Cornice Work. 114\\nAttachment, Inking for Compass. 7\\nAttachment, Pencil Point for Compass. 7\\nAxonometrical Triangles 10\\nB\\nBale Sling 82\\nBall and Star, Ornamental. 178\\nBall for Finial. 54\\nBalls, Iron for Circular Supports of. 91\\nBall, Spun Zinc. 54\\nBand Fascia, Face of. 12\\nBar Iron, Sizes of. 19\\nBars Square for Cresting. 173\\nBase Angles, Degrees of. 10\\nBeading Machine 143\\nBeam Compasses 7\\nBed Moldings 12\\nBend, Common. 79\\nBench Cutters 1\\nBevel 7\\nBinding Timbers, Knot For. 79\\nBlock, End 12\\nBlock, Head. 12\\nBlocking Up Raised Work. 152\\nBlock, Pulley 82\\nBlock, Rope Strapped. 82\\nBlocks, Dentil.12-15\\nBlock, Snatch 82", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0230.jp2"}, "231": {"fulltext": "INDEX\\n221\\nPAGE\\nBlocks, Tackle 82\\nBlock, Stop 12\\nBolts for Cornice Scaffoldings. 65\\nBowline Knot 79\\nBrace for Fastening Planceer. 61\\nBraces, Fastening to Galvanized Iron Surfaces. 62\\nBraces, Main, Made in One Piece. 62\\nBraces, Wooden 63\\nBracings and Fastenings of Cornices to Buildings. 56\\nBracket Patterns 28\\nBrackets .14-15\\nBrackets for Staging.. 66\\nBrackets Joining to Planceer. 29\\nBrackets, Modillion 12\\nBrackets, Placing in Position. 58\\nBricks, Wooden. 60\\nButt, Mitres. 13\\nButt, Sling 82\\nC\\nGap of the Turret. 151\\nCartage. 22\\nCask Sling 82\\nCast and Pressed Zinc, Specifications of. 88\\nCement, Roofer\u00e2\u0080\u0099s. 112\\nCenter Ornament for Pediment. 40\\nCenter Piece of Flute, Development of. 50\\nCenter Pieces 15\\nChain Knot 79\\nCircular Ornaments for Cornice. 93\\nCircular Supports of Balls, Iron For. 91\\nClassification of Slate. 109\\nCheating Fascia Band to Planceer. 59\\nClove Hitch 81\\nColumns, Pediment. 40\\nCombination Half Hitch and Timber Hitch. 82\\nCommon Bend 79\\nCompasses, Beam. 7\\nComposition Die, Durability of. 75\\nComputing the Surface of Slate. 108\\nConductors, Specifications of. 87\\nCone, Frustrum of, Stretchout For, Envelope For. 147\\nConstructing Moldings for Turrets. 138\\nConvenient Method for Putting up Cornices in Sections. 59\\nCoping of Gable hi", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0231.jp2"}, "232": {"fulltext": "222\\nINDEX\\nPAGE\\nCoping, Projection on Panel of. 98\\nCopings, End, Paneled.161\\nCopings, Iron For. 91\\nCopings, Material For. 92\\nCopper, Weight of. 19*\\nCopper Work, Specifications of. 88\\nCorbel Blocks. 14\\nCornice. 10\\nCornice, Circular Ornaments For. 93\\nCornice, Cresting 83\\nCornice, Deck Material For. 92\\nCornice Gable .83-126\\nCornice, Gable, Material For. 92\\nCornices, Gable Stretchout For. 189\\nCornice, Horizontal 83\\nCornice, Joining Parts of.\u00e2\u0080\u009e 3\\nCornice, Lintel 13\\nCornice, Material For 92\\nCornice, Method for Putting Up in Sections. 59\\nCornice, Pediment 205\\nCornice, Baking 126\\nCornices, Bracings and Fastenings to Buildings. 56\\nCornice, Scaffolding Bolts For. 65\\nCornices, Measuring of. 17\\nCornice Work, Assembling. 114\\nCornice Work, Defects In. 56\\nCornice, Working Drawings of. 96\\nCornice Work, Scaffolding For. 64\\nCornice Work, Staging For. 64\\nCovering of Octagonal Tower. 209\\nCovering of Square Tower. 209\\nCrayons, Marking. 8\\nCresting Cornice 83\\nCrestings, Material For. 92\\nCresting, Specifications of 88\\nCresting, Square Bars For. 173\\nCrimping Machine 140\\nCrossed Fastening. 80\\nCrown Molding. 12\\nCrown Molding, Pattern For. 35\\nCrushing Besistance of Slate. 109\\nCrystallization Secondary, Planes of, in Slate. 110\\nCurved Molding for Turret. 150\\nCurved Molding Machine. 144\\nCurves, Drawing. 7", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0232.jp2"}, "233": {"fulltext": "INDEX\\n223\\nCutters, Bench\\nCutters, Efficiency of\\nCutters, Tools\\nCutters, Work.\\nPAGE\\n1\\n37\\n3-5\\no\\nD\\nDeck Cornice, Material For.\\nDeck Molding, Pattern For.\\nDeck, Pattern For\\nDefects in Cornice Work.\\nDegree Scales\\nDegrees of Base Angles.\\nDentil Band Pattern\\nDentil Blocks\\nDentil Mold\\nDescriptive Geometry.\\nDetermination of Position for Each Point of Horizontal Molding.\\nDeveloping Square Plorizontal Mitres.\\nDevelopment of Center Piece of Flute.\\nDeveloping of Spiral Stretchouts.\\nDie Composition, Durability of.\\nDies for Ornament Stamping Machine.\\nDifferences in Horizontal Molding Mitering.\\nDividers\\nDormer Window, Gable Cornice For.\\nDormer Windows, Material For.\\nDormer Window, to Measure.\\nDouble Rope, Knot On.\\nDrawing Curves\\nDrawings of Finial.\\nDrawings, Reading of.\\nDrawings Should Be Large Scale.\\nDrawings, Working of Cornice.\\nDrawing Table\\nDrawing Tools\\nDrawing to Scale.\\nDressing Stake\\nDurability of Composition Die.\\n92\\n35\\n35\\n56\\n7\\n10\\n30\\n12-75\\n12\\n13\\n188\\n31\\n50\\n159\\n75\\n73\\n33\\n7\\n185\\n92\\n91\\n79\\n7\\n99\\n13\\n187\\n96\\n1\\n7\\n90\\n111\\n75\\nE\\nEdge, Straight Steel. 5\\nEfficiency of Cutters. 37\\nEmergency Loops\\nEnd Block. 12", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0233.jp2"}, "234": {"fulltext": "224\\nINDEX\\nEnd Copings, Paneled\\nEnds of Rope Fastening.\\nEntablature\\nEnvelope of a Molding.\\nErasers, Rubber.\\nEstimating...\\nEye Splice.\\nF\\nFace of Fascia Band.\\nFascia Band, Cleating to Planceer.\\nFascia Band, Face of.\\nFascia Band, Pattern For.\\nFastening Crossed\\nFastening Fluted Section to Pediment.\\nFastening Rope Ends.\\nFastening Stays and Braces to Galvanized Iron Surfaces\\nFeather End\\nFeather End of Yane, Pattern For.\\nFelting, Specifications of.\\nFelt Roofing\\nFigure-Eight Knot\\nFinial\\nFinial, Ball For.\\nFinial, Drawings\\nFinial, Iron For.\\nFinial, Pattern For.\\nFinials, Material For.\\nFinials on Gable.\\nFinial Staff of, Section For.\\nFinial Yane of, Section For.\\nFlashing, Specifications of.\\nFlooring for Upper and Lower Staging.\\nFlute Center Piece, Development of.\\nFluted Section, Fastening to Pediment.\\nFluted Sections of Pendant.\\nFlute Pattern\\nFlutes Spiral\\nFoot Mold\\nFoot Molding, Profile of.\\nFoot Ruler.\\nForming Machine, Use of.\\nFour-Sided Pyramid, Frustrum of.\\nFour-Way Swivel.\\nFrieze, Panel Sunk.\\nPAGE\\n161\\n80\\n10\\n25\\n8\\n20\\n70\\n12\\n50\\n12\\n35\\n80\\n50\\n80\\n62\\n100\\n55\\n89\\n107\\n70\\n16*\\n54\\n00\\n9-j iy\\n/V 1 I\\n51\\n92\\n91\\n175\\n175\\n80\\n67\\n50\\n50\\n155\\n49\\n156\\n12\\n24\\n6\\n48\\n51\\n56\\n15", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0234.jp2"}, "235": {"fulltext": "INDEX\\n225\\nPAGE\\nFrieze Section 12\\nFront Elevation of Tower. 197\\nFrnstrum of Cone, Stretchout for Envelope of. 147\\nFrustrum of Four-Sided Pyramid. 51\\nC\\nGable, Coping of. 91\\nGable Cornice for Dormer Window. 185\\nGable Cornice .83-126\\nGable Cornice, Material For. 92\\nGable Cornices, Stretchout For. 189\\nGable, Finials on 91\\nGable Mitres. 13\\nGable Moldings 13\\nGalvanized Iron Sheeting, Specifications of. 88\\nGalvanized Iron Surfaces, Fastening Stays to. 62\\nGalvanized Iron Cornices, Specifications of. 87\\nGeometry, Descriptive 13\\nGutters, Specifications of 87\\nH\\nHalf Hitch\\nHalf Hitch and Timber Hitch, Combination of.\\nHammer, Slater\u00e2\u0080\u0099s.\\nHammock Hitch\\nHaswell\u00e2\u0080\u0099s Table of Safe Load of Ropes.\\nHead Blocks\\nHead Blocks, Iron For.\\nHead Blocks, Material For.\\nHead Molds\\nHeating Zinc Sheets.\\nHemispheres Ornamental\\nFlip Moldings\\nHitch, Clove.\\nHitch, Half\\nHitch, Hammock\\nHitch, Timber\\nHoisting Tackle, Management of.\\nHorizontal Cornice\\nHorizontal Cornice Miters\\nHorizontal Miter Patterns.\\nHorizontal Molding, Determination of Position for Each Point of..\\nHorizontal Molding Mitering, Differences in.\\nHorizontal Moldings with Different Profiles, Miter Line For.\\n81\\n82\\n111\\n82\\n82\\n168\\n91\\n92\\n12\\n74\\n150\\n13\\n81\\n81\\n82\\n81\\n75\\n83\\n103\\n113\\n188\\n33\\n41", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0235.jp2"}, "236": {"fulltext": "226\\nINDEX\\nPAGE\\nI\\nInking Attachment for Compass...\\nInside Mitres\\nIron for Circular Supports of Balls.\\nIron for Copings. 91\\nIron for Finial.. 217\\nIron for Head Blocks. 91\\nIron for Pilasters 210\\nIron Lookouts. 193\\nJ\\nJoining Brackets to Planceer.\\nJoining Parts of Cornice.\\nK\\nKnife, Slater s.\\nKnot, Bowline.\\nKnot, Chain\\nKnot, Figure-Eight\\nKnot for Binding Timbers.\\nKnot, Over-Handed\\nKnot on Double Pope.\\nKnot, Eeef..\\nKnot, Sailor\u00e2\u0080\u0099s, Slip Clinch, etc.\\nKnot, Square\\nKnot, Waterman\u00e2\u0080\u0099s\\nL\\nLever, Securing\\nLineal Perspective\\nLintel Cornice\\nLoad Safe for Ropes.\\nLookouts, Iron\\nLookouts, Wooden\\nLookouts, Wooden, on Brackets.\\nLoops, Emergency\\nM\\nMachine, Beading.\\nMachine, Crimping.\\nMachine for Making Curved Moldings\\nMachine, Farming, Use of.\\n29\\n28\\n112\\n79\\n79\\n79\\n79\\n79\\n79\\n79\\n79\\n79\\n81\\n72\\n7\\n13\\n82\\n193\\n59\\n193\\n80\\n143\\n140\\n144\\n48", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0236.jp2"}, "237": {"fulltext": "INDEX\\nPAGE\\nMachine for Stamping Ornaments. 69\\nMachine for Stamping Ornaments, Dies For. 73\\nMain Braces Made in One Piece... 62\\nMaking Sisal Ropes Heavy. 83\\nManagement of Rope and Hoisting Tackle. 75\\nMarking Crayons. 8\\nMarlin Spike 79\\nMaterial for Copings 92\\nMaterial for Cornice 92\\nMaterial for Crestings 92\\nMaterial for Deck Cornice. 92\\nMaterial for Dormer Window. 92\\nMaterial for Finials. 92\\nMaterial for Gable Cornice 92\\nMaterial for Head Blocks. 92\\nMaterial for Ridge Cresting. 92\\nMaterial for Turrets. 92\\nMaterial for Under Blocks. 92\\nMeasuring of Cornices.\u00e2\u0080\u00a2. 17\\nMeasuring Dormer Window 91\\nMechanical Generalship, Scope For. 114\\nMetallic Skylights, Specifications of 87\\nMethod for Putting up Cornices in Sections. 59\\nMethod of Stamping Ornaments. 75\\nMitering, Differences in Horizontal Molding. 33\\nMitering with the Turrets.. 122\\nMitre, Horizontal Patterns for. 113\\nMitre Line for Raking Molding. 127\\nMitre Line for Two Horizontal Moldings with Different Profiles. 41\\nMitre Line with Profile Above or Below. 27\\nMitre Patterns, Right Angle Return. 35\\nMitre Pediment. 127\\nMitre Right Angled Pattern For. 23\\nMitres.\u00e2\u0080\u00a2. 13\\nMitres, Horizontal Cornice 103\\nMitres, Square Horizontal Development of. 31\\nModillion Brackets 12\\nModillion Ornaments 12\\nMold, Dentil. 12\\nMold, Foot. 12\\nMolding, Crown. 12\\nMolding, Curved for Turret. 150\\nMolding, Envelope of. 25\\nMolding, Mitering, Horizontal, Differences in. 33\\nMolding Raking Mitre Line For. 127", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0237.jp2"}, "238": {"fulltext": "228\\nINDEX\\nPAGE\\nMoldings, Bed. 12\\nMoldings for Turrets 138\\nMoldings, Hip. 13\\nMoldings, Gable 13\\nMoldings, Ridge 15\\nMolds, Head 12\\nMold, String 12\\nN\\nNecessary Qualities of Slate.\\nOctagonal Tower, Covering of.\\nOrnamental Ball and Star.\\nOrnamental Conductor and Heads, Specifications of\\nOrnamental Hemispheres.\\nOrnamental Pillars, Area of.\\nOrnamental Scroll Work, Stamped.\\nOrnamental Turrets\\nOrnamental Turrets, Position of.\\nOrnamental Center for Pediment.\\nOrnaments\\nOrnament \u00e2\u0080\u009cSmoking\u00e2\u0080\u009d Side of.\\nOrnaments, Circular for Cornice.\\nOrnaments, Method of Stamping.\\nOrnaments, Modillion\\nOrnament Stamping Machine...\\nOrnament Stamping Machine, Hies For.\\nOrnament, Zinc for Pediment.\\nOver-Handed Knot\\nOutline of Turret\\nOutside Mitres\\nP\\nPacking Stick\\nPaneled End Copings\\nPanel of Coping, Projection on.\\nPanel Section.\\nPanel Section, Pattern For.\\nPanel, Sunk Frieze.\\nPanels, Washboard\\nPaper Patterns, Weight For.\\nPaper, Roofing.\\n109\\n209\\n178\\n87\\n150\\n91\\n202\\n103\\n84\\n40\\n55\\n74\\n93\\n75\\n12\\n69\\n73\\n40\\n79\\n_L nj\\n13\\n80\\n161\\n98\\n12\\n33\\n15\\n15\\n8\\n107", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0238.jp2"}, "239": {"fulltext": "INDEX\\n229\\nPAGE\\nPattern for Arrow Head 55\\nPattern for Crown Molding. 35\\nPattern for Deck. 35\\nPattern for Deck Molding. 35\\nPattern for Dentil Band. 30\\nPattern for Fascia Band. 35\\nPattern for Feather End of Vane. 55\\nPattern for Flutes. 49\\nPattern for Pillar. 104\\nPattern for Planceer 30\\nPattern for Rays. 49\\nPattern for Right Angled Mitre. 23\\nPattern for Top Section of Pediment. 44\\nPattern for Volute-Shaped Scroll. 184\\nPatterns, Bracket 28\\nPatterns for a Finial. 51\\nPatterns for a Segmental Section of a Pediment. 44\\nPatterns for Panel Section. 33\\nPatterns, Horizontal Mitre. 113\\nPatterns, Mitre, Right Angle Return. 35\\nPatterns of Turrets 135\\nPatterns, Paper, Weight For. 8\\nPattern, Spear Head 55\\nPatterns, Pediment 39\\nPediment .15-16\\nPediment Center, Ornament For. 40\\nPediment Columns 40\\nPediment Cornice 205\\nPediment, Fastening Fluted Section to. 50\\nPediment Mitre. 127\\nPediment Patterns 39\\nPediment Pilasters 40\\nPediment Pillar. 40\\nPediment, Segmental Section of Pattern For. 44\\nPediment, Stamped Zinc Ornament For. 40\\nPediment, Top Section of Pattern For. 44\\nPegs for Hanging up Rope. 68-\\nPencil Point Attachment for Compass. 7\\nPendant, Fluted Sections of. 133\\nPerfect Alignment Essential. 136\\nPerspective Lineal 1\\nPieces, Center\\nPilasters, Iron For. -1^\\nPilasters, Pediment ^0\\nPillar Pattern", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0239.jp2"}, "240": {"fulltext": "230\\nINDEX\\nPillars.\\nPillars, Ornamental Area of.\\nPillars, Pediment\\nPlacing Small Brackets in Position.\\nPlanceer.\\nPlanceer, Brace for Fastening.\\nPlanceer, Pleating Fascia Band to.\\nPlanceer, Joining Brackets to.\\nPlanceer Pattern.\\nPlanes of Secondary Stratification in Slate\\nPolygons, Properties of.\\nPosition of Ornamental Turrets.\\nPreservation of Tools.\\nPressed and Cast Zinc, Specifications of.\\nPreventing Unnecessary Waste of Rope.\\nProfile Above or Below Mitre Line.\\nProfile of Foot Molding.\\nProjection on Panel of Coping.\\nProperties of Polygons.\\nProtractor Scales\\nPulley Blocks\\nPulley Wheel.:.\\nPyramid, Four-Sided Frustrum of.\\nPAGE\\n103\\n91\\n40\\n58\\n12\\n61\\n59\\n29\\n30\\n110\\n9\\n84\\n68\\n88\\n77\\n27\\n24\\n98\\n9\\n7\\n82\\n82\\n51\\nR\\nRaised Work, Blocking Up..\u00c2\u00ab 152\\nRaking Cornice 126\\nRaking Mitres 13\\nRaking Molding, Mitre Line For. 127\\nRay Pattern 49\\nReading of Drawings. 13\\nReef Knot 79\\nResistance, Crushing, of Slate. 109\\nRidge Coping of Dormer Window, Surface of. 91\\nRidge Cresting, Material For. 92\\nRidge Moldings. 13\\nRight Angled Mitre Pattern. 23\\nRight Angle Return Mitre Patterns. 35\\nRipper. 112\\nRoofers, Cement 112\\nRoofing Felt 107\\nRoofing Paper 107\\nRoofing Stake Ill\\nRoof, Slating. 110", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0240.jp2"}, "241": {"fulltext": "INDEX\\n231\\nS\\nRope Ends, Fastening.\\nRope, Management of\\nRope, Pegs for Hanging Up.\\nRope, Preventing Unnecessary Waste of\\nRopes, Safe Load For.\\nRopes, Sisal, to Make Heavy.\\nRope-Strapped Block\\nRope, to Splice.\\nRubber Erasers\\nRules, Foot\\nRules, Scale\\nPAGE\\n80\\n75\\n68\\n77\\n83\\n88\\n83\\n77\\n8\\n6\\n6\\nS\\nSafe Load for Ropes. 83\\nSailors Knot, Slip, Clinch to. 79\\nScaffoldings, Bolts For. 65\\nScaffolding for Cornice Work...! 64\\nScale, Drawing to. 90\\nScale Rules 6\\nScales, Degree 7\\nScales, Protractor 7\\nScope for Mechanical Generalship. 114\\nScroll Pattern, Volute Shaped. 184\\nScroll Work, Ornamental, Stamped. 303\\nSection, Frieze. 13\\nSection, Panel..*.13-15\\nSection, Spiral 188\\nSections for Staff of Finial. 175\\nSections for Vane of Finial. 175\\nSecuring Lever 73\\nSegmental Section of a Pediment Pattern for. 44\\nShears. 9\\nSheeting, Galvanized Iron, Specifications of. 88\\nSheets, Zinc, Heating. 74\\nSide of Ornament Smoking. 74\\nSisal Ropes, Making Heavy. 88\\nSize of Zinc Sheets. 30\\nSizes of Bar Iron. 19\\nSlate, Classification of 109\\nSlate, Computing the Surface of. 108\\nSlate, Crushing Resistance of. 109\\nSlate, Necessary Qualities of. 109\\nSlate, Planes of Secondary Stratification in. 110\\nSlater\u00e2\u0080\u0099s Hammer. Ill\\nSlater\u00e2\u0080\u0099s Knife Ill", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0241.jp2"}, "242": {"fulltext": "*232\\nINDEX\\nPAGE\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2Slate, Square of. 108\\nSlate, Square of, Nails for Laying. 107\\nSlate, Weight of 108\\nSlating 105\\nSlating a Roof 110\\nSlating, Specifications of. 88\\nSling, Bale. 82\\nSling, Butt. 82\\nSling, Cask. 82\\nSlip-Clinch. 79\\nSlip-Clinch to a Sailor\u00e2\u0080\u0099s Knot. 79\\n\u00e2\u0080\u0099\u00e2\u0080\u009cSmoking\u00e2\u0080\u009d Side of Ornament.,. 74\\nSnatch Block. 82\\nSpear Head 100\\nSpear Head Pattern 55\\nSpecifications of Conductors.. 87\\nSpecifications of Copper Work.. 88\\nSpecifications of Cresting 88\\nSpecifications of Felting 89\\nSpecifications of Flashing. 89\\nSpecifications of Galvanized Iron Cornice. 87\\nSpecifications of Galvanized Iron Sheeting. 88\\nSpecifications of Gutters 87\\nSpecifications of Metallic Skylights. 87\\nSpecifications of Ornamental Conductors and Heads. 87\\nSpecifications of Pressed and Cast Zinc. 88\\nSpecifications of Slating. 88\\nSpecifications of Tin, Galvanized Iron, Slate and Copper Work. 87\\nSpecifications of Tinning. 88\\nSpiral Flutes 156\\nSpiral Section 183\\nSplicing a Worn Rope. 77\\nSpun Zinc Ball. 54\\nSquare Bars for Cresting. 173\\nSquare Horizontal Mitres, Development of. 31\\nSquare Knot 79\\nSquare Mitres 13\\nSquare of Slate. 108\\nSquare of Slate, Nails for Laying. 107\\nSquares, Tee 5\\nSquare Tower, Covering of. 209\\nSquare, Wooden 7\\nStaff of Finial, Sections For. 175\\nStaging, Brackets For.. 66\\nStaging, Flooring For. 67", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0242.jp2"}, "243": {"fulltext": "INDEX\\nStaging for Cornice Work.\\nStake, Roofing\\nStamped Ornamental Scroll Work.\\nStamped Zinc Ornament for Pediment.\\nStamping Ornaments, Machine For.\\nStamping Ornaments, Method of.\\nStays, Fastening to Galvanized Iron Surfaces\\nSteel, Straight Edge.\\nStick, Packing.\\nStop Block.\\nStraight Edge Steel\\nStratification, Secondary Planes of, in Slate.\\nStretchout for Gable Cornices\\nStretchout of Envelope for Frustrum of Cone.\\nStretchouts Spiral, Development of.\\nString Mold.\\nSunk Frieze Panel\\nSurface of Eidge Coping of Dormer Window\\nSweeps\\nSwivel, Four Way.\\nSwivel Joint\\nSwivel Joint for Vane.\\nT\\nTable, Drawing\\nTackle Blocks\\nTackle Hoisting, Management of.\\nTacks, Thumb.\\nTees, Three Way.\\nTee Squares.\\nThree Way Tees\\nThumb Tacks.\\nTimber Hitch\\nTimber Hitch and Half Hitch, Combination of\\nTimbers, Knot for Binding.\\nTinning, Specifications of.\\nTools, Cutter\u00e2\u0080\u0099s..\\nTools, Drawing\\nTools, Preservation of\\nTop Section of Pediment, Pattern For.\\nTower, Front Elevation of.\\nTret Angle\\nTriangles, Axonometrical.\\nTruss.\\nTurret, Cap of\\n233\\nPAGE\\n64\\n111\\n202\\n40\\n69\\n75\\n62\\n5\\n80\\n12\\n5\\n110\\n189\\n147\\n159\\n12\\n15\\n91\\n7\\n56\\n56\\n176\\n1\\n82\\n75\\n9\\n72\\n5\\n72\\n9\\n81\\n82\\n79\\n88\\n3-5\\n7\\n68\\n44\\n197\\n10\\n10\\n12\\n151", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0243.jp2"}, "244": {"fulltext": "234\\nINDEX\\nTurret, Curved Molding For.\\nTurrets, Area of.\\nTurrets, Material For.\\nTurrets, Mitering With.\\nTurrets, Moldings For.\\nTurrets, Outline of.\\nTurrets, Ornamental\\nTurrets, Ornamental, Position of.\\nTurrets, Patterns of.\\nU\\nFse of Farming Machine.\\nUnder Blocks, Material For.\\nV\\nValleys.\\nVane, Arrow\\nVane, Feather kind of Pattern For.\\nVane of Finial, Sections For.\\nVane, Swivel Joint For.\\nVolute.\\nVolute Shaped Scroll, Pattern For.\\nW\\nWashboard Panels.\\nWaste, Allowance For.\\nWaste of Rope, to Prevent.\\nWaterman\u00e2\u0080\u0099s Knot\\nWeight for Paper Patterns.\\nWeight of Copper.\\nWeight of Nails Per Square of Slate.\\nWeight of Slate.\\nWheel Pulley\\nWindows, Dormer, Material For.\\nWooden Braces\\nWooden Bricks\\nWooden Lookouts.\\nWooden Lookouts on Brackets.\\nWooden Square.\\nWorking Drawings of Cornice.\\nWork of Cutter.\\nWorn Rope, Splicing.\\nZ\\nZinc Ball, Spun.\\nZinc Ornament for Pediment.\\nZinc, Pressed and Cast, Specifications of\\nZinc Sheets, Heating.\\nZinc Sheets, Size of.\\nPAGE\\n150\\n91\\n92\\n122\\n138\\n122\\n103\\n84\\n135\\n48\\n92\\n94\\n100\\n55\\n175\\n176\\n183\\n184\\n15\\n92\\n77\\n81\\n8\\n19\\n107\\n108\\n82\\n92\\n63\\n60\\n59\\n193\\n7\\n96\\n3\\n77\\n54\\n40\\n88\\n74\\n20", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0244.jp2"}, "245": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0245.jp2"}, "246": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0246.jp2"}, "247": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0247.jp2"}, "248": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3998", "width": "2558", "jp2-path": "corniceworkmanua00john_0248.jp2"}}